You are on page 1of 342

Alspa GD2000E

Technical Manual

for models GD2005E to GD21131E

CEGELEC INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS Ltd,


Kidsgrove,
Stoke-on-Trent,
Staffordshire, ST7 1TW
ENGLAND

Telephone: Stoke-on-Trent (0782) 783511 Int (44 782) 783511)


Telex: 36293/4
Fax: (Group 3) Stoke-on-Trent (0782) 776329 Int (44 782) 776329

The Company’s policy is one of continuous development. Every effort has been made to
ensure accuracy during the preparation of this manual. However Cegelec reserves the
right to change specifications without notice and to supply products which may differ
from those described and illustrated in this technical manual. No liability whatsoever
can be accepted for errors, omissions or inaccuracies in this manual.

Print Home
Acknowledgements

MODBUS is a registered trade name of Modicon Electronics Limited.

Publication No. T1635 Issue 2 (9/96)

©1996 CEGELEC Industrial Controls, England.

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

WARNINGS

WARNING

THIS EQUIPMENT HAS A WEIGHT IN EXCESS OF 5kg.

ALL EQUIPMENT IN EXCESS OF 5kg SHOULD BE LIFTED WITH LIFTING


APPARATUS
WARNING.001

WARNING
THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGES.

THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE ENCLOSED WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED


AND BEFORE THE EQUIPMENT IS ENERGISED.
WARNING.002

WARNING

HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT FLOWS TO GROUND WHEN THIS EQUIPMENT IS


ENERGISED.

GROUND CONNECTIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT AND TO THE MOTOR(S)


POWERED BY THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED AT ALL TIMES.
WARNING.003

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH ENERGY LEVELS EXIST WITHIN THIS


EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE PRESENT FOR 5 MINUTES AFTER THE EQUIPMENT
IS ISOLATED FROM ALL ENERGY SOURCES.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE ISOLATED AND ALL MOTORS CONNECTED TO


THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE AT A STANDSTILL FOR A PERIOD OF 5 MINUTES
BEFORE ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT IS ALLOWED.
WARNING.004

WARNING

WHEN THE DRIVE IS CONFIGURED TO AUTO-RESTART, IT IS POSSIBLE FOR


THE MOTOR TO START ROTATING WITH NO OPERATOR COMMAND.

IF THE DRIVE IS CONFIGURED TO AUTO- RESTART, IT MUST BE ENSURED


THAT ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL
ARE TAKEN.
WARNING.005

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page iii

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

WARNING

ALL ITEMS PROVIDED MUST BE CONNECTED TO EARTH FROM THE EARTH


TERMINAL PROVIDED.

THE MINIMUM SIZE OF CONDUCTOR OF THE SAME MATERIAL TO BE USED


IS: 2.5 mm2 FOR POWER CONDUCTORS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 5 mm2
OR
HALF THE CROSS SECTIONAL AREA FOR LARGER POWER CONDUCTORS

WHERE NO EARTH TERMINAL IS PROVIDED NIBBED SCREWS OR INTERNAL


TOOTHED LOCK WASHERS MUST BE USED TO ENSURE THAT PAINT AND
OTHER INSULATING FINISHES ARE REMOVED.
WARNING 006

WARNING

THIS ITEM SHOULD ONLY BE FITTED BY A SKILLED PERSON WHO HAS BEEN
TRAINED
BY
CEGELEC INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS LIMITED
OR
AN AUTHORISED TRAINING CENTRE
WARNING 007

WARNING

WHEN USING THIS SOFTWARE, THE USER PROGRAM MUST INCLUDE THE
CORRECT USE OF THE DIAGNOSTIC DATA TO ENSURE THAT THE DATA
EXCHANGED IS VALID, ERROR FREE AND CURRENT
WARNING 008

WARNING

RADIO TRANSMITTERS WITH A TRANSMIT POWER GREATER THAN 2W MAY


NOT BE USED IN THE VICINITY OF THE DRIVE.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS WITH A TRANSMIT POWER LESS THAN 2 W MAY NOT


BE USED WITHIN 2M OF THE DRIVE.
WARNING 009

WARNING

IN THE EVENT OF FIRE TOXIC OR NOXIOUS FUMES MAY BE EMITTED.


WARNING 010

Page iv GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

WARNING

THE COMBINED AUDIO NOISE EMITTED BY FANS IN AN INSTALLATION MAY


BE GREATER THAN 70dB(A) DEPENDANT ON THE AIR FLOW PATH.

THE MEASUREMENT OF THE INSTALLATION AUDIO NOISE LEVEL IS ADVISED.

THE USE OF EAR DEFENDERS IS RECOMMENDED WHEN THE AUDIO NOISE


LEVEL EXCEEDS 70dB(A).
WARNING 011

WARNING

PRODUCTS SUPPLIED AS LOOSE ITEMS MAY HAVE HIGH VOLTAGES


EXPOSED.

ALL OPEN CONNECTIONS MUST BE SUITABLY ENCLOSED WHEN THE


EQUIPMENT IS ASSEMBLED AND BEFORE THE EQUIPMENT IS ENERGISED.
WARNING 012

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page v

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

CAUTIONS

CAUTION

ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE
This equipment contains solid state devices which may be affected by
electrostatic discharge.

When this equipment is handled, static handling precautions in accordance


with Protection of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices, Part 1,General Requirements
, BS EN 100015 Pt.1 (1990) must be observed.
CAUTION.001

CAUTION

TEST EQUIPMENT
This equipment contains semi-conductor devices and other similar
components, e.g. integrated circuits, plastic film potentiometers, etc., which
may be damaged by the use of incorrect test equipment, e.g. high voltage
insulation testers.

Insulation testing should be carried out in accordance with this manual.

Insulation testing of cables must be carried out with the cables disconnected
from the equipment.
CAUTION.002

CAUTION

MANUALS
The software include in this manual is an integral part of the manual and the
software must be used in conjunction with this manual. Other versions of the
software may not be compatible with this manual and vice-versa.
CAUTION.003

MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

This equipment should be perodically inspected and tested and a report on its
condition obtained, as prescribed in the Requirements for Electrical
Installations BS7671.
CAUTION.004

Page vi GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

CABLE RESTRAINT

CAUTION

All conductors connected to this product must be restrained.


CAUTION.005

EXIT AIR FLOW

CAUTION

Air used to cool the product is unfiltered.


Air ejected from the product may contain particles of dirt.
Air outlets should deflect the air away from eyes.
CAUTION.006

SAFETY SYSTEMS

CAUTION

This product must not be used as a single item safety system.


The product may be used as a component in a voting safety system.
CAUTION 007

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page vii

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

Symbols used in GD2000E equipment

PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINAL. THIS MUST BE CONNECTED TO EARTH


(GROUND).

CAUTION, READ INSTRUCTION BOOK.

CAUTION

WARNING, DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

ATTENTION, OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTOSTATIC


DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES.

Page viii GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

Health and Safety

COMPLIANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL

For the safety of all personnel permitted to work on or in the vicinity of this equipment,
the user should comply with the instructions and information contained in this manual.

In order to preserve the safety of the equipment during installation and operation the
user must ensure that personnel are qualified and trained in the operation of the
equipment.

The hazards associated with this equipment are predominantly electrical. Voltages up to
and exceeding 800 volts may be present while the equipment is operating and for a
period after the sources of energy are removed. These voltages will give severe
electrical shock which may kill.

It must be remembered that rotating motors are a source of energy and may maintain
the voltages on the equipment.

Only trained, qualified personnel should install and maintain the equipment.

The installation and maintenance of the equipment must be carried out in the manner
described in this manual. These instructions are designed to provide a safe installation
which complies with the international standards listed within this manual.

Any question or doubt concerning the equipment should be referred back to CEGELEC
Industrial Controls Ltd.

In addition to these instructions, the user should take note of any local or national
safety requirements particular to their installation.

The equipment has been designed to operate in an industrial environment, the details
of which are given within this manual. Care must be observed that these conditions are
maintained at all times and your attention is particularly drawn to the electromagnetic
emission and susceptibility conditions and the personnel safety protection provided by
the enclosure which will be changed when covers are removed and enclosure doors are
open.

GENERAL

Care has been taken with selection of all components, interconnections, housing and
packaging and in the design and manufacture of this equiment to minimize the risk to
the health and safety of all personnel who are in contact with this equipment during its
life, when the equipment is properly handled and used.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page ix

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

Modern high technology materials have been used in the manufacture of the
equipment to ensure optimum performance. Some of these materials are toxic under
certain conditions. Mechanical or electrical damage is unlikely to give rise to any direct
hazard, but toxic vapours may be generated if the materials are heated to destruction
and it is important that the recommendations given below are observed.

Care should be taken to ensure that all personnel who may handle, use or dispose of
this equipment are aware of the necessary precautions.

DISPOSAL

This equipment or any part of the equipment should be disposed of in accordance with
the relevant legislation; in the United Kingdom, disposal should therefore be carried out
in accordance with the Deposit of Poisonous Waste Act 1972 and the Control of
Pollution Act 1974, or with the latest legislation.

Some devices within this equipment may contain beryllium oxide as an isolating barrier.
Such devices must be disposed of as harmful waste.

FIRE

The products when used within the specified limits do not present a fire hazard.

Electronic devices within this equipment may contain arsenic, beryllium, lead, mercury,
selenium, tellurium or similar hazardous materials or compounds which, if exposed to
high temperature may emit toxic or noxious fumes.

Most device encapsulation materials are flammable and care should be taken in the
disposal of the equipment, and, in the event of a fire, the handling of damaged
equipment. Toxic fumes may be emitted if the devices are burned.

HANDLING

Normal handling of the equipment is safe. However, care must be exercised with those
devices incorporating glass or plastic. If these devices are broken or damaged,
precautions must be taken against the hazards that may arise.

For broken glass or ceramic protective clothing such as gloves must be worn. For toxic
materials, vapour, skin contact and inhalation must be avoided.

SUBSTANCES

Substances that may be included in this equipment are:

Arsenic
Beryllium oxide
Boric acid
Ethylene Glycol
Phosphoric acid

Page x GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

Phthalic acid
Tributylamine
Triethaylamine

Certain substances such as those containing arsenic, beryllium, indium, lead, lithium,
selenium, tantalum, etc may be toxic by ingestion or inhalation.

Beryllium oxide dust is toxic if inhaled or if particles enter the skin through a cut or
abrasion.

Electrolytic capacitors contain a non-carcinogenic electrolyte which has a low acute


toxicity which may cause slight irritation to the skin if contact is prolonged.

HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS

Components that may include hazardous substances are:-

– Batteries - Lithium
– Optical devices - Arsenic
– Thyristors - Beryllium Oxide
– Electrolytic capacitors - Electrolyte.
– All encapsulated devices - Plastic (generates an inhalation risk in a fire).
PRECAUTIONS

Precautions to be followed in the event of damage to the equipment, except where


special precautions to be followed are listed above, include:-

After skin contact

– wash thoroughly with soap and water. If contact is where the skin is broken, medical
advice should be sought.

After eye contact

– wash immediately with copious amounts of water and seek medical advice.

After inhalation

– seek medical advice.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page xi

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

About this Manual

This Technical Manual provides the user with all the information required to install,
operate and maintain the GD2005E, 2008E, 2012E, 2016E, 2032E, 2040E, 2052E,
2077E, 2104E, 2145E and 2207E integrated drive units, and the modular series of
drive units; GD2282E, GD2300E, 2377E, 2564E, GD2600E, 2754E, 2846E,
GD2900E and 21131E.

The manual should be regarded as part of the GD2000 product. It should be retained
for the life of the product and passed on to any subsequent owner or user of the
product.

Page xii GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Introduction to Alspa GD2000E


1.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2. Ground Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3. Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.2 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3.3 Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2. Specification
2.1. Control Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.3 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.4 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.5 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.6 User 24 V Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.7 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.8 Auto-reset / Auto-restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.9 Frequency Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.10 PID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.11 DC Injection Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.12 Load Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.13 Motor I2T Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.14 Trim Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.15 Reference Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.16 Fixed Speed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.17 Square Root Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.18 Fault Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.19 History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.20 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2. Input and Output Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1 Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.2 Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.3 Miscellaneous Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.3. Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

3. Operating Information
3.1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2. Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 The STOP Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 The Start Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.3 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3. Using the Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3.1 Selecting a Parameter Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.2 Displaying and Changing a Parameter Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.3 Returning to Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4. Parameter Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page xiii

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

4. Hardware Description
4.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2. Filter and Power Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.1 Precharge Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.2 Input Rectifier Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2.3 DC Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.4 Output Inverter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.5 Gate Drive Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.6 Enhanced Programming Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3. Switch Mode Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.4. Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.4.1 User Input and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.5. Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

5. System Design
5.1. Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 DC Link Inductor (GD2104E to GD2207E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Cabling and Cable Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.3 Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.4 Recommendations for Fitting Output Line Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

6. Control Connections
6.1. User Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 Terminal Block TB6 - Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2. Terminal Block TB7 - Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.1 Terminal Block TB6 - Functional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3. User Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.1 Connecting an Interlock Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.2 Connecting Start Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3.3 Connecting a Motor Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3.4 Connecting Raise/Lower Speed Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4. Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4.1 REF1V and REF2V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4.2 REF1I and REF2I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4.3 Speed Reference Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.5. Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.5.1 GD2005E to GD2016E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.5.2 GD2032E to GD21131E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.6. Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.7. Summary of Control Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

7. Parameters
7.1. Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Stop and Start Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Output Frequency Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.3 System Configuration for DELTA Based Drives (from firmware version
0.40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2. Matching the Drive Output to the Motor and Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.1 Voltage/Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.2 Acceleration and Deceleration Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Page xiv GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

7.2.3 Torque Limit (Available from Firmware Version 0.36) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9


7.2.4 Motor Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.2.5 Frequency Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3. Motor Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.1 DC Injection Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4. Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.1 Motor Thermostat/thermistor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.2 Motor I2T Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.3 Load Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.4.4 Defining the Load Fault Detection Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.5. Transient Fault Ride-Through Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.5.1 Current Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.5.2 Timed Over-current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.5.3 Drive Over Temperature Trip Avoidance Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.4 Analog Input Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.5 Using Regeneration to Assist Supply Loss Ride-through . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.6 Low Motor Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.5.7 Auto-Resetting Trips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.5.8 Configuring the Drive for Automatic Restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.6. Drive Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.7. Controlling the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.7.1 Control & Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.7.2 Controlling the Drive Using the Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.7.3 Controlling the Drive Using External (Digital and Analog) Inputs . . . . . 7-28
7.7.4 Raise/Lower Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.7.5 Speed Control Using Analog References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.7.6 Trim Reference Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.7.7 Reference Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.7.8 Fixed Speed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.7.9 Speed Reference Square Root Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.7.10 Analog Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.7.11 Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.7.12 Frequency Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7.7.13 Remote Control and Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.7.14 Hoist Brake Control (Available from Firmware Version 0.42) . . . . . . . 7-43
7.7.15 PID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.8. Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.8.1 Basic Monitoring Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.8.2 Temperature Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.8.3 Monitoring Control and Reference Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.8.4 Process Speed Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.8.5 Real and Imaginary Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7.8.6 Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.8.7 Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.8.8 Monitoring External Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.8.9 Monitoring Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7.8.10 Drive Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.9. History Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.9.1 Operation of History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.9.2 Configuring the History Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.9.3 History Logging Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.10. Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page xv

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

7.10.1 Printer Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55


7.10.2 Connecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.10.3 Configuring the Drive for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.11. Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
7.11.1 Parameter Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

8. Serial Communications
8.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 RS232 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.2 Connection Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.3 RS485 Serial Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2. Access Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3. Configuring GD2000E for Serial Port Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3.1 RS485 Serial Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3.2 RS232 Serial Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4. Using Serial Links as Control and Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4.1 RS232 Serial Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.4.2 RS485 Serial Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.4.3 Using the Serial Links as the Back-up Reference and Control Sources . . . . 8-9
8.4.4 Monitoring the Drive Using the Serial Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4.5 History Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.5. GEM 80 ESP Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.5.1 GD2000E ESP Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.5.2 Writing Data to the GD2000E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.5.3 Reading Data from the GD2000E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.5.4 Accessing a User-Defined Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.5.5 Configuring a User-Defined Page from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.5.6 Configuring a User Defined Page from GEM 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.7 Message Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.8 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.9 Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.5.10 MODBUS RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.5.11 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.5.12 MODBUS ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.5.13 GEM 80-16 and GEM 80-10 N-Bus Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

9. Installation
9.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2.1 Receipt of Equipment on Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2.2 Identification of Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2.4 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2.5 Disposal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.6 Torque Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3. Installation Details for GD2005E, 2008E, 2012E and 2016E . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3.1 Special Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3.2 Heat Loss from Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3.3 Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3.4 Acoustic Noise at the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3.5 Radio Frequency Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3.6 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Page xvi GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

9.3.7 Cooling and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4


9.3.8 Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3.9 Installing the Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3.10 Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3.11 Torque Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4. Installation Details for GD2032E to 2077E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4.1 Special Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4.2 Heat Loss from Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4.3 Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.4 Acoustic Noise at the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.5 Radio Frequency Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.6 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.7 Cooling and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.8 Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.4.9 Installing the Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.4.10 Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5. Installation Details for GD2104E to GD2207E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.1 Special Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.2 Heat Loss from Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.3 Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.4 Acoustic Noise at the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.5 Radio Frequency Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.6 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.7 Cooling and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.8 Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.5.9 Installing the Drive Unit with Separate DC Link Inductor . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.6. Electrical Connections GD2104E to GD2207E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.6.1 Location of Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.6.2 Connecting the DC Link Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.6.3 Control Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.6.4 Installing the Drive Unit with Reactor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.6.5 Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.6.6 Connecting the DC Link Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

10. Commissioning
10.1. Mechanical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2. Input Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.3. System Configuration (DELTA Based Drives Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.4. Energising the Drive (All drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.5. Minimum Parameter Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.6. Connecting the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.7. Running the drive from Local Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.8. Final Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

11. Maintenance
11.1. Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1.1 Special Tools & Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1.2 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2. Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3. Fault-Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3.1 Fault Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.4. Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page xvii

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

11.4.1 Action in the Event of a Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2


11.5. Trips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.5.1 Action in the Event of a Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.5.2 Resetting Trips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.5.3 Remote Trip Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.5.4 Auto Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.5.5 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.5.6 Trip History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.6. History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.6.1 Playing Back the History log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.7. Warning Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.8. Trip Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

12. Ordering Codes


12.1. Main equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2. Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.3. Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.4. Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

A. Alspa GD2000E Enhanced Keypad


A.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.2. Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.3. Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.3.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.3.2 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.3.3 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.3.4 Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.3.5 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.4. Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.5. Extension Cable (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.6. Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.6.1 Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.6.2 The STOP and START Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.6.3 The INCREASE and DECREASE keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.6.4 Alphanumeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.6.5 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.6.6 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.6.7 Displaying a Parameter Using the Up and Down Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . A-5
A.6.8 Changing the Displayed Parameter Using the Numeric Keys. . . . . . . . . A-6
A.6.9 Displaying Further Information about a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.6.10 Editing a Parameter - Direct Numeric Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.6.11 Editing a Parameter - Using the Up and Down keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.6.12 Entering a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.6.13 Changing a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.6.14 Disconnecting the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.6.15 Displaying the History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.6.16 Displaying Trip Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.6.17 Resetting Trips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A.6.18 Displaying Warning Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.6.19 Keypad Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.7. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.7.1 Fitting the Enhanced Keypad to the Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

Page xviii GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

A.7.2 Fitting the Keypad in a Remote Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14


A.7.3 Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.7.4 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.7.5 Keypad Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.7.6 Setting the Keypad Text Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.7.7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

B. Relocating the User Termination Panel


B.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1.1 Receipt of Equipment on Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2. Procedure for Installing the Remote Termination Panel 30V2100/10 . . . . . . B-1
B.3. Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.4. Installing the Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.5. Installing a Remote Termination Panel for GD2032E to GD2207E . . . . . . . B-3
B.6. Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.6.1 Removing the User Termination Panel from the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.6.2 Assembling the Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.6.3 Mounting the User Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

C. GD2000E Modular Drives

C1. General Information


C1.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C1.1.1 Environmental Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C1.2. Overview of GD2000E Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C1.2.1 GD2000E Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C1.2.2 User Termination Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C1.2.3 Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C1.3. Power Electronics Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

C2. Technical Description


C2.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C2.1.1 GD2000E OMEGA Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C2.1.2 GD2000E Switch Mode Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C2.1.3 GD2000E User Termination panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C2.2. Delta Power Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C2.2.1 Delta Rectifier Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C2.2.2 Delta Transistor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C2.2.3 Cooling Fans and Fan Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C2.2.4 Fan Transformer (Standard Cooling System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C2.2.5 Fan Transformer (High Performance Cooling System) . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C2.2.6 DC Link Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C2.2.7 Inter-Bridge Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

C3. System Design


C3.1. GD2282E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse), 380 V to 480 V . . . . C-11
C3.2. GD2377E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse), 380 V to 480 V . . . . C-12
C3.3. GD2282E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C3.4. GD2377E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C3.5. GD2564E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C3.6. GD2754E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page xix

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E
C3.7. GD2564E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
C3.8. GD2754E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
C3.9. GD2846E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C3.10. GD2846E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
C3.11. GD21131E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C3.12. GD21131E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33

C4. Installation
C4.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C4.2. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C4.2.1 Receipt of Equipment on Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C4.2.2 Identification of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C4.2.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
C4.2.4 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C4.2.5 Heat Loss from Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C4.2.6 Acoustic Noise at the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C4.2.7 Radio Frequency Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C4.2.8 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C4.2.9 Cooling and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C4.2.10 Disposal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C4.3. GD2000E Control Module Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C4.3.1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C4.3.2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C4.4. SMPS Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C4.5. User Termination Panel Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C4.5.1 Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C4.5.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C4.5.3 User Termination Panel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . C-41
C4.6. Assembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-41
C4.7. Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
C4.7.1 AC Input Power Cables and Motor Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
C4.7.2 High Voltage DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
C4.7.3 Connecting the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
C4.7.4 Auxiliary 110 V Connection to 690 V Rectifier Units . . . . . . . . . . C-42
C4.7.5 Control Connections for 690 V Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
C4.7.6 Control Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
C4.7.7 Pre-Charge Acknowledge on DELTA Based Systems . . . . . . . . . . C-43

C5. Commissioning
C5.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47

D. 12-Pulse Adaptor Unit


D.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2. Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.3. System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.3.1 12-pulse drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.4. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.4.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.4.2 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.4.3 Installing the Drive unit with 12-pulse unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Page xx GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

D.4.4 Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8


D.4.5 Torque Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.4.6 Connecting the 12-pulse Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.5. Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

E. DELTA Based Alspa GD2000E 1.1 Overload Ratings


E.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1.1 Re-Rating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.2. Assumptions For Current Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
E.3. Re-Rating Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

F. Electromagnetic Compatibility
F.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1.1 European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1.2 EMC Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1.3 Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1.4 Public Low Voltage Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.1.5 Technical Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.2. Compliance with EMC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.2.1 Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.2.2 Radio-Frequency Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.2.3 Harmonic Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.3. Installation Instructions for Compliance with EMC Requirements . . . . . . . . F-6
F.3.1 Additional Safety Requirements for Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
F.3.2 Cubicle Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F.3.3 Cabling and Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
F.3.4 Contactor Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
F.3.5 Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
F.3.6 Control Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
F.3.7 Drive not in a Fully Enclosed Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
F.4. EMC Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
F.4.1 Dimensions of Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-19

G. Firmware History

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page xxi

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E

Approvals

The GD2000E Basic Drive Modules are compliant with ANSI/UL Standard 508 or ANSI/UL
508C and CAN/CSA standard C22.2 No. 14-95. These standards assume that any
electrical equipment may be a potential source of flaming or molten material, which
should be prevented from falling onto any surface below the mounted equipment, and that
any electrical equipment should be protected against ingress of falling objects or water.

Where BDMs are to be mounted with no other form of additional enclosure to satisfactorily
provide the above level of protection, then for compliance with the above standards of
these products must be installed with Protective Hood and Tray.(see Chapter 12 for
ordering codes).

Page xxii GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 1. Introduction

Introduction to Alspa GD2000E

1.1 Introduction
The Alspa GD2000E series of
Sensorless Vector AC drives
provide two quadrant speed
control for standard squirrel
cage induction motors
ranging from 1 kW to
890 kW. The Alspa
GD2000E with Enhanced
Torque Performance (ETP)
offers superior speed holding
and torque control
throughout its operating
range.

This manual gives details of


all power ratings in the
range. Drives in the range
GD2005E to GD2207E
inclusive are supplied as
integrated units, in four
frame sizes. Drives in the
range GD2282E to
GD21131E are provided in
modular kit form, which can Figure 1-1 The GD2012E drive unit
be specified to the customers
requirements, and assembled by the customer or an approved agent. Though the size
and internal layout of the eight different models varies, the operator controls,
programming, input/output connections and serial port communications are common
to all models in the range.

GD2000E integrated drives operate on a 380 V to 480 V (nominal) 3-phase AC input


supply. The modular drives GD2282E to GD2131E operate on a 380 V to 525 V
(nominal) supply, with the exception of three products, GD2300E, GD2600E and
GD2900E which can operate on supplies up to 690 V.

Motor control is achieved by generating a variable frequency, variable voltage three


phase a.c. output in the range 0 to 200 Hz. A microprocessor controls all regulation
and the output waveform functions.

GD2104E and larger can be supplied as either 6-pulse or 12-pulse drives. 12-pulse
variants of GD2104E to GD2207E are fitted with a 12-pulse adaptor unit which is fitted
to the bottom of the drive (see Appendix D). Details of the 12-pulse options available
for the modular range of drives are given in Appendix C. The 12-pulse drives require
two AC input supplies phase shifted by 30o.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 1-1

Print Home
1. Introduction Alspa GD2000E

Comprehensive safety and protection features include safety trips in the event of various
internal or external fault conditions. To minimise interruptions to plant operation,
GD2000E can be configured to ride through or take intelligent remedial action to
prevent transient supply faults or overload conditions tripping the drive. The auto-restart
facility further reduces the need for operator intervention when a trip does occur.

GD2000E has an extensive library of software functions which provide full control,
monitoring and fault finding facilities. These software functions are accessed by a
system of parameter entry read-out.

Parameter entry and read-out can be by any of the following methods:


– Using the push button controls and l.e.d. display on the front panel,

– Using the enhanced programming unit, which is available as an option, and plugs
into the serial port connector on the front panel.
– From a remote computer or PLC using the built in RS485 or RS232 serial ports.

– Using hardwired control inputs.

Fault diagnosis and history data can also be accessed using the front panel controls.

1.2 Ground Leakage Current


This equipment is designed for fixed installation. In common with all inverters of this
type, the PWM generates a high leakage current. The leakage current is partially due to
the capacitance of the motor. Therefore, it is essential that both the drive and the motor
are grounded before the supply is connected.

1.3 Physical Description


The frame size of the GD2000E unit depends on the output rating of the drive. This
brief description of the main features of the drives, applies to all frame sizes. The
dimensions and ratings for each frame size are given in Chapter 2.

GD2005E to GD2077E are supplied as totally enclosed units suitable for wall or panel
mounting. The general appearance of the drive is shown in Figure 1-1, which depicts a
GD2012E unit. GD2104E to GD2207E are supplied with a separate d.c. link choke.
The size and appearance of the modular drives will depend on customer requirements
and preferences - further information can be found in Appendix C and in the Alspa GD
DELTA Technical Manual.

1.3.1 Front Panel

The Front Panel contains all controls and indicators and is common to all models of
Alspa GD2000E.

Page 1-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 1. Introduction

Figure 1-2 GD2000E front panel

The control panel at the front of the unit is divided into two areas, the lower one
contains five membrane type push buttons:

– STOP
START
MODE
UP
DOWN.

Brief instructions for using these controls are given on the front panel.

There are four l.e.d. indicators:

The upper area contains a four digit 7-segment l.e.d. display, used to indicate
parameter numbers and values, and two l.e.d. indicators, TX and RX, which are used to
indicate serial communications activity.

This control panel gives full access to all the control features of the GD2000E.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 1-3

Print Home
1. Introduction Alspa GD2000E

1.3.2 Communications

GD2000E has two serial communications ports:

Enhanced Keypad/Printer/RS232 Serial Port

This is a 9-way D-type connector situated on the front panel, which may be used to
connect an enhanced keypad, as a printer port or as an RS232 serial port.

The enhanced keypad can be connected directly to the front of the drive unit or it can
be sited remotely using an extension cable.

When used as an RS232 serial port it can be used to communicate with:


– GEM 80 PLCs using GEM 80 ESP communications protocol.

– Other PLCs or computer systems using MODBUS ASCII or MODBUS RTU protocols.

– A FIP network using the optional FIP interface module.

RS485 Serial Port

The RS485 serial port may be used to communicate with:


– GEM 80 PLCs using GEM 80 ESP communications protocol.

– Other PLCs or computer systems using MODBUS ASCII or MODBUS RTU protocols.

1.3.3 Electrical Connections

All the electrical connections are situated inside the front door of the drive unit.

The low voltage connections are located on three removeable terminal blocks, one
containing the RS485 serial port connections, one containing the digital inputs and the
analog input and output connections and one containing the digital output relay
connections. The low voltage control connections can be relocated outside the drive,
should this be required. (GD2005E, 2008E, 2012E and 2016E units require the
optional remote termination panel).

The high voltage input and output power connections are located below the low voltage
terminal blocks, inside the front panel of the drive.

Page 1-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 2. Specification

Specification

2.1 Control Specifications


2.1.1 Digital Inputs

Five digital inputs:

MTRIP (Digital input 1)


STOP (Digital input 2)
RUN1 (Digital input 3)
RUN2 (Digital input 4)
DIRECTION (Digital input 5)
Active : +10 V to +50 V.
Input Impedance : 47 kΩ
INTERLOCK
Active : +10 V to +50 V.
Input Impedance : 47 kΩ

2.1.2 Digital Output

Models GD2005E, GD2008E, GD2012E and GD2016E:

Two reconfigurable form C dry (volt-free) change-over relays, RL1 (Digital output 1)
and RL2 (Digital output 2):

Max. Volts : 240 Vac


Max. Current : 3 A (resistive load)

One reconfigurable open collector output, OCOP (Digital output 3) for use with
internally generated 24 V supply:

Max Load : 50 mA

Models GD2032E to GD2207E:

Three reconfigurable form C dry (volt-free) change-over relays, RL1 (Digital output 1),
RL2 (Digital output 2) and RL3 (Digital output 3):

Max. Volts : 240 Vac


Max. Current : 3 A (resistive load)

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 2-1

Print Home
2. Specification Alspa GD2000E

Modular Drives GD2282E to GD21131E:

Three reconfigurable form C dry (volt-free) change-over relays, RL1 (Digital output 1),
RL2 (Digital output 2) and RL3 (Digital output 3):

Max. Volts : 240 Vac


Max. Current : 3 A (resistive load)

2.1.3 Analog Input

Two reconfigurable, non-isolated analog inputs, REF1 & REF2:

Voltage Range : -10 V to +10 V


Input Impedance : 100 kΩ
Current Range : -20 mA to +20 mA
Input Impedance : 50 Ω
Resolution : ±0.25% of full scale.
Accuracy : ±2% of full scale

2.1.4 Analog Output

Two reconfigurable, non-isolated analog outputs, ANOUT1 & ANOUT2:

Voltage Range : -10 V to +10 V


Max. Load : 5 mA
Current Range : -20 mA to +20 mA
Max. Load Resistance : 500 Ω
Resolution : ±0.25% of full scale.
Accuracy : ±2% of full scale

All connections must be shielded.

2.1.5 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)

Maximum Switching : GD2005E to GD2077E = 8.0 kHz


Frequency GD2104E to GD21131E = 4.5 kHz
Minimum Switching : 2 kHz
Frequency
Maximum Modulation : 105%
Depth
Default PWM frequency : GD2005E to GD2077E = 6.6 kHz
: GD2104E to GD2207E = 2.0 kHz
: GD2282E to GD21131E = 2.0 kHz

Page 2-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 2. Specification

2.1.6 User 24 V Supply

Voltage Range : +22.8 V to +25.3 V


Max. Load : 0.5 A

2.1.7 Basic Settings

Motor Full Load Current : Adjustable 25% to 100% of drive rated current
Motor Base Frequency : Adjustable 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Motor Base Voltage : Adjustable 100 V to 600 V
Voltage Curve : Linear or square law volts boost 0 to 50 V
Slip Compensation : -20.0 to +20.0 Hz at full load
Start Up Frequency : 0 to 30 Hz
Acceleration Rate : 0.01 Hz/s to 300 Hz/s
Deceleration Rate : 0.01 Hz/s to 300 Hz/s
Current Limit : 25% to 110% drive rated current (P998 = 1)
25% to 150% drive rated current (P998 = 0)
Synchrostarting : Forward or reverse

2.1.8 Auto-reset / Auto-restart

Number of reset : 0 to 20
attempts
Reset delay : 1 to 30 seconds
Supply Loss Timeout : 1 to 200 seconds and no time-out limit.
Auto Reset Healthy Time : 10 seconds to 1 hour

2.1.9 Frequency Skipping

Number Skip Bands : 4


Skip Band Widths : 0 to 50 Hz
Skip Band Centres : 200 Hz reverse to 200 Hz forward

2.1.10 PID Controller

Set Point : Analog (REF1) or Local


Feedback : Analog
Sampling Rate : 100 Hz
Internal Resolution : ±10,000 steps
Feedback Resolution : ±0.25% of full scale
Deadband : 0 to 50% full scale

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 2-3

Print Home
2. Specification Alspa GD2000E

Proportional Band : 0.1% to 500%


Integral Action Time : 0.1 to 3000 s (no integral option)
Differential Action Time : 0 to 3000 s

2.1.11 DC Injection Braking

Injection Frequency : 0 to 200 Hz


Injection Current : 0 to 110% drive rated current(P998 = 1)
0 to 150% drive rated current(P998 = 0)
Injection Time : 1 to 60 seconds

2.1.12 Load Fault Detection

Number of Datum : 3 in each direction


Points
Violation Time : 1 to 100 seconds

2.1.13 Motor I2T Protection

Allowed 110 % Duration : 10 to 3600 seconds


(P998 = 1)
Allowed 150 % Duration : 10 to 3600 seconds
(P998 = 0)
Motor Cooling : Shaft fan or separately excited fan

2.1.14 Trim Reference

Scale for Main : -150% to +150% of normal value


Reference
Range : ±100 Hz for ± full scale REF2

2.1.15 Reference Sequencer

Number of sequence : 1 to 5
steps
Step trigger sources : Local
Sequence times : 1 second to 336 hours

2.1.16 Fixed Speed Menu

Number of fixed speeds : 4

2.1.17 Square Root Function

Function : Actual reference = √ ( Reference Input x Max freq)

Page 2-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 2. Specification

2.1.18 Fault Indication

Number of Active : 0 to 10
Warnings
Number of Active Trips : 0 to 10
Number of Trips : 10
Recorded

2.1.19 History Record

Sample Rate : 10 ms to 100 s


Number Channels : 10
Number Samples : 100
Recording Modes : Average, Maximum, Minimum

2.1.20 Serial Communications

Two serial communications ports, one RS232 and one RS485, each port can be
configured and used independantly. The RS232 port connector is also used to connect
the Enhanced Programming Unit.

RS232 serial communications port

Baud rates : 1.2, 2.4, 4.8 and 9.6 kbaud.


Message protocols : GEM 80 ESP (tributary only)
MODBUS ASCII
MODBUS RTU

RS485 serial communications port

Baud rates : 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6 and 19.2 kbaud


Message protocols : GEM 80 ESP (tributary only)
MODBUS ASCII
MODBUS RTU

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 2-5

Print Home
2. Specification Alspa GD2000E

2.2 Input and Output Power Specifications


2.2.1 Input Power

GD2000E can operate with the following input supplies.


Drive Supply Range
GD2005E to GD2207E 380 V to 480 V.
GD2282E
GD2377E
GD2564E
380 V to 525 V
GD2754E
GD2846E
GD21131E
GD2300E
GD2600E 525 V to 690 V
GD2900E

Note: The above supply limits refer to the nominal supply voltages. The
equipment will operate with a variation of ±10% of the nominal supply
voltage. For supply voltages below nominal, there will be a corresponding
reduction in maximum output power. The equipment can operate up to a
maximum of ±15% variation on the nominal supplies for a maximum of
30 cycles duration without the equipment tripping though reduced
performance may be observed. The equipment rated 380 V to 480 V can
be operated on 500 V ac supplies but with a +6% to -10% supply
variation.
Supply Frequency : 45 Hz to 63 Hz

Fuses

Fuses are fitted externally by the user. Refer to Chapter 5 Table 5-1 for further
information.
Note: Fuses are fitted externally by the user. Failure to fit the correct fuse type
and rating will invalidate safety approvals.

2.2.2 Output Power

Voltage : The maximum output RMS voltage is equal to the RMS


input voltage at the drive terminals.
Frequency : 0 to 200 Hz

Page 2-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Print
Issue 2 (9/96)
Motor Heat Sink Losses to Sharing Current Efficiency
Drive PWM freq. Control loss Fan loss Link Reactor Fuses Capacitors RFI choke Total
PF loss clean air Reactors rating %
GD2005E 0.81 6600.00 53.24 6.52 31.00 0.00 25.20 0.00 1.56 6.00 7.90 125 5 95.71
Alspa GD2000E

GD2008E 0.81 6600.00 89.00 6.45 32.00 0.00 25.30 0.00 3.50 12.00 20.20 182 8 96.09
GD2012E 0.81 6600.00 136.50 8.60 32.00 0.00 28.70 0.00 8.00 12.00 45.30 263 12 96.24
GD2016E 0.81 6600.00 189.70 11.02 32.00 0.00 45.00 0.00 14.20 12.00 293 16 96.86
GD2032E 0.81 6600.00 387.70 21.22 55.00 0.00 88.20 0.00 40.80 18.00 590 32 96.83
GD2040E 0.81 6600.00 478.00 25.33 55.00 0.00 92.00 0.00 27.80 18.00 671 40 97.12
GD2052E 0.81 6600.00 635.00 36.06 55.00 0.00 157.00 0.00 39.50 36.00 923 52 96.95
Table 2-1 Power losses

GD2077E 0.82 6600.00 956.40 50.67 63.00 0.00 141.00 0.00 73.00 36.00 1269 77 97.20
GD2104E 0.83 3300.00 1115.00 61.48 100.00 210.00 85.40 0.00 80.50 54.00 1645 104 97.35
GD2145E 0.84 3300.00 1510.00 83.04 100.00 210.00 92.70 0.00 109.00 72.00 2094 145 97.61
GD2207E 0.86 3300.00 2231.00 119.41 100.00 210.00 116.50 0.00 125.60 90.00 2873 207 97.75
1.1 Overload (P998 = 1)
Heat Output to the Environment

GD2104E 0.84 2000.00 1850.00 84.00 100.00 210.00 95.0 0.00 84.0 75.00 2498 145 97.2
GD2145E 0.86 2000.00 2500.00 115.0 100.00 210.00 115.0 0.00 138.0 90.00 3268 200 97.4
GD2207E 0.88 2000.00 3000.00 150.0 100.00 210.00 150.0 0.00 128.0 120.00 3858 250 97.6
Modular Drives
GD2282E 0.89 3300.00 3070.00 168.35 235.00 420.00 105.00 315.00 97.00 144.00 0.00 4071 282 97.74
GD2300E 0.89 3300.00 3070.00 168.35 235.00 420.00 105.00 0.00 97.00 144.00 0.00 4071 282 97.74
GD2377E 0.89 3300.00 4113.00 215.75 245.00 420.00 119.00 333.00 174.00 144.00 0.00 5215 377 97.84
GD2564E 0.89 3300.00 6139.00 336.65 255.00 630.00 270.00 630.00 255.00 288.00 0.00 8467 564 97.65

GD2000E Technical Manual


GD2600E 0.89 3300.00 6139.00 336.65 255.00 710.00 270.00 630.00 255.00 288.00 0.00 8467 564 97.65
GD2754E 0.89 3300.00 8225.00 431.46 270.00 630.00 400.00 665.00 220.00 288.00 0.00 10698 754 97.78
GD2864E 0.89 3300.00 9259.00 507.26 290.00 1050.00 470.00 945.00 290.00 432.00 0.00 12736 864 97.70
GD2900E 0.89 3300.00 9259.00 507.26 290.00 1050.00 470.00 1070.00 290.00 432.00 0.00 12736 864 97.70
GD21131E 0.89 3300.00 12338.00 647.22 310.00 1050.00 850.00 998.00 250.00 432.00 0.00 16228 1131 97.76
GDD282E 0.89 3300.00 2273.00 132.12 200.00 210.00 105.00 0.00 0.00 144.00 2932
GDD300E 0.89 3300.00 2273.00 132.12 200.00 210.00 105.00 0.00 0.00 144.00 2932
GDD377E 0.89 3300.00 3048.00 167.35 200.00 210.00 119.00 0.00 0.00 144.00 3721
GDD564E 0.89 3300.00 4546.00 264.24 200.00 420.00 270.00 630.00 0.00 288.00 6354
GDD600E 0.89 3300.00 4546.00 264.24 200.00 420.00 270.00 630.00 0.00 288.00 6354
GDD754E 0.89 3300.00 6096.00 334.69 200.00 420.00 400.00 665.00 0.00 288.00 8069
GDD864E 0.89 3300.00 6819.00 396.35 200.00 630.00 470.00 945.00 0.00 432.00 9496
GDD900E 0.89 3300.00 6819.00 396.35 200.00 630.00 470.00 945.00 0.00 432.00 9496
GDD1131E 0.89 3300.00 9144.00 502.04 200.00 630.00 850.00 998.00 0.00 432.00 12254

Page 2-7
2. Specification

Home
2. Specification Alspa GD2000E

Motor Frame Sizes

1.5 Overload P998 = 0


Continuous Output
Current IEC Motor frame Sizes NEMA Motor frame sizes
Unit No.
50% Overload for 1 380/415 V 460/480 V
minute
A kW HP
GD2005E 5.2 2.2 3
GD2008E 7.6 3 5
GD2012E 12.3 5.5 7.5
GD2016E 16.1 7.5 10
GD2032E 32 15 20
GD2040E 40 18.5 30
GD2052E 52 22 40
GD2077E 77 37 60
GD2104E 104 55 75
GD2145E 145 75 100
GD2207E 207 110 150
GD2282E 282
GD2300E 300
GD2377E 377
GD2564E 564
GD2600E 600
GD2754E 754
GD2846E 846
GD2900E 900
GD21131E 1131
1.1 Overload P998 = 1
Continuous Output
Current IEC Motor frame Sizes NEMA Motor frame sizes
Unit No.
10% Overload for 1 380/415 V 460/480 V
minute
A kW HP
GD2104E 145 75 100
GD2145E 200 90 + (some 110) 150
GD2207E 250 132 + (some 150) 150

2.2.3 Miscellaneous Data

Output Protection : When protected by the fuses specified in Chapter 5


Capability Table 5-2. The drive is capable of withstanding short
circuits and ground faults on the output terminals
without sustaining damage.

Page 2-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 2. Specification

Current Leakage to : The equipment is designed for fixed installations. In


ground common with all inverters of this type the PWM
generates a high leakage current. This is due to the
capacitance of the motor. Therefore it is essential that
both the drive and the motor are connected to ground
before the supply is connected.
Electro Magnetic : GD2005/2008/2012A451 variants are fitted with
Compatibility internal RF filtering and comply with the radio
frequency emission limits of EN50081-2. All other
drive variants have no RF filters.
Power Supplies : Supplies for all of the internal electronic equipment
are derived by means of an internal switch-mode
power supply.
Mounting : Wall or panel mounting.

Temperature :
Operating : 0o C to 40o C
Storage : -25o C to +70o C
Humidity : 5% to 95% Relative Humidity (non-condensing).
Cooling : Ventilation fan fitted internally.
Cooling air : The drive must be mounted in clean, dust-free air
which is free from corrosive vapours. The power
device cooling system can use “dirty” air providing it
does not contain corrosive, conductive, or explosive
dusts or gasses.
Protection : IP20 (NEMA 1). Protected against ingress of solid
foreign objects greater than 12.5 mm (0.5") diameter,
not protected against water. When IP21 cover is
fitted, also protected against dripping water.
Acoustic Noise : Less than 75 dB(A) at 1 metre (any angle).
Altitude : normal operating up to 1000 m above sea level.
Derate by 7.3% per 1000 m (3300 ft) up to max
2000 m (6600 ft).

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 2-9

Print Home
2. Specification Alspa GD2000E

Vibration (Operational) : IEC 721-3-3 “Class 3M1" and prEN 50178 ”Vibration
Level"

Note: To achieve both standards,, the products comply with the more severe
requirements from both standards. This is given as the following
composite curve:
Frequency IEC 1800-1 prEN 50178 Composite
2 Hz to 9 Hz 0.3 mm amplitude 0.3 mm amplitude
0.032 mm from 10
9 Hz to 28.13 Hz 1 m/s2 1 m/s2
Hz
0.032 mm
28.13 Hz to 57 Hz 1 m/s2 0.32 mm amplitude
amplitude
57 Hz to 150 Hz 1 m/s2 5 m/s2 5 m/s2
2
150 Hz to 200 Hz 1 m/s 1 m/s2

Vibration : When equipment is packed for transport,


(Storage, Transport) Class 2M1 of IEC 721-3-2:
2 to 9 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
9 to 200 Hz 10 m/s2
200 to 500 Hz 15 m/s2
Drop : When equipment is packed for transport,,
(Transport) Class 2M1 of IEC 721-3-2:
mass < 20 kg 0.25 m
20 kg ≤ mass < 100 kg 0.25 m
100 kg ≤ mass 0.10 m

2.3 Physical Dimensions


Dimensions mm (inches)
Unit Weight kg (lbs)
W D H
GD2005E 13.8 (31)
GD2008E 13.8 (31)
219 (8.6) 259 (10.2) 330 (13.0)
GD2012E 13.8 (31)
GD2016E 13.8 (31)
GD2032E 30 (67)
370 (14.6) 282 (11.1) 407.4 (16.0)
GD2040E 30 (67)
GD2052E 65 (146)
460 (18.1) 282 (11.1) 653 (25.7)
GD2077E 70 (157)
GD2104E 85 (190)
GD2145E 85 (190) 575 (22.6) 321 (12.6) 973 (38.3)
GD2207E 85 (190)

Modular drives GD2282E to GD21131E are usually fitted into one or more panels, the
dimensions of which will depend on the type of drive and the chosen configuration.
Note: The Alspa GD2000E range of inverters has been designed to IEC
specifications using SI units. In this manual approximate values for inches,
lbs and h.p. are given here for convenience only.

Page 2-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 3. Operating Information

Operating Information

3.1 Introduction.
The Alspa GD2000E is configured, controlled & monitored by reading and writing drive
parameter values. The drive parameters are accessed either:
– Using the controls on the front of the unit.

– Using Serial Link communications. See Chapter 8 Serial Communications.

3.2 Front Panel Controls

Figure 3-1 Keypad controls

The front panel contains, STOP and START buttons, and three buttons, , and
which are used to access and change the parameters. There is also a 4-digit l.e.d.
display, which displays parameter numbers and values, and 6 l.e.d. indicators.

3.2.1 The STOP Button

The STOP button is red. When pressed it issues a Stop command to the drive,
provided the drive is configured for ‘Local’ control. When a Stop command is issued the
drive takes action to bring the motor to rest (defined by the Stop mode - Parameter 14)
and then disables the output to the drive. In the Stopped state the following conditions
apply:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 3-1

Print Home
3. Operating Information Alspa GD2000E

– The supply input and the d.c. link remains live.

– When the motor has been brought to a halt the RUNNING l.e.d. is extinguished.

– The history record continues to record.

3.2.2 The Start Button

The Start button is green. The Start button issues a RUN command when the drive
is configured for ‘Local’ control. The Run command causes the drive takes action to
start the motor (defined by the start mode set in Parameter 13). Additionally the
following conditions apply:
– The output bridge is enabled.

– When the drive is running the RUNNING l.e.d. is lit.

– The history record continues to record except on the first RUN command after power
up or a trip. In this case the history record is cleared and a new one is started.

3.2.3 LED Indicators

The l.e.d. indicators on the front panel indicate the following:

– - Flashes (green) to indicate data is being received by the RS485 serial link.

– - Flashes (green) to indicate data is being transmitted by the RS485 serial


link.

– - Illuminates (green) when the drive and all control inputs are in a
healthy condition.

– - Illuminates (green) when the drive is RUNNING.

– - Illuminates (yellow) when drive has a fault which will cause the drive
to trip if not rectified.

– - Flashes (red) when the drive is tripped.

3.3 Using the Front Panel Controls

Parameters may be entered and monitored using the , , buttons in


conjunction with the 4-digit display.

The 4-digit display is used to indicate both parameter numbers and parameter values.
Pressing the button toggles between parameter value and parameter number. The
4-digit display shows a P prefix (e.g. ) when displaying a parameter number.
There is no prefix when a parameter value is displayed.

Page 3-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 3. Operating Information

3.3.1 Selecting a Parameter Number

To select a parameter number:

– Press the button so that the 4-digit display shows a ‘P’ prefix.

– Press the button to increase the parameter number or the button to decrease
the parameter number, until the correct parameter number is displayed.
To skip to the next page* of parameter numbers:

– Press the mode button while holding down the button.


Similarly, to skip to the previous page:

– Press the key while holding down the button


*The number of parameter entries in a page varies. The page boundaries have been
chosen to give sensible grouping of the parameter numbers.
Note: Holding the or buttons (or button combination above) repeats the
command at an increasing rate, allowing you to ‘scroll’ through
parameter numbers or values quickly.

3.3.2 Displaying and Changing a Parameter Value

Parameter values can be read at all times, but they can only be changed if they are
unlocked. See Chapter 7 Para 7.6 for details of the security key feature.

– Press the button so that the 4-digit display shows a numeric value i.e. there is no
P prefix.

– Press the button to increase the parameter value or the button to decrease
the parameter value, until the correct parameter value is displayed.

3.3.3 Returning to Default Settings

To set all the parameter values to the factory default settings proceed as follows:
– Remove power from the drive and wait until all the l.e.d.s are extinguished.

– While holding down the the MODE , UP and DOWN keys, re-apply power
to the drive.

– Release the MODE , UP and DOWN keys.


All parameters will now be set to the default values shown in the parameter table at the
end of Chapter 7.

3.4 Parameter Attributes


Each parameter has a number of attributes, which define the security classification, how
the value is used and how the drive acts when a value is changed. The attributes for
each parameter are given in the parameter list at the end of Chapter 7.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 3-3

Print Home
3. Operating Information Alspa GD2000E

The parameter attributes are as follows:


R = Read Only, these are either set during manufacture or values which are
used to monitor the state of various functions of the drive, while it is
running.
E = Engineer Accessible, these are drive configuration parameters which are set
as part of the system design or during commissioning, and which should
not be changed during normal operation.
O = Operator Accessible, these are parameters which are used to control the
drive, within the normal operating limits, and may need to be changed
during normal operation.

L = List Parameter, when stepping through the parameter values, using the
and buttons, the values are chosen from a preset list, and no
intermediate values are available.

M = Mode Parameter, some parameters may cause undesirable results if


intermediate values are passed to the drive immediately while stepping
through the values. To activate a changed parameter value with an M
attribute:

- Press the button after selecting correct value

Page 3-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 4. Technical Description

Hardware Description

4.1 Introduction

Figure 4-1 Schematic diagram of GD2000E (GD2012E shown)

Schematic diagram of GD2000E (GD2012E shown)

4.2 Filter and Power Interface Board


The Filter and Power Interface Board contains the following:

4.2.1 Precharge Circuits

Reduce the input current surge on start up. The input supply is diverted through resistors
for a short period of time while the d.c. link capacitors are charged.

4.2.2 Input Rectifier Bridge

A full wave 3-phase diode bridge, converts the 3-phase a.c. input to d.c. on the d.c.
link.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 4-1

Print Home
4. Technical Description Alspa GD2000E

4.2.3 DC Link

The d.c. link connects the Input rectifier bridge to the output inverter. The d.c. link
incorporates a filter to reduce harmonics. The d.c. link filter is fitted internally in
GD2005E to GD2077E. GD2104E to GD2207E are supplied with a separate d.c. link
choke.

The d.c. link also provides power to the switch mode power supply. d.c. link (DC+ and
DC-) connections are provided to allow the d.c. link to be connected to an external d.c.
supply, or an external dynamic braking unit.

4.2.4 Output Inverter Bridge

The output inverter bridge provides a three phase variable voltage, variable frequency
output in the range 0 to 200 Hz in normal operation, but this can be increase to
1600 Hz using the frequency multiplier feature (parameter 479). Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistors (IGBT) provide the necessary high speed power switching.The maximum
output r.m.s. voltage is equal to the input line voltage at the drive terminals.

4.2.5 Gate Drive Circuits

The gate drive circuits convert the switching signals from the controller to a form
suitable for switching the IGBTs. The gate drive circuits incorporate opto-isolators on
their inputs to provide total electrical isolation from the power circuits.

4.2.6 Enhanced Programming Unit

The enhanced programming unit can be supplied as an option. It provides an easy to


use alternative to the standard front panel controls. Functionally it is identical to the
standard controls. The enhanced keypad can either be mounted directly on the front
panel, covering the existing controls or it can be mounted remotely using a connecting
cable.

4.3 Switch Mode Power Supply


The switch mode power supply provides power supplies to the control board, the gate
drive circuits and user +24 V d.c. power output on terminal block TB6. On the
GD2008E to 2077E units it also provides a +24 V output to power the integral drive
cooling fan(s).

4.4 Control Board


The control board contains a 16-bit microcontroller which handles all the processing
requirements of the drive, including the gate drive switching signals, serial
communications, parameter processing and user interface.

The control board has two ribbon cable connectors, one carries all the signals to and
from the power bridge, the other carries the user inputs and outputs to the termination
panel.

Page 4-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 4. Technical Description

4.4.1 User Input and Outputs

The user inputs are contained in three terminal blocks TB6, TB7 and TB8. These are
situated on the power interface board. A remote termination board is available as an
option. The RS232 port is connected via the D-type socket on the front panel, which is
also used to connect the optional enhanced programming unit.

4.5 Cooling Fan


All models except GD2005A451 are fitted with a fan to assist cooling. The fan is fitted
at the top of the enclosure and draws air over the power circuits heatsink. For drive
sizes up to and including GD2077E the fan is powered from the internal switch mode
power supply. For GD2104E and larger drives the fan is powered from the 3-phase
input supply.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 4-3

Print Home
4. Technical Description Alspa GD2000E

Page 4-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 5. System Design

System Design

5.1 Power Connections

Figure 5-1 Power input and output terminations


.

The input power supply is connected to the R, S and T terminals situated inside the
hinged front panel of the drive unit. The output to the motor is connected to the U, V
and W terminals. The motor must be connected to the frame ground marked with a
ground symbol or ‘E’ and this point must be securely connected to ground.

The size and type of power terminal varies with the type of drive. Details are given in
Chapter 9.

DC Link Connections (GD2005A421 to GD2012A421 and


GD2016A451)

The DC link connections are marked ‘+ and ‘-’ on the above drives. The function of
these terminals is exactly the same as the DC+ and DC- terminals on other drives.

5.1.1 DC Link Inductor (GD2104E to GD2207E only)

The DC link inductor (choke) is supplied as a separate unit on these drives. The DC link
inductor is connected to the RECT+ and DC+ terminals on the drive.

5.1.2 Cabling and Cable Segregation

The input supply and motor supply wires should be routed separately, so that electrical
noise radiated from the output cable is not superimposed on to the input cables. All
power cables should be kept as short as possible.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 5-1

Print Home
5. System Design Alspa GD2000E

5.1.3 Additional Components

Additional components may be required to complete the drive system. Figure 5-1 shows
a typical system configuration. Not all of the components may be necessary for a
particular system, rating or application.

Input Line Fuses

Input line fuses of the correct rating must be fitted to each of the three phases of the
a.c. supply input and can be supplied by CEGELEC on request. The recommended
fuses and their ordering codes are shown in Table 5-1.

Semi-conductor fuses are recommended to ensure no catastrophic failures of


semi-conductors occur and also offer normal cable protection. They are sized to the
AC(A) input current in acordance with Table 5-1. Alternative manufacturers and styles
are shown.
Note: Failure to fit the correct fuse type and rating will invalidate any safety
approvals.
Table 5-1 Line input fuses

Max
rated Motor AC(A)
Drive Type O/L pf Recommended and alternative fuses
current supply
(A)
European
British Style US Style
Style
GEC BUSSMAN GOULD BUSSMAN BUSSMAN
GD2005E 1.5 5 0.81 4.5 GSGB16 15ET A60X8 T88774
GD2008E 1.5 8 0.81 7.2 GSGB16 15ET A60X12 B89494
GD2012E 1.5 12 0.81 10.8 GSGB16 15ET A60X15 C89495
GD2016E 1.5 16 0.81 14.5 GSGB16 15ET A60X20 D89496
GD2032E 1.5 32 0.81 28.9 GSGB35 35FE A70Q35 FWP35B FWP35B
GD2040E 1.5 40 0.81 36.2 GSGB40 40FE A70Q40 FWP40B FWP50B
GD2052E 1.5 52 0.81 47.0 GSGB55 63FE A70Q60 FWP60B FWP60B
GD2077E 1.5 77 0.82 70.5 GSGB75 75EET A166C100 170M3212 FWP80B
GD2104E 1.1 144 0.83 133.4 GSGB150 160FEE A166C160 170M3214 FWP150A
GD2104E 12-pulse 1.1 144 0.83 73.4 GSGB80 80FE A166C100 170M3212 FWP90B
GD2104E 1.5 104 0.83 96.3 GSGB110 120FEE A166C125 170M3213 FWP125A
GD2104E 12-pulse 1.5 104 0.83 53.0 GSGB63 63FE A166C80 170M3211 FWP70B
GD2145E 1.1 200 0.84 187.5 GSGB200 200FM A166C250 170M3216 FWP200A
GD2145E 12-pulse 1.1 200 0.84 103.1 GSGB125 120FEE A166C160 170M3214 FWP125A
GD2145E 1.5 145 0.84 135.9 GSGB150 160FEE A166C160 170M3214 FWP175A
GD2145E 12-pulse 1.5 145 0.84 74.8 GSGB80 80FE A166C100 170M3212 FWP90B
GD2207E 1.1 250 0.86 239.9 GSGB300 350FM A166C315 170M3217 FWP300A
GD2207E 12-pulse 1.1 250 0.86 132.0 GSGB150 160FEE A166C160 170M3214 FWP175A
GD2207E 1.5 207 0.86 198.7 GSGB225 250FM A166C250 170M3216 FWP250A
GD2207E 12-pulse 1.5 207 0.86 109.3 GSGB125 120FEE A166C160 170M3214 FWP’125A

Page 5-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 5. System Design

Max
rated Motor AC(A)
Drive Type O/L pf Recommended and alternative fuses
current supply
(A)
GD2282E 1.1 385 0.89 382.4 GSGB400 500FMM A266C450 170M4213 FWP450A
GD2282E 12-pulse 1.1 385 0.89 210.3 GSGB225 250FM A166C250 170M3216 FWP250A
GD2282E 1.5 282 0.89 280.1 GSGB300 315FM A166C315 170M3217 FWP350A
GDD282E 12-pulse 1.5 282 0.89 154.0 GSGB170 200FM A166C200 170M3216 FWP200A
GD2377E 1.1 471 0.89 467.8 GSGB500 630FMM A266C550 170M4215 FWP500A
GD2377E 12-pulse 1.1 471 0.89 257.3 GSGB300 315FM A166C315 170M3217 FWP300A
GD2377E 1.5 377 0.89 374.5 GSGB400 500FMM A266C450 170M4213 FWP450A
GD2377E 12-pulse 1.5 377 0.89 205.9 GSGB225 250FM A166C250 170M3216 FWP250A
GD2564E 1.1 738 0.89 733.0 GSGB800 170M4166 A366C800 170M6212 FWP800A
GD2564E 12-pulse 1.1 738 0.89 403.1 GSGB500 630FMM A366C500 170M6208 FWP500A
GD2564E 1.5 541 0.89 537.3 GSGB580 630FMM A366C630 170M6210 FWP600A
GD2564E 12-pulse 1.5 541 0.89 295.5 GSGB325 350FM A266C350 170M4211 FWP350A
GD2754E 1.1 904 0.89 897.9 A366C1000 170M6214 FWP1000A
GD2754E 12-pulse 1.1 904 0.89 499.5 GSGB500 630FMM A366C550 170M6208 FWP600A
GD2754E 1.5 724 0.89 719.1 GSGB800 170M4168 A366C900 170M6213 FWP900A
GD2754E 12-pulse 1.5 724 0.89 395.5 GSGB450 550FMM A266C450 170M6209 FWP450A
GD2846E parallel 1.1 1107 0.89 604.7 GSGB710 700FMM A366C700 170M6211 FWP700A
GD2846E 12-pulse 1.1 1107 0.89 604.7 GSGB710 700FMM A366C700 170M6211 FWP700A
GD2846E parallel 1.5 812 0.89 443.5 GSGB500 630FMM A366C500 170M6208 FWP500A
GD2846E 12-pulse 1.5 812 0.89 443.5 GSGB500 630FMM A366C500 170M6208 FWP500A
GD21131E parallel 1.1 1355 0.89 740.2 GSGB800 170M4168 A366C900 170M6213 FWP900A
GD21131E 12-pulse 1.1 1355 0.89 740.2 GSGB800 170M4168 A366C900 170M6213 FWP900A
GD21131E parallel 1.5 1086 0.89 593.2 GSGB710 700FMM A366C800 170M6212 FWP700A
GD1131E 12-pulse 1.5 1086 0.89 593.2 GSGB710 700FMM A366C800 170M6212 FWP700A
GD2300E 1.1 340 0.89 337.7 GSMJ400 A100P400 FWJ400A FWJ400A
GD2300E 12-pulse 1.1 340 0.89 185.7 GSMJ240 A100P225 FWJ250A FWJ250A
GD2300E 1.5 300 0.89 298.0 GSMJ350 A100P400 FWJ400A FWJ400A
GD2300E 12-pulse 1.5 300 0.89 163.9 GSMJ180 A100P225 FWJ250A FWJ250A
GD2600E 1.1 653 0.89 648.6 GSMJ680 A100P700 FWJ700A FWJ700A
GD2600E 12-pulse 1.1 653 0.89 356.7 GSMJ460 A100P400 FWJ400A FWJ400A
GD2600E 1.5 576 0.89 572.1 GSMJ630 A100P650 FWJ600A FWJ600A
GD2600E 12-pulse 1.5 576 0.89 314.7 GSMJ350 A100P400 FWJ400A FWJ400A
GD2900E parallel 1.1 980 0.89 535.4 GSMJ580 A100P650 FWJ600A FWJ600A
GD2900E 12-pulse 1.1 980 0.89 535.4 GSMJ580 A100P650 FWJ600A FWJ600A
GD2900E parallel 1.5 846 0.89 462.2 GSMJ520 A100P650 FWJ600A FWJ600A
GD2900E 12-pulse 1.5 846 0.89 462.2 GSMJ520 A100P650 FWJ600A FWJ600A

Notes:

1) 3 line fuses are used normally but 6 fuses are required for 12-pulse or parallel rectifier systems.
2) Codes for fuses may not be complete with mechanical details. These should be selected to suit user.
3) GSGB fuses and equivalents may be used on GD2300/2600/2900 up to 660V ac supply operation.
4) It is possible to mount some fuse types on the input line reactors if the fused version is ordered.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 5-3

Print Home
5. System Design Alspa GD2000E

Input Isolator

It is recommended that an input disconnect switch (isolator) is fitted. This component


may be sized for the rating of the individual application. Suitable switches are available
from Cegelec.

Line Contactor.

If a line contactor or motor output contactor is required, it should be sized for the rating
of the individual application. Suitable line contactors are available on request.

Contactor suppression

Contactor coil suppression is strongly recommended. Suppression components should


be sized to match the rating of the contactor. Suitable components can be supplied by
CEGELEC upon request.

Precharge Circuit

The precharge circuit is provided as standard equipment and is housed within the drive.
No additional components are needed.

Input Line Reactor

Input line reactors are required in some circumstances to reduce the risk of failure of
the rectifier and surge suppression circuits within the drive. The risk of failure depends
on the disturbance levels in the input supply.

Experience has shown that input line reactors are not normally required on single drive
applications.

It is recommended that input line reactors are fitted in the following circumstances:
– If there is primary switching of a transformer e.g 13.8 kV circuit breakers, on line
primary tap changing etc. and the transformer is large.
– If there is a power factor correction equipment switching on the same supply as the
drive.
– If there is a high risk of a short circuit on the secondary of a transformer caused by
other equipment with separate fuse protection.
– On a multi-drive system.

Further information and guidance on input line reactors can be found in GD2000
Application Note D0004\02031 ‘Guidelines for the requirement of input/output line
reactors’, which can be obtained from CEGELEC.

Output Line Reactor

An output a.c. line reactor may be fitted at the drive output terminals where there is a
high capacitive coupling to ground caused by long cable runs or cable with high
capacitance/unit length, or when one drive unit is driving several motors.

Page 5-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 5. System Design

The line reactor must be fitted close to the inverter output.


Note: If both input and output line reactors are fitted, it is essential that no
magnetic coupling occurs between them, as this will induce high
frequency noise into the supply, which may cause damage to components
within the drive.
To avoid this possibility reactors should be mounted such that their axes
are mutually perpendicular or separated by a minimum 300 mm (12").

5.1.4 Recommendations for Fitting Output Line Reactors

Single Cable Runs

For single cable runs (including steel wire armoured cable, no additional line reactor is
required for any length of cable except if the steel wire armoured cable is greatly
oversized, or mineral insulated cable is used. On the GD2005E to GD2016E, this relies
on the built in output reactors. For GD2032E to GD2207E this should take the form of
a Line Output Module (LOM).

Multiple Cable Runs

For multiple cable runs, an output reactor is always required:-


– GD2005E to GD2207E a line output module should be fitted.

– GD2282E and above, standard DELTA output reactors should be fitted; ( a LOM may
be required).
For further information about line reactors contact CEGELEC.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 5-5

Print Home
5. System Design Alspa GD2000E

Page 5-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 6. Control Connections

Control Connections

6.1 User Inputs


The Alpsa GD2000E features extensive user input and output facilities, which can be
used to control and monitor the drive remotely and provide thermistor/thermostat
protection for the motor. These user connections are situated on three terminal blocks
located inside the drive unit.
– Terminal block TB6 contains the analog and digital inputs and the analog outputs.

– Terminal block TB7 contains three sets of dry (volt-free) relay contacts (two on
GD2005E to GD2016E) which are controlled by the digital output functions of the
drive.
– Terminal block TB8 contains the RS485 connections - see Chapter 8 for further
details of the RS485 serial link connections.
Note: The shield terminals on terminal blocks TB6 and TB8 are all connected to
frame ground internally.

6.1.1 Terminal Block TB6 - Electrical

Figure 6-1 Terminal block TB6 user connections

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 6-1

Print Home
6. Control Connections Alspa GD2000E

Table 6-1 Terminal block TB6 connections

Terminal Name Function Remarks


1 SHIELD Shield ground
2 0V(A) Analog Common
Analog Input 1
3 REF1V Voltage Input Range = -10 V to +10 V
Impedance = 100 kΩ
Analog Input 1
4 REF1I Current Input Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Impedance = 50 Ω
Analog Input 2
5 REF2V Voltage Input Range = -10 V to +10 V
Impedance = 100 kΩ
Analog Input 2 Must be shielded
6 REF2I Current Input Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Impedance = 50 Ω
7 +REFSUPPLY +10 V Reference Supply for 10 kΩ Potentiometer
8 -REFSUPPLY -10 V Reference Supply for 10 kΩ Potentiometer
Analog Output 1
9 ANOUT1V Voltage Output Range = -10 V to +10 V
Max. Load = 5 mA
Analog Output 1
10 ANOUT1I Current Output Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Max. Load R = 500 Ω
Analog Output 2
11 ANOUT2V Voltage Output Range = -10 V to +10 V
Max. Load = 5 mA
Analog Output 2
12 ANOUT2I Current Output Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Max. Load R = 500 Ω
Hardwire Plant Interlock
13 INTERLOCK
must be held active for drive to RUN
14 MTRIP Digital Input 1 Motor Thermostat Input
Digital Input 2 Stops drive if Terminal Block
15 STOP
Control selected.
+10 V to +50 V = Active
Digital Input 3 Run request input if Terminal O/C to +5 V = Inactive
16 RUN1
Block Control selected.
Digital Input 4 Run request input if Terminal
17 RUN2
Block control selected
Digital Input 5 Direction control pin for analog
18 DIRECTION
references
Digital Output 3 Open Collector Output for (GD2005E to 2016E only)
19 OCOP External Relay or 24 V Lamp. Max. Load = 50 Free Wheel Diode to +24 V
mA included in drive
+24 V Supply for logic inputs and external use.
20 +24 V
Max. Load = 500 mA.
21 0V(B) 0 V for +24 V external supply Do not confuse with 0V(A)
22 SHIELD Shield ground

Page 6-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 6. Control Connections

6.2 Terminal Block TB7 - Electrical

Figure 6-2 Terminal block TB7 (GD2005E to Figure 6-3 Terminal block TB7 (GD2032E to
GD2016E) GD21131E)

Table 6-2 Terminal block TB7 connections

Terminal Name Function Remarks


1 NO1 Normally Open contact of RELAY1
2 COMMON1 Common of RELAY 1
3 NC1 Normally Closed contact of RELAY1
4 NO2 Normally Open Contact of RELAY2
5 COMMON2 Common of RELAY2
6 NC2 Normally Closed Contact of RELAY2

6.2.1 Terminal Block TB6 - Functional

INTERLOCK (TB6/13)

INTERLOCK must be connected and held at logic 1 for the drive to operate. This
connection is used to disable the drive using a stop button or plant interlock system. If
there is no drive interlock signal, the drive will trip and the output transistor bridge is
disabled. The interlock feature works independently of software and cannot be
disabled. For the drive to run this input must be connected to +24 V.

6.2.2 Digital Inputs

There are 5 digital inputs which can be used, with appropriate parameter settings, to
provide external controls for the drive.

STOP (TB6/15)

0 = Stop
1 = Drive allowed to run.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 6-3

Print Home
6. Control Connections Alspa GD2000E

RUN1 and RUN2 (TB6/16 and 17)

The state of the RUN1 and RUN2 inputs determine:


– The RUN status of the drive when ‘Digital Inputs’ is selected as the control source.

– The analog reference source, i.e RUN1 selects the REF1 analog reference source,
and RUN2 selects REF2 (see Para 6.4). RUN1 and RUN2 can also be used to
implement a Raise/Lower digital speed reference.

Any conflicts between the RUN1 and RUN2 commands are resolved as shown in the
table below:
Interlock RUN1 State RUN2 State STOP Status
1 X X 0 STOP
1 0 0 1 Remains at previous choice
1 1 X 1 Run at REF1
1 0 1 1 Run at REF2
0 X X X Trip

Note: X means input is not significant.

DIRECTION (TB6/18)

DIRECTION controls the direction of rotation of the motor when analog references or
RAISE/LOWER digital speed control is used. The effect of the DIRECTION control is as
follows:
0 = Forward

1 = Reverse

MTRIP (TB6/14)

MTRIP is intended as the input for a motor thermostat, or thermistor and thermistor
relay which must be connected to +24 V.

Note: A positive temperature coefficient motor thermistor relay which has a


resistance of 2.6 kΩ at the required trip temperature may be connected
directly between the +24 V supply (TB6 /20) and MTRIP (TB6/14) to
provide motor protection.
0 = Causes the drive to trip (this may be changed to a warning or be
disabled by the settings of Parameter 182).
1 = Normal operation.

6.3 User Connections


6.3.1 Connecting an Interlock Input

Connect the Interlock input to TB6/15 as shown in Figure 6-4.

Page 6-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 6. Control Connections

To activate the interlock input the Control Source must be specified as ‘Digital Inputs’
see Chapter 7 Para 7.7.1.

Figure 6-4 Connecting an interlock input

Note: To operate the drive without a plant interlock, INTERLOCK (TB6/13) must
be linked to the +24 V (TB6/20).

6.3.2 Connecting Start Buttons

Figure 6-5 Connecting a start button

Connect the start buttons to RUN1 and RUN2 as shown in Figure 6-5.

To activate the start buttons the control source must be specified as ‘Digital Inputs’ see
Chapter 7 Para 7.7.1.

6.3.3 Connecting a Motor Thermostat

Figure 6-6 Connecting a motor thermostat

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 6-5

Print Home
6. Control Connections Alspa GD2000E

The method of configuring the drive for motor thermostat protection is described in
Chapter 7 Para 7.4.1.

6.3.4 Connecting Raise/Lower Speed Controls

Figure 6-7 Connecting raise/lower speed controls

To implement a raise/lower speed control connect the drive inputs as shown in


Figure 6-7

To activate the digital speed control the parameters must be set as shown in Chapter 7
Para 7.7.4.

6.4 Analog Inputs


6.4.1 REF1V and REF2V

REF1V and REF2V are the input terminals for the analog references REF1 and REF2
when these are provided from a voltage source. These may be used to provide speed
(and direction) control.

6.4.2 REF1I and REF2I

REF1I and REF2I are the input terminals for the analog references REF1 and REF2 when
these are provided from a current source.

Note: The analog inputs are not isolated. Depending on the application, signal
isolators may be required. Suitable components are available from
CEGELEC if required.

Page 6-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 6. Control Connections

6.4.3 Speed Reference Input Connections

Figure 6-10 and Figure 6-8 show two methods of connecting an Analog (voltage)
Reference.

Figure 6-8 Connecting a (voltage) speed reference

Figure 6-9 Voltage speed reference (external source0

Figure 6-9 shows the method of connecting an Analog (current) Reference.

Figure 6-10 Current source speed reference

The method of configuring the drive to use an analog speed reference is described in
Chapter 7 Para 7.7.5.

6.5 Digital Outputs


6.5.1 GD2005E to GD2016E

There are two sets of dry (volt-free) relay contacts on terminal block TB7 (digital outputs
1 and 2), and an open collector output OCOP (TB6/19) on terminal block TB6 (digital
output 3), which can be used to provide external indication of the state of the drive. The
relay output terminals on terminal block TB7 are shown in Figure 6-2.

6.5.2 GD2032E to GD21131E

There are three sets of dry (volt-free) relay contacts on terminal block TB7 (digital
outputs 1, 2 and 3), which can be used to provide external indication of the state of the
drive. The relay output terminals on terminal block TB7 are shown in Figure 6-3

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 6-7

Print Home
6. Control Connections Alspa GD2000E

The output states of the three digital outputs can be controlled either by the states of the
drive or they can be preset to allow direct control by the serial links. Information on the
options available and the method of configuring the digital outputs is given in Chapter
7 Para 7.7.11.

6.6 Analog Outputs


Analog outputs 1 and 2 are provided on terminal block TB6. There is a choice of either
voltage or current output. The analog outputs should be connected as shown in Figure
6-11

Figure 6-11 Analog output (voltage) connections

The analog outputs may be configured to indicate a chosen drive variable (e.g.
frequency or motor volts) or a preset value. Information on the options available and
the method of configuring the analog outputs is given in Chapter 7 Para 7.7.10
Note: The analog outputs are not isolated. Depending on the application, signal
isolators may be required. Suitable components are available from
CEGELEC if required.

Page 6-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 6. Control Connections

6.7 Summary of Control Connections.

Figure 6-12 Control connections

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 6-9

Print Home
6. Control Connections Alspa GD2000E

Page 6-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameters

This chapter gives details of the drive parameters and how to to use them to control
and monitor the drive. The chapter is divided into a number of topics each dealing with
a group of related functions:
– Basic Settings
Matching the drive to the motor and load.
Motor braking
Motor protection
Transient fault ride-through
Drive security
Controlling the drive
Monitoring
History logs
Printing
A table at the end of the chapter lists all the parameters in numerical order with a
detailed specification for each parameter and a cross reference to the chapter text.

7.1 Basic Settings


The basic parameter settings are those which are needed to match the drive to the
motor specification and to define the basic operating modes of the drive.

Parameter 998 - Duty Type

GD2104E, GD2145E and GD2207E are dual rated drives i.e. they can with either
110% overload or 150% overload ratings. The value set in P998 selects the drive Full
load Current for the chosen rating as follows:
1= 110% overload (typically for fans and pumps).
0 = 150% overload (for industrial plant applications).
The duty type selected effects the continuous current rating, the current limit range and
other current dependent parameters.

Other drives in the range have only the 150% overload option and P998 is set to 0 and
can not be changed.

Setting P998

The value set in P998 is stored in non-volatile memory. After the value has been input,
wait for the decimal point on the 7-segment LED display to stop flashing and then
power the drive OFF and then ON. The drive will then use the new Duty Type.
Note: DELTA based drives are also dual rated but the setting of P998 is
determined by the value set in P999 (System Configuration) see 10.3 for
details.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-1

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 101 - Motor Full Load Current

The motor full load current setting is used by the drive to provide motor protection and
optimum motor control.

The range of allowed values depends on the size of the drive. This can be obtained by
reading Parameter 100, which is set permanently to the drive size.
– Set the motor full load current (in amps) to the value given on the motor nameplate.

Allowed values:
Unit Motor full load current (A)
Default Max Min
GD2005E 5.2 5.2 1.0
GD2008E 7.6 7.6 1.7
GD2012E 12.3 12.3 3.0
GD2016E 16.1 16.1 4.0
GD2032E 32.0 32.0 6.5
GD2040E 40.0 40.0 9.0
GD2052E 52.0 52.0 11.7
GD2077E 77.0 77.0 17.5
GD2104E 104.0 104.0 23.5
GD2145E 145.0 145.0 35.0
GD2207E 207.0 207.0 47.5
Allowed values when P998 is set to 1
GD2104E 104.0 181.2 18.1
GD2145E 145.0 250.0 25.0
GD2207E 207.0 312.5 31.2

Parameter 102 - Motor Base Voltage

Specifies the voltage applied to the motor terminals when the motor is operating at
base frequency.
– Set the motor base voltage to the value given on the motor nameplate.

Allowed values are:

1 to 1000 V.
Notes: (1) The maximum output voltage of the drive cannot be greater than the
input supply voltage.
(2) Motors rated for a lower voltage than the input supply voltage to the
drive can be used with GD2000E. The drive controls the power of the
motor by PWM switching of the output voltage. The motor therefore
can be subject to a voltage equal to the supply voltage. If there is a
considerable difference between motor base voltage and the input
supply voltage to the drive, the motor manufacturer should be
consulted, to ensure the motor insulation is suitable for operation up
to the input supply voltage of the drive.

Page 7-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 103 - Motor Base Frequency

Specifies the frequency at which the base voltage is achieved and is the normal
operating frequency for the motor.
– Set the value to that given on the motor nameplate.

Allowed values are:


1.0 to 200.0 Hz

Parameter 450 - PWM Switching Frequency

The pulse width modulation (PWM) frequency of the drive output can be changed to suit
local requirements. Increasing the PWM frequency will reduce the audible noise from
the motor and increase the pitch. Increasing the PWM frequency also increases the
amount of heat dissipated from the drive.

The default setting for this parameter is 6.6 kHz for GD2005E to GD2077E and 2.0
kHz for GD2104E and above. These values should be satisfactory for most installations.
If the PWM frequency needs to be changed, the allowed values are:

GD2005E to GD2077E
2.0 to 8.0 kHz
GD2104E to GD21131E
2.0 to 4.5 kHz
Note: At PWM switching frequencies higher than the default setting it may be
necessary to reduce the current rating of the drive, particularly when
operated in high ambient temperatures.

7.1.1 Stop and Start Modes

The action taken by the drive when RUN and STOP commands are received is
controlled by the setting in Parameters 13 and 14 respectively.

Parameter 13 - Start Mode

Controls the action taken when the drive receives a RUN command. The allowed values
are:

1 = Immediate low frequency start - the drive starts at the start up frequency (set
in Parameter 105), and increases the frequency at the acceleration rate (set
in Parameter 106 or 107) to the reference frequency. If the motor is
spinning when the drive is started, it is decelerated to a standstill, at current
limit, and then accelerated to the reference frequency.
2 = Synchro-start - the drive synchronises the output frequency to the motor
speed, allowing the motor to be brought up to speed without stopping. This
mode used in conjunction with the auto-resettable trips, allows a motor to

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-3

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

recover from transient faults with minimum interruption. The synchrostart


options are detailed in Para 7.5.8.

3 = Current fed start - the drive operates as a constant current source during
start up i.e. the voltage applied to the motor is varied to keep the current
equal to the current limit (set in Parameter 9). In this mode the frequency
increases at the acceleration rate set in parameter 106. Parameter 466 sets
the frequency at which the drive reverts to normal operation. This method
of starting gives very high starting torque, but incurs high power losses in
the motor which may make it unsuitable for applications which involve
repeated starts. Current fed starting is unsuitable for applications which
require rapid motor acceleration and it may be necessary to reduce the
acceleration rate set in parameter 106 to allow the motor to start.
4 = Fast fluxing start - the drive injects d.c. current into the motor prior to
accelerating it. Fast fluxing allows the motor to achieve high acceleration at
start up, but introduces a momentary delay before the motor starts to rotate.

Parameter 466 - Current Fed Start Frequency

Defines the output frequency at which the drive reverts to normal operation when
parameter 13 is set to option 3 (current fed start). Allowed values:

1.0 to 50 Hz.

Parameter 14 - Stop Mode

Controls the action of the drive when a STOP command is received. Allowed values are:
1 = Disable and coast to rest.
2 = Decelerate to zero frequency then disable.
3 = DC injection stop (see Para 7.3.1 for a description of DC Injection Braking).
Note: If either option 2 or option 3 is selected, there are some conditions when
the drive can fail to stop (e.g. when the motor is being driven by the load
and during input supply surges). In this instance, set the stop time limit
(Parameter 126). This will disable the drive output if the drive has failed to
stop within the specified time limit.

Parameter 126 - Stop Time Limit

Disables the drive if the motor has not been brought to rest within the specified time
limit.

Allowed values:
0 = No stop time limit
1 to 3600 seconds

Page 7-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

7.1.2 Output Frequency Limits.

The forward and reverse operating frequency ranges of the drive is specified by setting
values in parameters 110 to 113 inclusive. The output frequency is not allowed to go
outside these limits regardless of the active frequency reference value.
Note: These frequency limits are also used to scale the analog frequency
reference.

Parameter 110 - Maximum Frequency Forward


Parameter 111 - Maximum Frequency Reverse

Allowed values are:


value in P105 to 200.0 Hz

Parameter 112 - Minimum Frequency Forward

Allowed values are:


value in P105 to value set in Parameter 110 (Hz).

Parameter 113 - Minimum Frequency Reverse

Allowed values are:


value in P105 to the value set in Parameter 111 (Hz).

7.1.3 System Configuration for DELTA Based Drives (from firmware version 0.40)

To support the latest DELTA range of modular drives (i.e. the high voltage range
available from September 1995), Parameter P.999, ‘System Configuration’, has been
added.

This parameter must be set before the drive can operate, and is used to configure the
drive operating firmware correctly for the system to which it is connected.

If P.999 is set incorrectly, the drive will operate incorrectly in many ways. If P.999 is not
set, the drive system will trip with a fault code of 69, which is ‘Configuration Trip’.

Non-Modular Drives and MK1 DELTA Systems

For all drives below and including the GD2207E, and all DELTA based drives that use
Transistor Bridge Modules GDD***-4002 or GDD***-4004, P.999 has no meaning and
is set at 0, from which it cannot be adjusted.

Parameter 999 - System Configuration

The values which can be placed in parameter 999 depend on the hardware
configuration of the DELTA drive. Full details are given in the Chapter 10 para 10.3.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-5

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

7.2 Matching the Drive Output to the Motor and Load


GD2000E incorporates a number of features which allow the output from the drive to
be matched to the characteristics of the load throughout the operating range of the
motor.

7.2.1 Voltage/Frequency Characteristics

The output voltage/frequency characteristics of the drive can be changed to suit


different types of motor load. The options are:
– Normal Fluxing, where the voltage is directly proportional to the frequency (Hz). See
Figure 7-2.
2.
– Fan Fluxing, where the voltage is proportional to Hz
This option is more suitable for
loads which obey a square law such as pumps and fans. See Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Fan fluxing v frequency

Page 7-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Figure 7-2 Normal fluxing volts v frequency

Parameter 117 - Enable Fan Fluxing

Allowed values:
0 = Normal fluxing.
1 = Fan fluxing.

Parameter 114 - Fixed Voltage Boost

Fixed Voltage Boost is used when high motor torque is required at low frequency. The
value set in this parameter specifies the number of volts added to the motor voltage at
zero frequency to overcome winding resistance effects in the motor. This voltage boost
is gradually reduced as the frequency increases as shown in Figures 7-1 and 7-2.

Allowed values are:

0.0 to 50.0 V

Parameter 115 - Load Dependent Voltage Boost

Load Dependent Voltage Boost may be used to compensate for unpredictable start
loads. The value entered represents the voltage boost to be applied at Start Frequency
and Full Load Current. The amount of voltage boost applied is proportional to load
current and reduces as the drive frequency increases.

Allowed values are in the range


0.0 to 20.0 V

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-7

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 116 - Slip Compensation

Slip compensation increases the output frequency of the drive with the load, to
compensate for the decrease in motor speed as the torque demand increases. The
value entered is the slip compensation (in Hz) required at 100 % motor full load
current. This can be calculated from the data on the motor nameplate, or it can be set
at the commissioning stage, by measuring the motor speed first with no load and then
with a load. Allowed values are:

-20.00 to +20.00 Hz

Parameter 105 - Start Up Frequency

The start up frequency is the output frequency of the drive at the instant of start up. A
start up frequency greater than 0 Hz can be used in multi-motor applications where
Load Dependent Voltage Boost does not give suitable characteristics.

Allowed values are:


0.0 to 50.0 Hz.

7.2.2 Acceleration and Deceleration Rates

The rates at which the drive output frequency increases and decreases in both forward
and reverse directions are specified independently.

Parameter 106 - Forward Acceleration Rate


Parameter 108 - Forward Deceleration Rate

Allowed values are:


0.01 to 300.00 Hz/s

Parameter 107 - Reverse Acceleration Rate


Parameter 109 - Reverse Deceleration Rate

Allowed values are:


0 = Same as forward value
0.01 to 300.00 Hz/s

Parameter 465 - Frequency to Reach Full Acceleration/Deceleration Rate

When accelerating from or decelerating to low frequencies, the drive gradually


increases the acceleration/deceleration rate until it reaches the rate set in parameters
106 to 109. Parameter 465 sets the frequency at which the full
acceleration/deceleration rate is reached. The result is an ‘S’ shaped speed curve.

Allowed values are:

0.0 to 50.0 Hz.

Page 7-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

7.2.3 Torque Limit (Available from Firmware Version 0.36)

Torque limit provides a method of limiting the torque produced by the motor to a
maximum level. If the torque limit is reached, the drive takes measures to prevent this
level being exceeded by:
– Reducing the acceleration rate. In this case the torque limit may determine the
maximum acceleration rate of high inertia loads.
– Reducing the speed of the motor. The rate at which the frequency is reduced depends
upon the amount of torque-overload and is controlled by the value set in Parameter
485.

Parameter 7 - Torque Limit

This defines the torque limit as a percentage of the full load value of the in-phase
current. This may be set from the keypad or via the serial links. Allowed values:

10 to 300%

Parameter 483 - Torque Limit Mode

This allows the torque limit to be disabled; set to a preset value; or be controlled via an
analog input (Ref 2). Allowed values:
0 = No Torque Limit
1 = Fixed Value
2 = Fixed Value x Ref.2
When controlled from analog input. The value in Parameter 7 is multiplied by the
analog reference. Full scale on the analog input corresponds to a multiplication factor
of 100%.

Parameter 484 - Torque Limit Cut-in Frequency

This defines the frequency at above which the torque limit becomes active. Due to the
inaccuracy of torque limit at low speeds it advisable not to set this value below 5 Hz.
Allowed values:

2.0 to 200.0 Hz

Parameter 485 - Torque Limit Speed

This defines the rate at which the output frequency is reduced in response to a
torqueoverload. If this parameter is set too high, instability in output current may be
observed when in torque limit. If this parameter is set too low then the torque limit will
be slow to respond. Allowed values:
0.1 to 50.0 Hz

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-9

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 486 - Motor Full Load Power Factor

This parameter is used to define the level of in-phase current corresponding to 100%
torque. This value is usually given on the motor nameplate. The default value is set for
a typical 4-pole motor for the particular rating of drive. Allowed values:
0.10 to 1.00

7.2.4 Motor Stability

Under conditions of light load some induction motors may be prone to instability. This
is seen as uneven motor speed and current and may cause the drive to trip (probably
on over-volts).

To avoid this occurrence GD2000E continually executes a stabilising function. In most


cases the default settings of this function will be adequate to prevent an occurrence of
motor instability. If the motor is particularly prone to instability or the duty load is very
light it may be necessary to increase the amount of stabilisation. To change the motor
stabilisation adjust parameters P480 and P481 as follows:
– Increase the Stability gain (Parameter 480) in small increments until the motor runs
smoothly.

If motor fails to stabilise and the gain becomes to high (which will introduce other
modes of instability) then;
– Set P480 back to the default value (50).

– Increase the Stability Time Constant by 20% at a time and then adjust the Stability
Gain (P480) through its range until stability is achieved.

Parameter 480 - Stability Gain

Allowed values:
0 to 500.

Parameter 481 - Stability Time Constant

Allowed values:

10 to 1000.

7.2.5 Frequency Skipping

In some installations it is desirable that certain critical speeds are avoided, to prevent
mechanical vibrations at resonant frequencies. GD2000E can be programmed to pass
through up to four critical speeds as quickly as possible by setting up to four skip bands.

Page 7-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Figure 7-3 Effect of skip band on output frequency

As the frequency reference enters a skip band the output frequency is held constant,
until the frequency reference emerges from the skip band. The output frequency then
accelerates or decelerates to the reference frequency at the acceleration rate (set in
parameters 106 to 109 inclusive). The action of the frequency skipping function is
shown in Figure 7-3.

To set Skip band 1 adjust the following parameters:

Parameter 300 - Skip Band 1 Centre

Set the value to the centre frequency of the required skip band. Allowed values are:
-200 to +200 Hz, (negative numbers indicate reverse frequencies).

Parameter 301 - Skip Band 1 Width

Set the value to the required skip band width. Allowed values are:

0 to 50 Hz.
Note: It is not permissible for a skip band to straddle zero speed.
Skip bands 2, 3 and 4 are set in a similar manner using the following parameters:

Parameter 302 - Skip Band 2 Centre


Parameter 303 - Skip Band 2 Width
Parameter 304 - Skip Band 3 Centre
Parameter 305 - Skip Band 3 Width

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-11

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 306 - Skip Band 4 Centre


Parameter 307 - Skip Band 4 Width

7.3 Motor Braking


7.3.1 DC Injection Braking

DC injection Braking is invoked by setting the value of Parameter 14 (Stop Mode) to 3.


When a STOP command is received, if the output frequency is below the d.c. injection
frequency, a d.c. current is injected into the motor for a short period (the d.c. injection
duration) to produce a braking torque, and a resulting zero speed torque. If the output
frequency is above the d.c. injection frequency the output decelerates to the d.c.
injection frequency, before d.c. injection takes place.

Parameter 400 - DC Injection Frequency

Sets the frequency at which d.c. injection braking is to be initiated. Allowed values are:
0.0 to 200.0 Hz.

Parameter 401 - DC Injection Current

Sets the d.c. injection current. Allowed values are:


0.0 to 1.5 x Drive rated current (amps). When P998 is set to 0.

0.0 to 1.1 x Drive rated current (amps). When P998 is set to 1.

Parameter 402 - DC Injection Duration

Sets the duration of the d.c. injection, in seconds. Allowed values are:
1 to 60 seconds.

Parameter 403 - DC Injection Delay

If a ‘Stop’ command is asserted while the drive output frequency is already below the
DC injection frequency the drive may trip. This parameter defines an adjustable delay
to allow the motor to de-flux and so prevent the drive from tripping. Allowed values are
in the range:
0.0 to 10.0 seconds.

Parameter 122 - Dynamic Braking Unit Fitted

Allowed values:

0 = Internal voltage control of deceleration


1 = Dynamic braking unit fitted
Note: See Chapter 12 Ordering Codes for ordering information about dynamic
braking units.

Page 7-12 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 123 - Enable Saturation Braking

Allowed Values:
0 = Motor is not saturated during deceleration
1 = Motor is saturated during deceleration.

2 = Motor is saturated only when stopping (and parameter 14 is set to 2).


Note: Saturation braking increases the braking torque but the energy is
dissipated into the motor and may cause overheating.

7.4 Motor Protection


GD2000E provides two methods protecting the motor against overheating:
– Motor thermostat input
2
– I T calculation

These two methods are entirely independent of each other and both may used together
to provide additional security.

7.4.1 Motor Thermostat/thermistor Protection

The motor thermostat (or thermistor used with a standard commercial thermistor relay)
is connected as shown in Chapter 6 Para 6.2.2.

The MTRIP terminal is a digital input, normally held high (logic 1). In the event of the
motor overheating the thermostat becomes open circuit (logic 0).

Parameter 182 - Action on MTRIP

This parameter controls the drives action when the MTRIP digital input = (logic) 0.
0 = No Action

1 = Warning
2 = Trip
Note: The state of the MTRIP digital input can be monitored by reading
Parameter 177.

7.4.2 Motor I2T Protection

The drive also executes a frequency dependant I2T overload protection algorithm. This
is configured by setting three parameters:

Parameter 453 - Motor Overload Duration

Set the duration for which the motor can withstand full load current overload at base
frequency. This can be obtained from the motor manufacturer’s motor data sheets. The
overload current is set at 110% if P998 = 1 or 150% if P998 = 0. Allowed values are:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-13

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

1 = 10 to 3600 s.

Parameter 455 - Motor Cooling Fan Type

This is used in the I2T calculation to derate the motor according to the type of motor
cooling. Allowed values are:
1 = Motor is cooled by a shaft driven fan. GD2000E uses the derate curve for
motor full load current shown in Figure 7-4.

2 = Motor is cooled by a separately powered fan, allowing the full motor rating
to be used down to zero speed.

Figure 7-4 Motor derate curve

Parameter 454 - Action on Motor I2T Fault

Defines the action to be taken by the drive when the percentage of I2T remaining falls
below the prescribed limits. Allowed values are:

0 = No action
1 = Warning at 0% I2T remaining
2 = Warning at 25% I2T remaining, Trip at 0% I2T remaining

3 = Warning and reduce at 25% I2T remaining, Trip at 0% I2T remaining.


Note: Total motor protection against sustained overloads requires direct
measurement of motor temperature using embedded thermo-stats,
thermistors or Resistive Thermometry Devices (RTDs). (See Para 7.4.1.)

Parameter 20 - Motor I2T Remaining

This read only parameter indicates the percentage of I2T overload remaining. The
allowed values are in the range:
100 % to 0 % (of the I2T overload capability of the motor).

Page 7-14 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

7.4.3 Load Fault Detection

GD2000E can detect when the motor current falls outside specified limits (the load fault
envelope) and take appropriate action (defined in Parameter 601). To prevent spurious
trips due to momentary over current, the motor is allowed to operate outside the limits
for a specified time (Load Fault Violation Time - Parameter 600) before any action is
taken. The envelope of allowed operation is defined by specifying maximum and
minimum currents at three frequencies in the forward direction and three in the reverse
direction (see Figure 7-5) in Parameters 602 to 619 inclusive.

Figure 7-5 Load fault detection windows

To activate the load fault detection feature set the following parameters:

Parameter 600 - Load Fault Violation Time

Set the period of time, in seconds, during which the drive may operate outside the load
fault envelope before action is taken. Allowed values are:
1 to 100 seconds

Parameter 601 - Action on Load Fault

Set the action to be taken by the drive when a load fault is detected. Allowed values are:

0 = No action
1 = Warning after violation time
2 = Trip after violation time

3 = Warning immediately, trip after violation time

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-15

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

7.4.4 Defining the Load Fault Detection Envelope

The maximum and minimum currents for each of three frequencies in the forward
direction and three frequencies in the reverse direction are used to define the forward
envelope as follows:

Parameter 602 - Forward Frequency 1

Allowed values:
0 to 200.0 Hz

Parameter 603 - Maximum Current at Forward Frequency 1

Allowed values:
0 to 1.5 x drive rated current (amps).

Parameter 604 - Minimum Current at Forward Frequency 1

Allowed values:
0 to 1.5 x drive rated current (amps).

Parameter 605 - Forward Frequency 2


Parameter 606 - Maximum Current at Forward Frequency 2
Parameter 607 - Minimum Current at Forward Frequency 2

Allowed values as given for Parameters 602, 603 and 604 respectively.

Parameter 608 - Forward Frequency 3


Parameter 609 - Maximum Current at Forward Frequency 3
Parameter 610 - Minimum Current at Forward Frequency 3

Allowed values as given for Parameters 602, 603 and 604 respectively.

Parameter 611 - Reverse Frequency 1


Parameter 612 - Maximum Current at Reverse Frequency 1
Parameter 613 - Minimum Current at Reverse Frequency 1

Allowed values as given for Parameters 602, 603 and 604 respectively.

Parameter 614 - Reverse Frequency 2


Parameter 615 - Maximum Current at Reverse Frequency 2
Parameter 616 - Minimum Current at Reverse Frequency 2

Allowed values as given for Parameters 602, 603 and 604 respectively.

Page 7-16 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 617 - Reverse Frequency 3


Parameter 618 - Maximum Current at Reverse Frequency 3
Parameter 619 - Minimum Current at Reverse Frequency 3

Allowed values as given for Parameters 602, 603 and 604 respectively.

7.5 Transient Fault Ride-Through Settings


7.5.1 Current Limit

Current limit provides protection for the drive and the motor in the event of a current
overload. If the current limit is reached the drive takes measures to prevent a trip due to
instantaneous current overload or timed current overload by:
– Reducing the acceleration rate. In this case the current limit may determine the
maximum acceleration of high inertia loads.
– Decelerating the motor. The rate at which the frequency is reduced depends upon
the amount of overload and this is controlled by the value set in Parameter 124.

Parameter 9 - Current Limit

The current limit value set is the maximum current the drive is allowed to output, without
protection measures being taken. Allowed values are in the range:

When P998 is set to 0


0.125 x drive FLC to 1.5 x drive FLC (amps). Resolution 0.1 A.
When P998 is set to 1
0.125 x drive FLC to 1.1 x drive FLC (amps). Resolution 0.1 A.
Note: Parameter 9 is independent of the motor current set in P101.

Parameter 124 - Current Limit Response Speed

The value set represents the rate at which the frequency is reduced when the load
current is 1.5 x motor FLC and Current Limit is set to 1 x motor FLC. Allowed values are:
0.1 to 50.0 Hz/s

7.5.2 Timed Over-current

The timed over-current function trips the drive if the accumulated product of overload
current (ie current above the drive Full Load Current indicated in P100) and time is
equivalent to overload current of the drive for a period of 60 seconds. When P998 set
to 0 the overload current is set at 1.5 x FLC and when P998 is set to 1 the overload
current is set to 1.1 x FLC. The percentage of overload remaining can be monitored by
reading Parameter 17.

e.g. (for a drive with P998 set to 0)1.5 x FLC for 60 secs, or 1.25 x FLC for 120 secs.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-17

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

The possibility of a timed over-current trip can be reduced by enabling timed


over-current avoidance. When the overload remaining value reaches 10% (e.g. [for a
drive with P998 set to 0] after 1.5 x FLC for 54 secs), the acceleration or speed is
reduced, to allow the drive to recover from the accumulated overload.

Parameter 452 - Timed Over-current Avoidance Enable

Allowed values:

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

7.5.3 Drive Over Temperature Trip Avoidance Enable

The internal temperature of the drive is measured continuously and if the normal limits
are exceeded the drive will generate a Warning and will ultimately trip. The drive can
be programmed to take action to avoid tripping due to excessive internal temperature,
by setting Parameter 468 to ‘enabled’. When over temperature avoidance is enabled,
the drive reduces the current limit setting when the Warning temperature level is
reached. This reduces the output current allowing the drive temperature to reduce.
When the temperature is below the ‘Warning’ level the normal current limit setting is
restored. The drive over temperature trip is not disabled by this function, and the drive
will still trip if the temperature limit is exceeded.

Parameter 468 - Over Temperature Avoidance Enable

Allowed values:

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

7.5.4 Analog Input Loss

When using the analog inputs as a reference source in 4-20 mA or 20-4 mA modes,
(modes 3 and 6 defined in Parameters 150 and 152), it may be required to switch to a
different analog reference source, without causing the drive taking any action (i.e.
tripping or reverting to the back-up reference source). Parameter 165 specifies a time
delay which is introduced between loss of reference and the drive taking action, to
allow time for the new analog input to become effective.

Parameter 165 - Analog Loss Timeout

The allowed values are:


0.1 to 10.0 seconds.

7.5.5 Using Regeneration to Assist Supply Loss Ride-through

GD2000E can be configured to tolerate the loss of the input supply for several seconds,
by configuring the features in Parameters 125 and 473 and the auto resets. If the drive

Page 7-18 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

is connected to a high inertia load this ride-through period can be extended by


recovering energy from the load, using regeneration from the motor, to maintain the
DC link voltage and hence the power to the control electronics. To configure the drive
for motor regeneration, set Parameter 125 as follows:

Parameter 125 - Ride-Through by Regeneration from the Motor.

Allowed values:

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

7.5.6 Low Motor Voltage

To reduce the likelihood of the drive tripping unnecessarily, the drive can be configured
to take alternative action when low motor voltage is detected, by setting Parameter 473.

Parameter 473 - Action on Low Motor Volts

Specifies the action taken by the drive when the motor voltage falls below 90% of the
voltage required for operation at the output frequency.

Allowed values are:


0 = No action
1 = Warning
2 = Trip
3 = Warning and frequency limit

7.5.7 Auto-Resetting Trips

To minimise the nuisance caused by the drive tripping due to transient faults, GD2000E
can be configured to automatically reset most trip conditions without operator
intervention.

The trip conditions are identified by fault codes and these are listed in Table 11-2 in
Chapter 11. The fault code attribute column in this table shows which trips can be reset
automatically.

Parameters 254 to 262 are used to configure one or more of the trip conditions
(identified by its fault code) to reset automatically.

To configure trips to reset automatically:


– Set Parameters 254 to 262 to ‘Enable Automatic Reset’ as required.

– Set the auto-reset delay (Parameter 251).

– Set the auto-reset healthy time (Parameter 264).

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-19

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 254 - Instantaneous Over-current Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault codes 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 and 13.

Parameter 255 - Timed Over-current Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault code 5.

Parameter 256 - Under-volts Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault code 4.

Parameter 257 - Over-volts Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault code 3.

Parameter 258 - Motor Thermal Trips Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault codes 21 and 22.

Parameter 259 - Interlock Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault code 1.

Parameter 260 - Control and Reference Loss Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault codes 2, 23 and 27.

Parameter 261 - Drive Temperature trips Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault codes 6 and 26.

Parameter 262 - Load Faults Auto-reset Enable

Resets fault codes 24 and 25.

Allowed values for Parameters 254 to 262 inclusive are:


0 = Auto-reset disabled
1 = Auto-reset enabled

Parameter 251 - Auto-Reset Delay

The value specifies the number of seconds between the drive tripping and an auto-reset
attempt being made. This is also the time between subsequent auto-reset attempts.
Allowed values are:

1 to 30 seconds.

Page 7-20 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 250 - Number Auto-Reset Attempts

Controls the number of auto-reset attempts that will be made before the drive will
require manually resetting. Allowed values are:
0 to 20.

Parameter 253 - No. of Auto-Reset Attempts Remaining

This read-only parameter indicates the number of auto-reset attempts remaining.

Parameter 264 - Auto-reset Healthy Time

Specifies the period of time, after an automatic reset, that the drive must remain healthy
before the number of reset attempts remaining returns to the value set in parameter
250. Allowed values are:
10 to 3600 seconds

7.5.8 Configuring the Drive for Automatic Restarting

WARNING:

WHEN THE DRIVE IS CONFIGURED TO AUTO-RESTART, IT IS POSSIBLE FOR


THE MOTOR TO START ROTATING WITH NO OPERATOR COMMAND. IF THE
DRIVE IS CONFIGURED TO AUTO RESTART, IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT ALL
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL ARE
TAKEN.

GD2000E can be configured to restart the motor automatically after a trip. This feature
is used to reduce effect of ‘nuisance’ trips on plant operation, which may result from
variations in the input supply or other causes.

GD2000E will restart the motor if the following conditions are met:
– All trips are reset.

– The supply loss timeout period has not been exceeded.

– There is a RUN command from the active reference source.

To configure the drive for automatic restarting:


– Enable automatic resetting of the relevant trip conditions (Parameters 254 to 262) as
described in Para 7.5.7.
– Set the Auto-reset Delay (Parameter 251)

– Set the number of automatic reset attempts (Parameter 250). When the drive is
operating the number of auto-reset attempts remaining can be monitored by reading
Parameter 253.
– Set Auto-reset Healthy Time (Parameter 264).

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-21

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

The drive will only restart while the power supply to the control electronics is
maintained. In the event of an input power supply failure the supply to the control
electronics is maintained by the residual charge in the DC Link capacitors. The length
of time the control electronics will continue to operate depends on the type of drive. If a
longer duration is required an external auxiliary power supply must be fitted.
– Set the Supply Loss Timeout (Parameter 252).

– Set Force Synchro-start enable (Parameter 263) as required. If ‘force synchro-start’ is


specified, Parameter 461 (synchrostart start mode) and Parameter 470 (synchrostart
current) need to be configured also.
The parameters used to configure GD2000E for automatic restarting are as follows:

Parameter 252 - Supply Loss Timeout

If the input supply voltage remains below the minimum allowed, for longer than the
supply loss timeout period the auto-restart function is disabled. This may be limited by
the power supply to the control electronics in the event of an extended input power
supply failure.

The values which can be placed in Parameter 252 are interpreted differently depending
on whether they are input at the front controls or using the serial links. When
configuring the drive using the front panel controls, the allowed values are:
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 (seconds)
- - - - = No timeout
The above values are set from the front panel controls in the normal way. When the
supply loss timeout is set from either the RS485 or the RS232 serial link, the allowed
values are 1 to 9 (inclusive) and these are interpreted as shown below:
1=0s
2=1s
3=2s

4=5s
5 = 10 s
6 = 20 s

7 = 50 s
8 = 100 s
9 = 200 s

10 = No timeout

Page 7-22 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 263 - Force Synchro-start Enable

Specifies the start mode when automatically restarting. Allowed values are:
0 = Disable - the start mode is specified by Parameter 13.
1 = Enable Force Synchro-start - synchro-start is used regardless of the value of
Parameter 13

Parameter 461 - Synchro-start Mode

Defines the method used by the drive to synchronise the drive output frequency with the
motor speed during a restart in synchro-start mode. Allowed values are:

1 = Search in the forward direction only.


2 = Search, first forward then reverse directions.
If the motor speed is not found, i.e. if the motor is stationary at start up, then the drive
performs a normal low frequency start.

Parameter 470 - Synchro-start Current

Reduces the current output to the motor when the drive is searching for the motor
speed. This can be used to help reduce the disturbance to the motor while scanning.

Allowed values are:


20% to 100% (of the drive rated current)
Note: The default value of 50% will suit most applications but may need to be
increased when using high efficiency motors or when there is a large
difference between the maximum frequency and the actual motor speed.
If the value is set too low for the application, this may result in incorrect
synchronisation detection by the drive.

Parameter 482 Synchro-start Scan Rate

This parameter defines the the rate at which the output frequency is scanned whilst the
drive searches for the motor speed during synchro-starting. For some combinations of
motor and load, it may be necessary to reduce this value to avoid over-voltage trips
during the synchronisation period. allowed values are:
1.00 to 50.00 Hz/sec

7.6 Drive Security


GD2000E uses passwords to ensure that only authorised personnel can change
Parameter settings. Each of the parameters has an attribute which defines it as either:
– Write accessible by the operator or

– Write accessible by the engineer

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-23

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Note: The attributes assigned to each of the parameters are given in the
parameter table at the end of this chapter.

There are two passwords which can be entered to allow an authorised operator or
engineer to change parameter values. The passwords are numbers set in Parameter
456 (operator security code) and 457 (engineer security code).

When editing is completed the parameters are locked by entering a value, other than
the operator or engineer codes, in Parameter 16. There is also an auto-locking function
(Parameter 458) which, when set, automatically locks the parameters, by writing a
random number to Parameter 16, if there is no editing activity for a period of five
minutes.

Parameter 16 - Security Key

To gain operator or engineer write access to the parameters, enter the operator or
engineer security code. Allowed values:
0 to 9999

Parameter 456 - Operator Security Code

Contains the value which must be entered in Parameter 16 to allow access to the
‘operator’ parameters. This value cannot be read or adjusted unless the operator
access is unlocked.

Parameter 457 - Engineer Security Code

Contains the value that must be entered in Parameter 16 to allow access to ‘engineer’
parameters. This parameter cannot be read or adjusted unless the engineer access is
unlocked.

Parameter 458 - Auto-Locking

Enables automatic locking of the parameters. With auto-locking enabled the


parameters are locked automatically if no editing activity is detected for a period of five
minutes.

Allowed values are:


0 = Auto-locking Off
1 = Auto-locks engineer parameters only
2 = Auto-locks all parameters.

7.7 Controlling the Drive


The GD2000E can be controlled (i.e it can receive its frequency reference and stop and
start commands) from a variety of sources. These are:
– Local control (from the front panel push buttons or enhanced keypad).

Page 7-24 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

– Using the RS232 or RS485 serial links

– Using preset speed and stop/start states set in the drive parameters.

– Using external (digital and analog) inputs

– Using the PID controller functions.

Note: To use any of the above methods the control and reference sources must
be specified in Parameters 11 and 12.

7.7.1 Control & Reference Selection

Parameter 11 - Principal Control Source

This defines source of the RUN and STOP signals when the drive is running normally.
Options are:

1 = Local - the drive is controlled using the STOP and START push buttons on
the front panel or from the enhanced keypad (if this is fitted).
2 = Digital inputs - control is derived from the RUN1, RUN2 and STOP
terminals of terminal block TB6
3 = RS485 Serial Link - the drive is controlled from the RS485 serial link.
4 = Preset Run/Stop state - the drive is controlled by the value set in Parameter
121.
5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF - the analog references, REF1 or REF2, must be set for
4-20 mA or 20-4 mA operation in Parameter 150 or 152.
6 = RS232 Serial Link - the drive is controlled from the RS232 serial links
7 = Remote Control Selection

Parameter 118 - Back-up Control Source

Defines the control source for the drive in the event of a fault in the principal control
source. Allowed values are the same as Parameter 11 except:
0 = No back-up control source, The drive will trip if the principal control source
is lost.

Parameter 121 - Preset Run/Stop State

Determines the run/stop state of the drive when preset run/stop state (value 4) is
selected from the principal or back-up control source. Allowed values are:
0 = STOP

1 = RUN

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-25

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 127 - Back Up Control Expected

Switching from principle control or reference sources to backup normally causes the
drive to issue a warning. If the drive is required to switch between principle and
reference sources as part of its normal operating cycle this may not be required. This
warning can be suppressed by setting Parameter 127. Allowed values are:
0 = Back up control/reference warning enabled
1 = Back up control/reference warning disabled

Parameter 12 - Principal Reference Source

Specifies the source of the speed reference. Allowed values are:


0 = As control - The drive gets both frequency and control references from the
same source, defined in Parameter 11 or Parameter 118 (principal and
back-up control source respectively).

1 = Local reference - The speed and direction are controlled using the Up
and Down buttons on the front panel.
2 = Analog reference - The speed reference is derived from the analog inputs
(REF1 & REF 2) on terminal block TB6.
3 = RS485 serial link - The speed reference is derived from the RS485 serial link.
4 = PID controller - The speed is derived from the output of the PID control
function. See Para 7.7.15 for a detailed description of the PID function.
5 = Raise/lower - The speed is adjusted using the RUN1 and RUN2 digital
inputs on terminal block TB6 configured as raise/lower controls. See Para
7.7.4 for a detailed description of this function.
6 = Preset frequency reference - The speed is defined by the contents of
Parameter 120.

7 = RS232 serial link


8 = Reference sequencer - See Para 7.7.7.
9 = Fixed speed menu - allows up to four reference speeds to be selected using
digital inputs. See Para 7.7.8.
10 = Trim reference - uses the REF2 analog input to provide a trimming
function to the active reference input. See Para 7.7.6.

11 = Square root function - gives a speed reference output proportional to the


square root of the selected reference input. See Para 7.7.9
12 = Remote reference selection

Page 7-26 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 119 - Back-up Reference Source

This parameter defines the source of the speed reference in the event of a fault in the
principal reference source. Allowed values are the same as for Parameter 12 except:
0 = No back-up reference source. The drive will trip if the principal reference
source is lost.

Parameter 479 - Frequency Multiplier

The output frequency of the drive is derived by multipling the value obtained from the
active frequency reference by a scaling factor, which is set in Parameter 479. Normally
this scaling factor is 1, the default value, giving a maximum output frequency of 200
Hz. This scaling factor can be changed, giving output frequencies up to 1600 Hz. The
allowed values for Parameter 479 are:

1 = max. output frequency 200 Hz.


2 = max. output frequency 400 Hz.
4 = max. output frequency 800 Hz.

4 = max. output frequency 1600 Hz.


If a scaling factor other than 1 is specified, this is not reflected in any other parameters
e.g. if scaling factor 4 is specified then a frequency set to 200 Hz will produce a
frequency of 800 Hz at the output, but the range the of all other freqencies, inputs and
readouts will will remain at 0 to ±200 Hz.This applies to base frequencies, acceleration
rates, frequency feedback etc...
Note: (1) At frequencies above 200 Hz the output waveform contains significant
error components, and drive current measurement becomes innaccurate.
This can cause current limits to be exceeded under some conditions. Care
must taken when using output frequencies above 200 Hz.
(2) It is recommended that this facility is not used with PWM frequencies
below 6.6 kHz, or with motors rated above 40 amps.

Parameter 120 - Preset Frequency Reference

Provides the reference frequency when the principal reference source (Parameter 12) is
set to 6. The preset frequency reference may also be specified as the back-up frequency
reference in Parameter 119. Allowed values are:

-200.0 to +200.0 Hz (negative values indicate rotation in the reverse direction.)

7.7.2 Controlling the Drive Using the Front Panel Controls

To Stop and Start the Drive from the Front Panel:

– Set Parameter 11 (principal control source) to ‘Local’.

The Stop and Start push buttons can now be used to stop and start the drive.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-27

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

To Control the Speed Using the Front Panel Controls:

– Set Parameter 12, (principal reference source) to ‘Local reference’.

– Select Parameter 1 (Frequency Reference).

– Use the UP and DOWN buttons to change the value in parameter 1 and
hence the motor speed.

Parameter 1 - Frequency Reference

The value sets the frequency of the output voltage and hence the speed of the motor.
When ‘Local reference’ (1) is selected in Parameter 12, the speed of the motor is
controlled using the UP and DOWN buttons on the front panel. Allowed values
are:
-200.0 to +200.0 Hz (negative values give reverse rotation).

When the active reference source is transferred to ‘local reference’, parameter 1


assumes the same value as the previous reference source.

7.7.3 Controlling the Drive Using External (Digital and Analog) Inputs

The analog and digital inputs on terminal block TB6 can be used to provide RUN and
STOP commands, to control the direction of rotation and to provide the frequency
reference. The method of connecting RUN and STOP buttons is shown in Chapter 6
Para 6.3.1.

To activate the external STOP and RUN commands:


– Set the value in Parameter 11 to 2 (Digital inputs).

When the control source is transferred to pushbuttons or hard-wired digital inputs, the
drive will remain in the same state (Run or Stopped) unless instructed otherwise.

7.7.4 Raise/Lower Speed Control

The digital inputs can be used to control the speed of the drive by connecting remote
‘raise’ and ‘lower’ push buttons to the RUN1 (TB6/16) and RUN2 (TB6/17) inputs
respectively. The method of connecting external push-buttons for use as raise and lower
controls is shown in Chapter 6 Para 6.3.4.

To configure the drive for raise/lower speed control:


– Set Parameter 12 (Principal Reference Source) to 5 (raise/lower).

– Set the direction of rotation of the motor in Parameter 15 as shown below.

Note: If the reference source (Parameter 12) is set to ‘raise/lower’ (5), the
raise/lower push-buttons connected to the RUN1 and RUN2 terminals can
also be used to start the drive.
When the reference source is transferred to ‘Raise/Lower’ then it will assume the
existing output frequency, until a Raise/Lower input is received.

Page 7-28 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 15 - Direction Control Mode

When the reference source is set to ‘raise/lower’ the direction of rotation of the motor is
determined by the setting of Parameter 15 as follows:
0 = Direction is controlled by the state of the DIRECTION input (TB6/18) ie
0 = Forward
1 = Reverse
1 = Direction is controlled from the raise/lower inputs. Raise takes the speed
towards forward maximum frequency. Lower takes the speed towards
reverse maximum frequency.

7.7.5 Speed Control Using Analog References

GD2000E has two analog input channels, REF1 and REF2, which may be used as
speed references. Each of these channels may be either voltage or current fed by
connecting to the appropriate terminals on terminal block TB6 and selecting the correct
mode in Parameter 150 or Parameter 152.

Also the REF2 input can be used as a trim control to the primary reference. See Para
7.7.6.

To configure drive for use with an analog speed reference:


– Connect the REF1 or REF2 analog inputs as shown in Chapter 6 Para 6.4.

– Set the REF1 analog input mode (Parameter 150) or REF2 mode (Parameter 152) as
shown below.
– Set the Reference Source (Parameter 12) to ‘Analog Reference’ (2).

Note: The external analog input circuit should provide appropriate voltage or
current ranges to give the required full scale* frequency range as defined
by the mode settings of Parameters 150 and 152.

Parameter 150 - REF1 Mode


Parameter 152 - REF2 Mode

1 = 0 to 10 V for zero to full scale.


2 = 0 to 20 mA

3 = 4 to 20 mA
4 = 10 to 0 V for zero to full scale.*
5 = 20 to 0 mA

6 = 20 to 4 mA
Alternatively the analog reference can be chosen according to the state of the RUN1
and RUN2 inputs as follows:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-29

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

– Set Parameter 12 to 0 (As Control). The analog frequency reference is selected by


decoding the states of the RUN1 and RUN2 digital inputs, as shown below:
RUN1 State RUN2 State Chosen Reference
0 0 Remains at previous choice
0 1 REF2
1 0 REF1
1 1 REF1

When using analog inputs as the frequency reference, the direction of rotation of the
motor is determined by the setting of Parameter 15 which acts as follows:

Parameter 15 - Direction Control Mode

0 = Control of direction is from the DIRECTION terminal (TB6/18). In this


mode, only positive values of voltage and current are allowed. Negative
values are considered to be zero.

1 = Control of direction is from the polarity of the chosen analog input. Positive
values give forward rotation and negative values give reverse rotation.

7.7.6 Trim Reference Control

Trim reference control allows the active frequency reference to be scaled and provides
a method of adjusting the final output frequency using the REF2 analog input.

The drive calculates the output frequency using the following expression:

Output Frequency = (A x Ref_X + B x Ref_Y)/100

Where:
A = Trim reference, primary reference scaling factor x 100 (set in Parameter
681).
Ref_X = Frequency requested by the primary reference (selected in Parameter
680).

B = Trim reference (REF2) frequency range (Parameter 682)


REF_Y = REF2 input value (value read from Parameter 153)
The purpose of the primary reference scaling is to compensate for any mis-match
between the analog input range set in Parameter 150 and the actual analog input
value. e.g. if the 0 to 10 V range is selected in Parameter 150 and the actual input
voltage to REF1 is 0 to 8 V then to achieve the full frequency range defined by the
maximum and minimum frequencies (P110 to P113) the scaling factor A should be set
to:
10/8 x 100 = 125.

To set up a trim reference control:

Page 7-30 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

– Set up and configure the principal frequency reference in the normal way.

– Connect the REF2 input as shown in Chapter 6 Para 6.4.

– Select the primary reference source in Parameter 680.

– Set Parameter 681 the primary reference scaling factor (A)

– Set the Parameter 682 the trim reference (REF2) frequency range (B).

– Set Parameter 12 to ‘Trim Reference’ (10).

The output from the trim reference control can be monitored by reading Parameter 683

Trim Reference Parameters are:

Parameter 680 - Primary Trim Reference Source (Ref_X)

Allowed values are:


1 = Programmable reference 1 (set in Parameter 669)
2 = Analog Reference 1
3 = RS485 Serial Link
4 = PID Controller

5 = Raise/Lower
6 = Default Reference (set in Parameter 120)
7 = RS232 Serial Link

8 = Reference Sequencer
9 = Fixed Speed Menu

Parameter 681 - Trim Reference Primary Reference Scaling Factor A

Allowed values -150.0 to +150.0%

Parameter 682 - Trim Reference (REF2) Frequency Range (B)

Defines the output frequency range of Analog Input 2 when Trim Reference mode is
selected.

Allowed values:
-100.0 to +100.0 Hz

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-31

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 683 - Trim Reference Output

This read-only parameter, allows the output of the Trim Reference module to be
monitored. Allowed values:
-200.0 to +200.0 Hz.

7.7.7 Reference Sequencer

GD2000E can be programmed to perform a sequence of speed (and direction)


changes automatically. The sequence can be timed, or it can be controlled by a manual
input. The control sequence changes the speed of the drive by changing the reference
source and there can be up to five changes in a programmed sequence. The methods
of triggering the reference change are:
– Using a manual trigger, either by a 0 to 1 transition in the value of Parameter 652 or
a 0 to 1 transition of the RUN2 digital input (Terminal Block TB6/17). The RUN2
input has a built in 200 ms delay to prevent multiple triggering due to contact
bounce.
– Timed, using the auto-trigger mode and configuring the time intervals as described
below.
The reference to be used at each step in the sequence is defined in the five reference
selection parameters. Each of the reference selection parameters has an associated
duration interval which is set in the two subsequent parameters.

To activate the sequencer mode the Reference Source Parameter 12 or Parameter 119
must be set to ‘Reference Sequencer’.

Configuring the Drive for Sequencer Operation

To set up a programmed sequence the following must be defined:


– Number of sequence points (Parameter 650).

– The sequencer mode (Parameter 651).

– The Reference selection for each of the references in the sequence.

– The duration of the reference selection for each reference in the sequence.

To configure the drive for sequencer operation, the following parameters need to be set:

Parameter 650 - Number of References in Sequence

Allowed values:
1 to 5

Page 7-32 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 651 - Sequencer Mode

Allowed values:
0 = Sequencer disabled and reset to start of sequence.
1 = Run sequence, manual trigger only, freeze sequence when the drive is
stopped.
2 = Auto-trigger (timed) and manual trigger, freeze sequence when the drive is
stopped

3 = Run, external trigger only, continue sequence when drive is stopped.


4 = Auto-trigger and manual trigger, continue sequence when the drive is
stopped.

5 = Run sequence, external trigger only, reset.


6 = Run sequence, auto-trigger or external trigger, reset sequence when the
drive is stopped.

Note: When options 1 to 4 above are selected the current point in the sequence
is stored when the drive is powered down. On power up the sequence
continues from where it left off.

Parameter 652 - Sequencer Manual Trigger

Provides a means of triggering the sequence manually using the front panel controls.
The sequence is triggered by a 0 to 1 transition in the parameter value. Allowed values:
0 and 1

Parameter 653 - Present Sequencer Point

This read only parameter indicates the current position in the sequence of references
defined in Parameter 655 to 673. Indicated values are in the range:
1 to 5.

Parameter 654 -1st Reference Source

Allowed values:
1 = Programmable references (set in Parameters 669)
2 = Programmable references (set in Parameters 670)

3 = Programmable references (set in Parameters 671)


4 = Programmable references (set in Parameters 672)
5 = Programmable references (set in Parameters 673)
6 = Analog reference (Parameter 154)

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-33

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

7 = RS485 serial link (Parameter 231)


8 = PID Controller

9 = Raise/lower (uses the RUN1 and RUN2 digital inputs to control the value in
Parameter 1 which is then used as the frequency reference). Further
information on using raise/lower controls is given in Para 7.7.4.
10 = Default Reference (Parameter 120)
11 = RS232 Serial Link

Parameter 655 - Time at 1st Reference (seconds)

Allowed values:
0 to 3599 seconds

Parameter 656 - Time at 1st Reference (hours)

0 to 336 hours.
Similarly the mode, duration (seconds) and duration (hours) for sequence points 2 to 5
are set in Parameters 657 to 668 as follows:

Parameter 657 - 2nd Reference Source


Parameter 658 - Time at 2nd Reference (seconds)
Parameter 659 - Time at 2nd Reference (hours)

Parameter 660 - 3rd Reference Source


Parameter 661 - Time at 3rd Reference (seconds)
Parameter 662 - Time at 3rd Reference (hours)

Parameter 663 - 4th Reference Source


Parameter 664 - Time at 4th Reference(seconds)
Parameter 665 - Time at 4th Reference(hours)

Parameter 666 - 5th Reference Source


Parameter 667 - Time at 5th Reference (seconds)
Parameter 668 - Time at 5th Reference(hours)
Note: The Manual and external triggers remain active when Auto (timed)
sequence is selected. This allows manual stepping through the sequence
for test or commissioning purposes.

7.7.8 Fixed Speed Menu

The fixed speed menu mode allows up to four preset reference speeds, set in
Parameters 669 to 672, to be selected by decoding the states of the RUN2 and DIR
digital inputs as a 2-bit binary word. When the Fixed Speed Menu mode is selected, the
RUN2 digital input does not generate a RUN command.

Page 7-34 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

The RUN2 and DIR digital outputs are decoded as follows:


RUN2 DIR Active Speed Reference
0 0 P669
0 1 P670
1 0 P671
1 1 P672

To configure the drive for Fixed Speed Menu operation:


– Connect the RUN2 and DIR digital inputs on Terminal Block TB6 to the digital signal
source (normally a PLC or computer output).
– Set the required output frequencies in Parameters 669 to 672.

– Set The Reference Source Parameter 12 (or 119) to ‘Fixed Speed Menu’ (9).

Parameter 669 - 1st Programmable Reference


Parameter 670 - 2nd Programmable Reference
Parameter 671 - 3rd Programmable Reference
Parameter 672 - 4th Programmable Reference
Parameter 673 - 5th Programmable Reference

These parameters set the reference frequencies which are used when either Fixed Speed
Menu is selected as the Reference Source or ‘Programmable References’ is selected as
the reference source in any of the following functions:
Trim Reference Primary Input (Parameter 680)
Reference Sequencer (Parameter 654)

Square Root function (Parameter 690)


Allowed values are:
-200 to + 200 Hz

7.7.9 Speed Reference Square Root Function

The square root function gives an output frequency which is proportional to the to the
square root of value from the selected reference. This allows a linear reference input to
be used to give linear load control in applications where the motor load is proportional
to the square of the speed (e.g. fan or pump loads).

The output frequency reference is calculated as follows:

OutputFreq =√(InputFreq x MaxFreq)

where:
OutputFreq is the output frequency.
Inputfreq is the reference frequency derived from the reference input.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-35

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

MaxFreq is the greater of the Maximum forward frequency (Parameter 110) and
the Maximum reverse frequency (Parameter 111).

To configure the drive for square root function operation:


– Set Parameter 12 (or Parameter 119 for back-up) to ‘square root function’ (11).

– Set the output frequency limits for both forward and reverse rotation in Parameters
110 to 113 inclusive. See Para 7.1.2.
– Select the reference input source in Parameter 690 as follows:

Parameter 690 Square Root Function

1 = Programmable reference 1 (set in Parameter 669).


2 = Analog Reference
The speed reference is derived from the analog inputs (REF1 & REF 2) on
Terminal Block TB6.
3 = RS485 Serial Link
The speed reference is derived from the RS485 serial link.
4 = PID Controller
The speed is derived from the output of the PID control function. See Para
7.7.15 for a detailed description.
5 = Raise & Lower from Terminal Block
Uses the RUN1 and RUN2 digital inputs on Terminal Block TB6 to control
the output frequency. See Para 7.7.4). for a detailed description of
Raise/Lower control.
6 = Preset Frequency Reference
The speed is defined by the contents of Parameter 120.
7 = RS232 Serial Link
8 = Reference Sequencer. See Para 7.7.7.

9 = Fixed speed menu, allows up to four reference speeds to be selected using


digital inputs. See Para 7.7.8.
10= Trim reference, uses the REF2 analog input to provide a trimming function
to the active reference input. See Para 7.7.6.

7.7.10 Analog Outputs.

Analog indication, for meters etc, is provided by two identical analog output channels.
Each channel can provide a signal in either voltage or current form. The output from
Analog output 1 and 2 can be monitored by reading Parameters 158 and 163
respectively.

Page 7-36 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 155 - Analog Output 1 Signal


Parameter 160 - Analog Output 2 Signal

These parameters control the meter scaling of the analog output signals.
1 = 0 to Maximum Frequency
2 = 0 to 50 Hz
3 = 0 to 60 Hz
4 = 0 to 100 Hz

5 = 0 to 120 Hz
6 = 0 to 200 Hz
7 = 0 to 150% drive full load current (as indicated in parameter 100). If P998
= 0.
7 = 0 to 110% drive full load current (as indicated in parameter 100). If P998
= 1.
8 = Not Used
9 = 0 to 500 V Motor Volts
10 = Preset Value (see Parameter 159)
11 = Motor electrical power (see Parameter 183 for scaling).
12 = Real current (0 to 150% of drive current). If P998 = 0.
12 = Real current (0 to 110% of drive current). If P998 = 1.
13 = Active frequency reference (0 to max. freq.
14 = Ramp Output (0 to max. freq.)
15 = Analog REF1 (0 to 100%)
16 = Analog REF2 (0 to 100%)

Parameter 156 - Analog Output 1 Mode


Parameter 161 - Analog Output 2 Mode

Controls the form of the output representing the zero to full-scale values of the analog
output. Allowed values:
1 = 0 to 10 V
2 = 0 to 20 mA

3 = 4 to 20 mA
4 = 10 to 0 V
5 = 20 to 0 mA

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-37

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

6 = 20 to 4 mA

Parameter 157 - Analog Output 1 Polarity


Parameter 162 - Analog Output 2 Polarity

These parameters control the polarity of the output signals.


0 = Output is positive only
1 = Output is bipolar, e.g. when indicating frequency
positive = forward rotation,
negative = reverse rotation.

Parameter 159 - Analog Output 1 Preset Value


Parameter 164 - Analog Output 2 Preset Value

These parameters determine the values, in % full-scale of the analog output signals,
that are output when Parameter 155 or Parameter 160 is set to 10 (preset value). This
allows the output signals to be controlled directly either from the front panel or using
the serial links for commissioning purposes.

Allowed values:
-100.0 to +100.0% (of the full scale output).

Parameter 183 - Analog Output Power Scaling

Scales the analog output when the analog output signal (Parameter 155 or 160) is set
to option 11 - ‘motor electrical power’. The value set is the motor power in kW which
corresponds to the full scale analog output (defined in Parameter 156 or 157). Allowed
values:
1.0 to 999.0 (kW).

7.7.11 Digital Outputs

The GD2000E has three configurable digital outputs. Each of these outputs can be set
up to be active under a wide variety of conditions.

Parameter 168 - Digital Output 1 Preset State


Parameter 171 - Digital Output 2 Preset State
Parameter 174 - Digital Output 3 Preset State

These parameters control the state of the digital outputs (0=inactive, 1=active) when
the selected digital output signal (Parameters 166, 169 and 172) is ‘preset state’ (13).
This allows the digital outputs to be controlled directly with the RS485 serial link.
allowed values are:
0 = Inactive

1 = Active

Page 7-38 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 166 - Digital Output 1 Signal


Parameter 169 - Digital Output 2 Signal
Parameter 172 - Digital Output 3 Signal

Specify the conditions under which the digital outputs are set to their active states.

1 = Drive healthy, no trips


2 = Drive healthy, no trips or warnings
3 = Drive healthy, or auto-reset pending

4 = Drive running
5 = Direction (active = reverse)
6 = Drive at speed

7 = Accelerating
8 = Decelerating
9 = Stopping

10 = Starting
11 = Reversing
12 = Running below 4 Hz

13 = Preset state (See Parameters 168, 171 and 174)


14 = Running within frequency comparator window. See Para 7.7.12.
15 = Running outside Frequency Comparator Window

16 = Running below Frequency Comparator Window


17 = Running above Frequency Comparator Window
18 = Active control source is the same as P184

19 = Active control source is NOT the same as P184


20 = Active reference source is the same as P185
21 = Active reference source is NOT the same as P185
22 = Pre-charge complete.
23 = Hoist Brake Control

7.7.12 Frequency Comparator

The frequency comparator function checks that the output frequency of the drive is
within preset limits and sets the logic levels of the digital outputs accordingly. The
frequency comparator upper and lower limits are specified in Parameters 175 and 176.
To activate the frequency comparator for digital output 1, Parameter 166 must be set to
one of the following options:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-39

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

14 = Running within the frequency comparator window


15 = Running outside the frequency comparator window

16 = Running below the frequency comparator window


17 = Running above the frequency comparator window.
Similarly Parameters 169 and 172 are used to configure digital outputs 2 and 3
respectively.

When the condition set in Parameter 166, 169 or 172 is true the corresponding digital
output relay is energised giving a logic 1 signal on that output.

The frequency comparator function may be used for sequencing process events with
respect to drive speed.

Parameter 175 - Frequency Comparator Window Upper Level


Parameter 176 - Frequency Comparator Window Lower Level

Allowed values are:


-200.0 to +200.0 Hz

7.7.13 Remote Control and Reference Selection

The control and reference sources used by GD2000E can be controlled using the RUN2
and DIR pins on Terminal block TB6. This allows the reference and control sources to
be switched by remote hardwired inputs.

Remote Control Selection

When ‘Remote Control Section’ is specified as the control source in Parameter 11 the
Active Control Source is selected from four predetermined control sources, specified in
Parameters 691 to 694, by the control inputs to the RUN2 and DIR terminals on
Terminal block TB6. The RUN2 and DIR inputs are decoded and used to point to the
active control source as follows:
RUN2 DIR Active Control Cource
0 0 P691
0 1 P692
1 0 P693
1 1 P694

To configure the drive for remote control selection:


– Connect the RUN2 and DIR digital inputs on Terminal Block TB6 to the digital signal
source (normally a PLC or computer output).
– Set the required control sources in Parameters 691 to 694.

– Set the Control Source, Parameter 11 (or 118), to ‘Remote Control Source’ (7).

Page 7-40 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 691 - Remote Control Pointer 1


Parameter 692 - Remote Control Pointer 2
Parameter 693 - Remote Control Pointer 3
Parameter 694 - Remote Control Pointer 4

These four parameters contain the control sources from which the active control source
is selected when ‘Remote Control Source is selected in Parameter 11. Allowed values are
1 = Local

2 = Terminal block (RUN1 and STOP)


3 = RS485 Serial link
4 = Preset RUN/STOP state
5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF
6 = RS232 Serial link
Notes: (1) The RUN2 terminal on terminal block TB6 does not generate a RUN
command when this mode is selected.
(2) The DIR terminal retains it’s DIRECTION function.

Remote Reference Selection

When ‘Remote Reference Selection’ is specified as the reference source in Parameter 12


the active reference source is selected from four predetermined reference sources by the
control inputs to the RUN2 and DIR terminals on Terminal block TB6. The reference
sources are specified in Parameters 695 to 698. The RUN2 and DIR inputs are decoded
and used to point to the active reference source as follows:
RUN2 DIR Active Reference Source
0 0 P695
0 1 P696
1 0 P697
1 1 P698

To configure the drive for Remote Reference Selection:


– Connect the RUN2 and DIR digital inputs on Terminal Block TB6 to the digital signal
source (normally a PLC or computer output).
– Set the required reference sources in Parameters 695 to 698.

– Set the Reference Source, Parameter 12 (or 119), to ‘Remote Reference Selection’
(12).

Parameter 695 - Remote Reference Pointer 1


Parameter 696 - Remote Reference Pointer 2

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-41

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 697 - Remote Reference Pointer 3


Parameter 698 - Remote Reference Pointer 4

These four parameters contain the reference sources from which the active reference
source is selected when ‘Remote Reference Source is selected in Parameter 12. Allowed
values are:
1 = Local Reference
2 = Analog reference REF1

3 = Analog reference REF2


4 = RS485 Serial link
5 = PID controller
6 = Fixed frequency specified in P669
7 = Fixed frequency specified in P670
8 = Fixed frequency specified in P671
9 = Fixed frequency specified in P672
10 = RS232 Serial link
11 = Reference sequencer
12 = Trim reference
Notes: (1) The RUN2 terminal on terminal block TB6 does not generate a RUN
command when this mode is selected.
(2) The DIR terminal retains its DIRECTION function. This can cause
unexpected effects if Remote Reference selection is used in
conjunction with an analog frequency reference with the DIRECTION
input enabled. Great care should taken in planning and setting the
application up when an analog frequency reference is used in
conjunction with the Remote Reference Selection function.

Example Application - Slow Jog Speed

This example sets up a slow jog speed function. Analog reference REF1 is used as the
normal speed reference, which also uses the DIR input to set the motor direction. The
RUN2 input is used as a JOG input. To ensure that a reverse direction signal on REF1
does not change the reference and control sources, set the parameters as follows:
– Set parameter 12 (Principle reference source to ‘Remote reference selection’ (12).

– Set Parameter 669 (1st programmable reference) to the JOG frequency.

– Set Parameter 695 to ‘Analog reference REF1’ (2).

– Set Parameter 696 to ‘Analog reference REF1’ (2).

– Set Parameter 697 to ‘Fixed frequency set in Parameter 669’ (6).

Page 7-42 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

– Set Parameter 698 to ‘Fixed frequency set in Parameter 669’ (6).

With this set up the DIR and RUN2 inputs will have the following effect:
RUN2 DIR Reference Source
0 0 Analog reference REF1
0 1 Analog reference REF1
1 0 Parameter 669
1 1 Parameter 669

7.7.14 Hoist Brake Control (Available from Firmware Version 0.42)

The Hoist Brake Control feature allows GD2000E to be used for the control of a brake
in hoist and lift applications. For this application a Dynamic Braking Unit must be fitted.
Three parameters:
Parameter 186 - Brake Release Frequency
Parameter 187 - Brake Release Current
Parameter 188 - Brake Engage Frequency
are used to control the engagement and release of a brake through a digital output
signal controlled by P166, P169 or P172 (see Para 7.7.11).

Parameter 186 - Brake Release Frequency

Allowed values:
0 to Min frequency (set in P112 and P113)

Parameter 187 - Brake Release Current

Allowed values:
0 to 100 (% of motor FLC)

Parameter 188 - Brake Engage Frequency

Allowed values:
0 to Min Frequency (set in P112 and P113)

Operation

The conditions for setting the Brake Hoist digital outputs are as follows:

Digital output high (releasing the : Drive running AND the frequency is
brake) greater than P186 and the Current is
greater than P187
Digital output low (engaging the : Drive stopped
brake)

If neither condition is satisfied the output remains unchanged.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-43

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

If the Brake Does Not Release:

If the brake does not release, the drive will hit current limit and hold there. Load fault
detection may be used to detect this condition. The condition may arise due to failure of
the outgoing signal to lift the brake, or P186 (Brake Release Frequency) being set too
high.

Broken Coupling

In the event of a broken coupling, the motor will not draw enough current to signal
brake release (P187). The load fault detection function may be set to signal this
condition also.

Application Notes

To use the Hoist Brake feature the following parameters must be set (suggested are
values shown).

Parameter, Description, Suggested Value, Remarks


Min Frequency
P112 5 Hz 2 Hz minimum
Forward
P113 Min Frequency Reverse 5 Hz 2 Hz minimum
P14 Stop Mode 2 Ramp to zero then disable
P122 Regen Unit Fitted 1 See below
P115 Voltage Boost 10V

Allocate a digital output (P166, P169 or P172) to the Brake Hoist function and set the
appropriate parameter to value 23 (Brake Hoist Control).
Note: GD2000E requires a Dynamic Braking Unit (DBU) for operaton with an
overhauling load. The rating of the DBU and resistor will depend on the
mechanical load and the duty cycle required.

7.7.15 PID Controller

The GD2000E has a built in PID controller function. This function is enabled by setting
the Principal Reference Source (Parameter 12) to be ‘PID Controller’ (4). The controller
may be given its reference value either locally (using the front panel controls), digitally
via the serial link, or using an analog input.

The feedback is input via the REF2 analog input. The set-point & feedback for the PID
function are scaled in terms of % full scale (of the system variable). The output of the
controller is converted from % full scale such that 100% = max. frequency (i.e. the
greater of Maximum Forward frequency and the Maximum Reverse frequency) and 0%
= 0 Hz.

Parameter 350 - PID Set-Point Select

This parameter selects the source to be used as the set-point for the PID controller.
1 = Local Set-point (Parameter 10)

Page 7-44 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

2 = Analog REF1.
3 = Reference Sequencer

4 = Fixed Speed Menu


When options 3 and 4 are used, the values returned from the Reference Sequencer and
Fixed Speed Menu functions represent 0.01 % full scale (rather than 0.01 Hz) and are
scaled to represent maximum 100 % full scale before being passed to the PID controller.
Note: It is possible to set up the PID controller in a manner which gives a
meaningless result (e.g Reference Sequencer = PID Controller, PID
Controller = Reference Sequencer). Care should be taken to avoid setting
up the PID controller in this manner.

Parameter 10 - PID Local Set-Point

This is the local set-point, in % Full Scale, for the PID controller. Allowed values:

-100.0 to +100.0%

Parameter 351 - PID Error Dead-band

This sets a dead-band function that is imposed on the error signal (in % Full Scale). An
error dead-band is often useful to prevent “hunting”. Allowed values:
0.0 to 50.0%

Parameter 352 - PID Proportional Band

This sets the proportional band, in %, of the controller. Allowed values:


0.1 to 500.0%

Parameter 353 - PID Integral Action Time

This sets the integral action time, in seconds, of the controller. Allowed values:
0.0 = No Integral term
0.1 to 3000 seconds

Parameter 354 - PID Differential Action Time

This sets the differential action time, in seconds, of the controller. Allowed values:
0.0 to 3000 seconds

Parameter 355 - PID Frequency Reference

This indicates the frequency reference, in Hz, produced by the PID controller. Allowed
values:
-200.0 to +200.0 Hz

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-45

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 356 - PID Error Inversion

This parameter inverts the PID error signal, and is used to correct the signal from a
negative acting feedback transducer. Allowed values are:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled.

7.8 Monitoring
GD2000E provides extensive facilities for monitoring the state of all the functions of the
Drive. This takes the form of a number of read only parameters described below:

7.8.1 Basic Monitoring Features

Parameter 2 - Frequency Feedback

The drive output frequency in Hz, negative values refer to reverse rotation. Values are in
the range:
-200.0 to 200.0 Hz

Parameter 4 - Current Feedback

The drive output current in amps r.m.s. Values are in the range:

0.0 to 9999.9 A

Parameter 5 - Motor Volts

The output voltage applied to the motor, in volts r.m.s. Values are in the range:
0 to 999 V

Parameter 6 - Motor Power

The drive output power, in kW. Values are in the range:


-999.0 to 999.9 kW

Parameter 100 - Drive Full Load Current

The drive rated current (set by the manufacturer).

7.8.2 Temperature Feedback

Parameters 90 to 94 are used to indicate the temperature of various parts of the drive.

The table below indicates the trip and warning temperature thresholds of various parts
of the drive and is provided for reference purposes.

Page 7-46 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Under Under Over Over


Component temperature temperature temperature temperature
warning trip warning trip
Input and output bridges
GD2005E to GD2207E (P90 to 5 oC 0 oC 80 oC 85 oC
93)
Output bridges DELTA based
5 oC 0 oC 102 oC 112 oC
drives only (P90 to 92)
Input bridges DELTA based
5 oC 0 oC 80 oC 85 oC
drives (P93)
Control Electronics (P94) 0 oC -10 oC 65 oC 80 oC

Parameter 90 - Output Bridge 1 Temperature Feedback

On drive models GD2005E to GD2207E this parameter indicates the temperature of


the output transistor bridge. On DELTA (modular) drives, which can have more than
one output transistor bridge, it indicates the temperature of Bridge 1.

Range:
-20 to +120 oC

Parameter 91 - Output Bridge 2 Temperature Feedback


Parameter 92 - Output Bridge 3 Temperature Feedback

On DELTA modular drives, these parameters indicate the temperature of output


transistor bridge 2 and 3 respectively.

Range:
-20 to +120 oC

Parameter 93 - Input Bridge Temperature Feedback

Used on GD2104E to GD2207E and DELTA modular drives only. This parameter
indicates the temperature of the input rectifier bridge. On DELTA drives with dual
rectifier bridges, the temperature feedback is from one bridge only.

Range:

-20 to +120 oC

Parameter 94 - Electronics Temperature Feedback

This parameter indicates the temperature of the control electronics on all drive models.

Range:
-20 to +120 oC

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-47

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

7.8.3 Monitoring Control and Reference Sources

Parameter 459 - Active Control Source

Indicates the control source which is currently active. This has the same values as
Parameter 11 (except: 0 = No source selected) or Parameter 118 if the drive has
reverted to Back-up Control Source.

Parameter 460 - Active Reference Source

Indicates the Reference Source which is currently active. This has the same values as
Parameter 12 (except: 0 = No source selected), or Parameter 119 if the drive has
reverted to the Back-up Reference Source.

Parameter 184 - Control Source Indicator

This parameter is used with parameters 166, 169 and 172 to indicate the active
reference source to a remote station, via a digital output. The active control source is
compared to the control source set in parameter 184 and a digital output is set
according to the condition selected in parameters 166, 169 and 172. The purpose of
this function is to indicate to a remote station that it is in control of the drive.

Allowed values for Parameter 184 are the same as for Parameter 11 ie:
1 = Local
2 = Digital inputs

3 = RS485 serial link


4 = Preset Run/Stop state
5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF
6 = RS232 Serial Link
7 = Remote Control Selection

Parameters 166, 169 and 172

Two options relate to the control source indicator function as follows:

18 = Active control source is the same as P184


19 = Active control source is NOT the same as P184
Further information on setting up digital outputs can be found in Para 7.7.11.

Parameter 185 - Reference Source Indicator

This parameter is used with parameters 166, 169 and 172 to indicate the active
reference source to a remote station, via a digital output. The source of the active
reference is compared to the reference source set in parameter 184 and a digital

Page 7-48 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

output is set according to the condition selected in parameters 166, 169 and 172. The
purpose of this function is to indicate to a remote station that it is in control of the drive.

The allowed values for parameter 185 are the same as parameter 12 (except that there
is no ‘As Control’ option) ie:
1 = Local reference
2 = Analog reference
3 = RS485 serial link
4 = PID controller

5 = Raise/lower
6 = Preset frequency reference
7 = RS232 serial link
8 = Reference sequencer
9 = Fixed speed menu
10 = Trim reference
11 = Square root function

Parameters 166, 169 and 172

Two options relate to the control source indicator function as follows:


20 = Active reference source is the same as P185

21 = Active reference source is NOT the same as P185


Further information on setting up digital outputs can be found in Para 7.7.11.

Parameter 158 - Analog Output 1 Value


Parameter 163 - Analog Output 2 Value

These read-only parameters indicate the values at the analog output 1 and 2 terminals
as a percentage of the full-scale output. Allowed values are in the range:
-100.0% to 100.0%

Parameter 17 - Timed Over-current Remaining

Contains the amount of overload capability remaining to be monitored. If P998 is set to


0 its units are % of 1.5 x Drive FLC for 60 seconds and if P998 is set to 1 its units are %
of 1.1 x Drive FLC for 60 seconds

7.8.4 Process Speed Indication.

The output speed of the drive can be monitored in terms of process speed rather than
drive frequency. This may be used to indicate, for example, the output of a pump or the

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-49

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

speed of a conveyor belt. The process speed output is obtained by reading Parameter
3. To use the process speed facility, it must be configured by entering a scaling value in
Parameter 104.

Parameter 104 - Process Speed at Base Frequency

The value set defines the Process base speed i.e. the calculated process speed when the
drive is operating at Motor Base frequency. (The units are not defined.)

Allowed values:
-9999 to 9999

Parameter 3 - Process Speed Feedback

This read only parameter contains the calculated process speed, derived from the
output frequency of the drive and the scaling factor placed in Parameter 104.
Note: This calculated process speed may be inaccurate, particularly at low
speeds.

Parameter 18 - Percentage Frequency

This parameter indicates the output frequency of the drive expressed as a percentage of
the set maximum frequency.

Parameter 19 - Percentage Current

This parameter indicates current output as a percentage of the drive rated current.

7.8.5 Real and Imaginary Current

Parameters 21 and 22 display the real and imaginary components of the drive current
as a percentage of the drive Full Load Current.

Parameter 21 - Real Current


Parameter 22 - Imaginary Current

Range:
-150 to +150% of drive Full load Current.

Parameter 471 - Hours Run


Parameter 472 - Days Run

These two read-only parameters are used to record the total running time of the drive
since installation. These parameters can only be reset to zero by the manufacturer.
Displayed values are in the range:
Parameter 471: 0 to 23 hours
Parameter 472: 0 to 9999 days.

Page 7-50 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 451 - DC Link Voltage

This read-only parameter, indicates the voltage of the DC link.

7.8.6 Fault Monitoring

See Chapter 11.

7.8.7 Drive Status

Parameter 463 - LED Display when Keypad Fitted

Displays the value of specified parameter on the LED display when the Enhanced
Keypad is fitted. Allowed values:
Any parameter number in the range 1 to 698

Parameter 467 - Firmware Issue Number

This read only parameter indicates the issue status of the drive’s firmware.

7.8.8 Monitoring External Inputs

The following parameters indicate the status of the digital inputs to terminal block TB6.

Parameter 177 Digital Input 1 [MTRIP] State


Parameter 178 - Digital Input 2 [STOP] State
Parameter 179 - Digital Input 3 [RUN1] State
Parameter 180 - Digital Input 4 [RUN2] State
Parameter 181 - Digital Input 5 [DIRECTION] State

The following parameters indicate the level of analog input signals (as a percentage of
the full scale value):

Parameter 151 - Analog Input 1 (REF1) Value


Parameter 153 - Analog Input 2 (REF2) Value

Parameter 154 - Analog Frequency Reference

This parameter indicates the frequency reference value, in Hz, of the active analog
reference.

7.8.9 Monitoring Digital Outputs

The following parameters indicate the states of the digital outputs.

Parameter 167 - Digital Output 1 State


Parameter 170 - Digital Output 2 State
Parameter 173 - Digital Output 3 State

0 = Inactive

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-51

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

1 = Active

7.8.10 Drive Records

Parameters 474 and 475 - Total Energy Consumed

These two parameters record the total energy consumed by the motor (not the total
energy consumed from the supply). The values are ‘read only’ and can only be reset by
performing a’ Return to Default Settings’ (see Chapter 3 Para 3.3.3).

Allowed values are:

Parameter 474 - 0 to 999.9 (kWh).


Parameter 475 - 0 to 9999 (MWh).

Parameter 476 - Set Up Review Enable

A list of those parameters which have been changed from the factory default settings is
maintained by the drive. Enabling the set up review function causes the drive to display
this list (parameter 476 remains displayed). The up and down arrow keys can then be
used to step through the complete list.

To revert to normal parameter display mode, use the up/down keys to display
parameter 476 again and then change it’s value to 0.

Allowed values are:


0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

Parameters 550 and 551- Time Since Last Trip

When the drive trips these two parameters start to record the elapsed time in hours and
seconds since the occurrence of the trip. The values are reset to zero when the trip is
reset. These are read only parameters and the allowed values are:

Parameter 550
0 to 3599 seconds
Parameter 551
0 to 672 hours

7.9 History Logs


The History log records the instantaneous value or state of 10 selected items of
information continuously in 10 separate channels. Each channel can hold 100 samples
in chronological order. The sequence of events can be played back later to help
diagnose faults, using either the front panel controls and 4-digit display or via the serial
links.

Page 7-52 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

7.9.1 Operation of History Log

The History log is written to non-volatile memory so that it is not lost when power to the
drive is shut off. On power up, the history record contains the data from when the drive
last powered down. The data in the History log remains in memory and can be played
back until the next RUN command is issued.

When a RUN command is issued, either manually or via auto-restart, any existing data
in the History log is discarded, and a new one is started.

The History log is continually updated, always retaining the last 100 items of data for
each channel (sample 0 being the most recent and sample 99 the oldest).
Note: The drive continues to record in the STOP condition provided it has not
tripped.
When the drive TRIPS, the record is frozen, and may be played back.

When the drive is started again it discards the old History log and starts to accumulate
data for a new History log.

The History log is configured to suit an application or to help diagnose a particular


problem by specifying the following:
– The sample period

– The subject data

– The method of sampling the data.

7.9.2 Configuring the History Log.

To configure the History log set the following parameters:

Parameter 511 - History Log Sample Period

Set the time interval (in seconds), between each sample of the history record. Allowed
values:
0.01 to 100.0 seconds

Parameter 512 - History Channel 1 Data to be Recorded


Parameter 514 - History Channel 2 Data to be Recorded
Parameter 516 - History Channel 3 Data to be Recorded
Parameter 518 - History Channel 4 Data to be Recorded
Parameter 520 - History Channel 5 Data to be Recorded
Parameter 522 - History Channel 6 Data to be Recorded
Parameter 524 - History Channel 7 Data to be Recorded
Parameter 526 - History Channel 8 Data to be Recorded

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-53

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 528 - History Channel 9 Data to be Recorded


Parameter 530 - History Channel 10 Data to be Recorded

The allowed values are as follows:


1 = Drive Frequency - Hz
2 = Drive Current, A
3 = Motor Voltage, V
4 = Motor Power, kW

5 = Not used
6 = DC Link Voltage, V
7 = Frequency Reference, Hz
8 = Drive Running, 1=yes, 0=no
9 = Direction , 0=FWD, 1=REV
10 = Stopping, 1=yes, 0=no

11 = Starting, 1=yes, 0=no


12 = Accelerating, 1=yes, 0=no
13 = Decelerating, 1=yes, 0=no
14 = In Current Limit, 1=yes, 0=no
15 = At Speed, 1=yes, 0=no
16 = Warning, 1=yes, 0=no
17 = Trip, 1=yes, 0=no
18 = Process Speed
19 = Timed Over-current Remaining, %
20 = Internal Temperature, oC

7.9.3 History Logging Mode

The following Parameters specify the method of sampling the data to be recorded.

Parameter 513 - History Channel 1 Recording Mode


Parameter 515 - History Channel 2 Recording Mode
Parameter 517 - History Channel 3 Recording Mode
Parameter 519 - History Channel 4 Recording Mode
Parameter 521 - History Channel 5 Recording Mode
Parameter 523 - History Channel 6 Recording Mode
Parameter 525 - History Channel 7 Recording Mode
Parameter 527 - History Channel 8 Recording Mode

Page 7-54 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Parameter 529 - History Channel 9 Recording Mode


Parameter 531 - History Channel 10 Recording Mode

Allowed values are:


1 = Average over sample period
2 = Maximum over sample period
3 = Minimum over sample period
Note: (1) Whenever the sample rate is changed, the whole record is erased i.e. all
previously recorded data is lost from the record.
(2) Whenever the control parameters for a single channel are changed (either
Data to be recorded or Mode), the contents of that channel are erased.

7.10 Printing
A printer can be connected to GD2000E to print out the drive records. The printer is
connected to the RS232 connector on the front panel of the unit.

7.10.1 Printer Specification

To work with GD2000E the printer must conform to the following specification:

Carriage width : 42 characters or more.


Print rate : 1 line per second.
Communications : RS232 serial port.
Data format : 8 bits no parity.
Buffer size : 1 line.
Baud rate : 2400 baud

7.10.2 Connecting Cable

An RS232 connecting cable is required, with a 9-way D-type plug at the drive end. This
should be connected point to point as shown in Chapter 8 Figure 8-1.

7.10.3 Configuring the Drive for Printing

To configure the drive for printing:


– Connect the printer to the RS232 port of the drive, and power up the printer.

– Set Parameter 203 - (RS232 Protocol) to ‘Printer’ (option 5).

– Set Parameter 201 - (Serial link baud rate) to the baud rate setting of the printer.

– Set Parameter 478 to the required print option.

– Press MODE.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-55

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

On completion of the printout Parameter 478 automatically reverts to option 0 (Print


nothing) if the option selected was in the range 1 to 4. Print option 5 remains valid until
it is changed by the operator.

To terminate a printout in progress:


– set parameter 478 to 0 and press MODE.

Parameter 478 - Printer Options

Determines which data is output to the printer. Allowed values are:


0 = Print nothing
1 = Print all parameters.

2 = Print all parameters which have been changed from the factory default
settings.
3 = Print the parameters defined in the ESP RS232 user page. See Chapter 8
Para 8.5.4 and Table 8-3 ESP parameter pages for information on how to
configure the ESP user pages.
4 = Print the History log. This can only occur when the History log is frozen (i.e.
the drive must be tripped). The History log will not start to run until the
printout is completed. This allows the drive to be restarted while the History
log is being printed.

5 = Print the History log automatically when the drive trips. This setting is
intended for use with autoreset trips, so that a log of History logs for
previous trips is maintained.

Page 7-56 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

7.11 Parameter List


7.11.1 Parameter Attributes

M = MODE has to be pressed to update (described as Off-Line Edit on the keypad)


O = Operator accessible
E = Engineer accessible
L = List parameter, i.e. the value is selected from a pre-defined list. (Described as State
Variable on the keypad.)
S = Stop to edit
R = Read only

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Resolution 0.1Hz from
Frequency Push Buttons, 0.01Hz
1 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz O
Reference from other sources
See page 7-28
Frequency
2 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz R See page 7-46
Feedback
Scaling determined by
Process Speed
3 0 -9999 to 9999 R setting in P104
Feedback
See page 7-50
Current
4 0 0.0 to 9999.9 A R See page 7-46
Feedback
5 Motor Volts 0 0 to 999 V R See page 7-46
6 Motor Power 0 -999.9 to 999.9 kW R See page 7-46
% FLT
7 Torque Limit 150 10 to 300% E
See page 7-9
8 Torque Feedback 0 -150.0 to 150.0 R % FLT (Not yet available)
If P998 = 1
9 Current Limit 1.1 x FLC 0.125 x FLC to 1.1 x FLC amps O
See page 7-17
If P998 = 0
9 Current Limit 1.5 x FLC 0.125 x FLC to 1.5 x FLC amps O
See page 7-17
PID Local % Plant Variable
10 0 -100.0 to 100.0% O
Set-Point See page 7-45
1 = Local
2 = Digital Inputs
3 = RS485 Serial Link
Principal
11 1 4 = Preset Control State L.O.M See page 7-25
Control Source
5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF
6 = RS232 Serial Link
7 = Remote Control Selection

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-57

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
0 = As Control
1 = Local Reference
2 = Analog Reference
3 = RS485 Serial Link
4 = PID Controller
5 = Raise/Lower
Principal 6 = Preset Freq. Ref.
12 0 L.O.M. See page 7-26
Reference Source 7 = RS232 Serial Link
8 = Reference Sequencer
9 = Fixed Speed Menu
10 = Trim Reference
11 = Square Root Function
12 = Remote Reference
Selection
1 = Immediate Low Freq. start
2 = Synchrostart
13 Start Mode 1 S.L.E.M See page 7-3
3 = Current Fed Start
4 = Fast Fluxing Start
1 = Disable & coast
2 = Decelerate to zero then
14 Stop Mode 1 S.L.E.M See page 7-4
disable
3 = DC Injection Stop
0 = Control from DIRECTION
Terminal Block
pin
15 Direction 0 S.L.E.M See page 7-29
1 = Control from polarity of
Control Mode
reference
16 Security Code 0 0 to 9999 O See page 7-24
If P998 = 0
Timed
% (100% = 150 % FLC
17 Over-current 100 0 to 100% R
for 1 minute)
Remaining
See page 7-49
If P998 = 1
Timed
% (100% = 110 % FLC
17 Over-current 100 0 to 100% R
for 1 minute)
Remaining
See page 7-49
Percentage % of Set Maximum
18 0 -100.0 to 100.0% R
Frequency See page 7-50
Percentage % of DRIVE FLC
19 0 0.0 to 150.0 R
Current See page 7-50
Motor I2 T
20 100 100 % to 0 % R See page 7-14
Remaining
Real (active) component
of current in % of drive
21 Real current 0.0 -150.0 to +150 R
FLC.
See page 7-50
Imaginary (reactive)
Imaginary component of current in
22 0.0 -150.0 to +150 R
current % of drive FLC.
See page 7-50
50 to Warning fault
0 0 to 9999 R.L See page 11-2
59 codes 1 to 10
60 to Trip fault codes
0 0 to 9999 R.L
69 1 to 10 See page 11-2

Page 7-58 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Temperature
90 feedback output 0 -20 to +120 oC R See page 7-47
bridge 1
Temperature
91 feedback output 0 -20 to +120 oC R See page 7-47
bridge 2
Temperature
92 feedback output 0 -20 to +120 oC R See page 7-47
bridge 3
Temperature
93 feedback, input 0 -20 to +120 oC R See page 7-47
bridge
Temperature
94 feedback control 0 -20 to +120 oC R See page 7-47
electronics
Drive Full Load
100 As Drive Size 0.0 to 999.9 A R See page 7-46
Current
Motor Full Load 0.125 x P.100 to 1.5 x P100
101 As P.100 S.E.M See page 7-2
Current amps
102 Motor Base Volts 400 V 1.0 to 1000 V E See page 7-2
Motor Base
103 50.0 1.0 to 200.0 Hz E See page 7-3
Frequency
Process Speed
104 at Base 1500 -9999 to 9999 E. See page 7-50
Frequency
Start Up
105 0.0 0.0 to 50.0 E See page 7-8
Frequency
Accel. Rate
106 5.0 0.01 to 300.00 Hz/sec E See page 7-8
Forward
Accel. Rate 0 = ‘Same as P106’
107 0.00 E See page 7-8
Reverse 0.00 to 300.00 Hz/sec
Decel. Rate
108 5.00 0.01 to 300.00 Hz/sec E See page 7-8
Forward
Decel. Rate 0 = ‘Same as P108’
109 0.0 E See page 7-8
Reverse 0.00 to 300.00 Hz/s
Max. Freq.
110 50.0 Val. of P105 to 200.0 Hz E See page 7-5
Forward
Max.
111 50.0 Val of P105 to 200.0 Hz E See page 7-5
Freq.Reverse
Min. Freq.
112 0.0 Val of P105 to Max. Freq. (Hz) E See page 7-5
Forward
Min. Freq.
113 0.0 Val of P105 to Max. Freq. (Hz) E See page 7-5
Reverse
Vrms @ 0 Hz
114 Fixed Volts Boost 0 0.0 to 50.0 V E
See page 7-7
Load Vrms @ Start Up Freq @
115 Dependant 0 .0 0.0 to 20.0 V E FLC
Voltage Boost See page 7-7

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-59

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Slip Hz @ FLC and unity PF
116 0.0 -20.00 to 20.00 Hz E
Compensation See page 7-8
Enable Fan 0 = Normal Fluxing
117 0 S.L.E See page 7-7
Fluxing 1 = Fan Fluxing
0 = No Backup
1 = Local
2 = Digital Inputs
Backup Control 3 = RS485 Serial Link
118 0 S.L.E.M See page 7-25
Source 4 = Default Control State
5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF
6 = RS232 Serial Link
7 = Remote Control Selection
0 = No Back-up
1 = Local Reference
2 = Analog Reference
3 = RS485 Serial Link
4 = PID Controller
5 = Raise/Lower
Backup 6 = Default Reference
119 0 S.L.E.M See page 7-27
Reference Source 7 = RS232 Serial Link
8 = Reference Sequencer
9 = Fixed Speed Menu
10 = Trim Reference
11 = Square Root Function
12 = Remote Reference
Selection
Preset
120 0 -200.0 to +200.0 Hz E See page 7-27
Freq.Reference
0 =STOP
121 Preset Run/Stop 0 S.L.E See page 7-25
1 = RUN
0 = Internal voltage control of
Regen. Unit deceleration
122 0 S.L.E See page 7-12
Fitted 1 = External Energy dissipation
fitted
0 = Motor is not saturated
during deceleration
Enable
1 = Motor is saturated during
123 Saturation 0 S.L.E See page 7-13
deceleration
Braking
2 = Motor saturated only when
stopping
150% FLC
Current Limit
124 5.0 0.1 to 50.0 Hz/s S.E.M @ ILIM = 100 %
Response Speed
See page 7-17
Ride-through by
regeneration 0 = Disabled
125 0 E.L. See page 7-19
from motor 1 = Enabled
enable
0 to 3600 s
126 Stop Time Limit 0 E See page 7-4
0 = no stop limit
0 = Warning on backup
Back Up Control control or reference
127 0 E See page 7-26
Expected 1 = NO warning on back up
control or reference

Page 7-60 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
1 = 0 - 10 V
2 = 0 - 20 mA
Analog Input 3 = 4 - 20 mA
150 1 L.E.M See page 7-29
REF1 Mode 4 = 10 - 0 V
5 = 20 - 0 mA
6 = 20 - 4 mA
Analog Input 1 % Full scale
151 0 -100.0 to 100.0% R
(REF1) Value See page 7-51
1 = 0 - 10 V
2 = 0 - 20 mA
Analog Input 2 3 = 4 - 20 mA
152 1 L.E.M See page 7-29
(REF2) Mode 4 = 10 - 0 V
5 = 20 - 0 mA
6 = 20 - 4 mA
Analog Input 2 % Full Scale
153 0 -100.0 to 100.0% R
(REF2) Value See page 7-51
Analog
154 Frequency 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz R See page 7-51
Reference
1 = 0 - Max. Freq
2 = 0 - 50 Hz
3 = 0 - 60 Hz
4 = 0 - 100 Hz
5 = 0 - 120 Hz
6 = 0 - 200 Hz
7 = 0 - 150 % Full Load
Current (P998 = 0)
7 = 0 - 110 % Full Load
Current (P998 = 1)
Analog Output
155 1 8 = Not used L.E.M See page 7-37
1 Signal
9 = 0 - 500 V Motor Volts
10 = Preset Value
11 = Motor electrical power
(see P183 for scaling)
12 = Real current
13 = Active frequency
reference
14 = Ramp Output
15 = Analog REF1
16 = Analog REF2
1 =0 - 10 V
2 = 0 - 20 mA
Analog Output 3 = 4 - 20 mA
156 1 L.E.M See page 7-37
1 Mode 4 = 10 - 0 V
5 = 20 - 0 mA
6 = 20 - 4 mA
Analog Output 0 = Monopolar (rectified)
157 0 L.E.M See page 7-38
1 Polarity 1 = Bipolar
Analog Output % Full Scale
158 0 -100.0 to 100.0% R
1 Value See page 7-49
Analog Output % Full Scale
159 0 -100.0 to 100.0% E
1 Preset Value See page 7-38
Analog Output As Parameter 155
160 7 1 to 16 L.E.M
2 Signal See page 7-37

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-61

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Analog Output As Parameter 156
161 1 1 to 6 L.E.M
2 Mode See page 7-37
Analog Output 0 = Monopolar (rectified)
162 0 L.E.M See page 7-38
2 Polarity 1 = Bipolar
Analog Output % Full Scale
163 0 -100 to 100% R
2 Value See page 7-49
Analog Output % Full Scale
164 0 -100.0 to 100.0% E
2 Preset Value See page 7-38
Analog Loss
165 0.5 0.1 to 10.0 s E See page 7-18
Timeout
1 = Drive Healthy, no trips
2 = Drive Healthy, no trips or
warnings
3 = Drive Healthy, or
auto-reset pending
4 = Drive Running
5 = Direction (active = reverse)
6 = Drive at Speed
7 = Accelerating
8 = Decelerating
9 = Stopping
10 = Starting
11 = Reversing
12 = Running Below 4 Hz
13 = Preset State
14 = Running Within
Frequency Comparator
Window
Digital Output 1 15 = Running Outside
166 1 L.E.M See page 7-39
Signal Frequency Comparator
Window
16 = Running Below
Frequency Comparator
Window
17 = Running Above
Frequency Comparator
Window
18 = Selected control source,
same as P184
19 = Selected control source,
NOT same as P184
20 = Selected reference
source, same as P185
21 = Selected reference
source, NOT same
as P185
22 = Pre-charge complete
23 = Hoist Brake Control
Digital Output 1 0 = Inactive
167 0 L.R See page 7-51
State 1 = Active
Digital Output 1 0 = Inactive
168 0 L.E See page 7-38
Preset State 1 = Active
Digital Output 2 As Parameter 166
169 4 1 to 23 L.E.M
Signal See page 7-39

Page 7-62 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Digital Output 2 0 = Inactive
170 0 L.R See page 7-51
State 1 = Active
Digital Output 2 0 = Inactive
171 0 L.E See page 7-38
Preset State 1 = Active
Digital Output 3 As Parameter 166
172 5 1 to 23 L.E.M
Signal See page 7-39
Digital Output 3 0 = Inactive
173 0 L.R See page 7-51
State 1 = Active
Digital Output 3 0 = Inactive
174 0 L.E See page 7-38
Preset State 1 = Active
Frequency
Comparator
175 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz E See page 7-40
Window Upper
Level
Frequency
Comparator
176 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz E See page 7-40
Window Lower
Level
Digital Input1 0 = Low / Open Circuit
177 0 L.R See page 7-51
[MTRIP] state 1 = High
Digital Input 2 0 = Low / Open Circuit
178 0 L.R See page 7-51
[STOP] state 1 = High
Digital Input 3 0 = Low / Open Circuit
179 0 L.R See page 7-51
[RUN1] state 1 = High
Digital Input 4 0 = Low / Open Circuit
180 0 L.R See page 7-51
[RUN2] state 1 = High
Digital Input 5
0 = Low / Open Circuit
181 [DIRECTION] 0 L.R See page 7-51
1 = High
state.
0 = No Action
182 Action on MTRIP 0 1 = Warning L.E.M See page 7-13
2 = Trip
kW reading
Analog Output corresponding to the
183 10.0 1.0 to 999.0 kW E
Power Scaling Analog full scale input.
See page 7-38
1 = Local
2 = Digital Inputs
3 = RS485 Serial Link
Control Source
184 1 4 = Preset Control State E.L See page 7-48
Indicator
5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF
6 = RS232 Serial Link
7 = Remote Control Selection

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-63

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
1 = Local Reference
2 = Analog Reference
3 = RS485 Serial Link
4 = PID Controller
5 = Raise/Lower
6 = Preset Freq. Ref.
Reference
185 1 7 = RS232 Serial Link E.L See page 7-48
Source Indicator
8 = Reference Sequencer
9 = Fixed Speed Menu
10 = Trim Reference
11 = Square Root Function
12 = Remote Reference
Selection
Brake Release 0.1 Hz
186 1.0 0 to Min. Freq. E
Frequency See page 7-43
% of Motor Full Load
Brake Release
187 50% 0 to 100 E Current
Current
See page 7-43
Brake Engage 0.1 Hz
188 1.0 0 to Min. Freq. E
Frequency See page 7-43
0 = Serial Links may monitor
Serial Link Write
200 0 only L.E.M See page 8-4
Enable
1 = Serial Links may write data
Defaults to 9.6 kBaud if
RS232 Serial
201 9.6 1.2 to 9.6 Kbaud E P203 is set to 4
Link BAUD Rate
See page 8-6
Defaults to 0 if P203 is set
RS232 Serial
202 0 0 to 255 E.M to 4
Link Address
See page 8-6
0 = No Protocol
1 = ESP
RS232 Serial
2 = MODBUS RTU
203 Link Message 4 E.L See page 8-6
3 = MODBUS ASCII
Protocol
4 = Enhanced Keypad
5 = Printer
RS232 Serial
0 = No Timeout Detection
204 Link Timeout 10.0 E.M See page 8-6
0.1 to 99.9 s
Period
RS232 Serial
Failures detected
205 Link CRC Fail 0 0 to 9999 R
See page 8-7
Count
RS232 Serial
Failures detected
206 Link Timeout 0 0 to 9999 R
See page 8-7
Count
RS232 Serial Can only be written to by
207 Link Frequency 0 -200.00 to 200.00 Hz E the RS232 serial link
Reference See page 8-8
RS232 Serial 0 = STOP request Only available to the
208 Link RUN/STOP 0 1 = RUN request E.L RS232 Serial Link.
Request See page 8-8

Page 7-64 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
1 = 8 bit data, No parity
2 = 8 bit data, Even parity
3 = 8 bit data, Odd parity Defaults to 1 if P203 is set
RS232 Serial
209 1 4 = 7 bit data, Even parity E.L.M to 4
Link Parity Select
5 = 7 bit data, Odd parity See page 8-7
6 = 7 bit data, Parity reset
7 = 7 bit data, Parity set
Number of
Elements in
Number of Parameters.
210 RS232 Serial 14 1 to 14 E.M
See page 8-14
link User
Configured Page
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
211 1 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 1
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
212 2 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 2
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
213 4 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 3
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
214 5 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 4
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
215 6 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 5
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
216 11 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 6
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
217 12 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 7
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
218 13 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 8
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
219 14 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 9
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
220 50 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 10

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-65

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
221 60 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 11
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
222 106 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 12
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
223 108 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 13
RS232 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
224 110 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 14
RS485 Serial
225 9.6 1.2 to 19.2 kbaud E See page 8-4
Link Baud Rate
RS485 Serial
226 0 0 to 255 E.M See page 8-4
Link Address
0 = No Protocol
RS485 Serial 1 = GEM 80 ESP
227 0 L.E See page 8-4
Link Protocol 2 = MODBUS RTU
3 = MODBUS ASCII
RS485 Serial
0 = No timeout detection
228 Link Timeout 10.0 E.M See page 8-4
0.1 to 99.9 s
Period
RS485 Serial
229 Link CRC Fail 0 0 to 9999 R See page 8-5
Count
RS485 Serial
230 Link Timeout 0 0 to 9999 R See page 8-5
Count
RS485 Serial Can only be written to by
231 Link Frequency 0 -200.00 to 200.00 Hz E the RS485 serial link
Reference See page 8-8
RS485 Serial only available to the
0 = STOP request
232 Link RUN/STOP 0 E.L. RS485 serial link.
1 = RUN request
Request See page 8-9
1 = 8 bit data, No parity
2 = 8 bit data, even parity
3 = 8 bit data, odd parity
RS485 Serial
233 1 4 = 7 bit data, even parity E.L.M See page 8-5
Link Parity Select
5 = 7 bit data, odd parity
6 = 7 bit data, parity reset
7 = 7 bit data, parity set
Number of
Elements in
Number of Parameters
234 RS485 Serial 14 1 to 14 E.M
See page 8-14
Link User
Configured Page

Page 7-66 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
235 1 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 1
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
236 2 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 2
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
237 4 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 3
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
238 5 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 4
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
239 6 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 5
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
240 11 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 6
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
241 12 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 7
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
242 13 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 8
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
243 14 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 9
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
244 50 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 10
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
245 60 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 11
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
246 106 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 12
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
247 108 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 13

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-67

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
RS485 Serial
Link User Parameter Numbers
248 110 1 to 999 E.M
Configured See page 8-14
Page Element 14
Accept 0 = Ignore broadcast messages
249 Broadcast 0 1 = Respond to broadcast E.L.M See page 8-5
messages messages
Number Auto
250 0 0 to 20 S.E.M See page 7-21
Reset Attempts
251 Auto Reset Delay 1 1 to 30 s S.E.M See page 7-20
Supply Loss
0 to 200 s
Timeout 1 S.E.M
—— = No limit
(Local control)
1=0s
2=1s
3=2s
252 Supply Loss 4=5s See page 7-22
Timeout 5 = 10 s
1 S.E
(Serial link 6 = 20 s
control) 7 = 50 s
8 = 100 s
9 = 200 s
10 = No limit
Number of
Auto-Reset
253 0 0 to value in P250 R See page 7-21
Attempts
Remaining
Inst. OC Auto 0 = Auto Reset Disabled
254 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Reset Enable 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Timed OC Auto 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
255 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Under Volts 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
256 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Auto Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Over Volts Auto 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
257 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Motor thermal 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
258 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
trips Auto Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Interlock Auto 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
259 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Control Loss 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
260 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Auto Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Temperature 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
261 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Trips Auto Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Load Faults 0 = Auto-Reset Disabled
262 0 L.E.M See page 7-20
Auto Reset 1 = Auto-Reset Enabled
Force
0 = Disabled
263 Synchrostart 0 L.E.M See page 7-23
1 = Synchrostart Enabled
Enable
Auto Reset
264 30 10 to 3600 s E.M See page 7-21
Healthy Time

Page 7-68 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Skip Band 1
300 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz E
Centre
Skip Band 1
301 0 0.0 to 50.0 Hz E
Width
Skip Band 2
302 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz E
Centre
Skip Band 2
303 0 0.0 to 50.0 Hz E
Width
See page 7-11
Skip Band 3
304 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz E
Centre
Skip Band 3
305 0 0.0 to 50.0 Hz E
Width
Skip Band 4
306 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz E
Centre
Skip Band 4
307 0 0.0 to 50.0 Hz E
Width
1 = Local Setpoint (P10)
PID Setpoint 2 = Analog REF1
350 1 L.E See page 7-44
Select 3 = Reference Sequencer
4 = Fixed Speed Menu
PID Error % Full Scale Plant Variable
351 0 0.0 to 50.0% E
Deadband See page 7-45
PID Proportional
352 500.0 0.1 to 500.0% E See page 7-45
Band
PID Integral 0 = No Integral term
353 3000 E See page 7-45
Action Time 0.0 to 3000 s
PID Differential
354 0 0.0 to 3000 s E See page 7-45
Action Time
PID Frequency
355 0 -200.0 to 200.0 Hz R See page 7-45
Reference
PID Error 0 = Disabled
356 0 S.E.L See page 7-46
Inversion 1 = Enabled
DC Injection
400 5 0.0 to 200.0 Hz E See page 7-12
Frequency
DC Injection 1 x P100 P998 = 0
401 0.0 to 1.5 x P100 Amps E
Current (Drive FLC) See page 7-12
DC Injection 1 x P100 P998 = 1
401 0.0 to 1.1 x P100 Amps E
Current (Drive FLC) See page 7-12
DC Injection
402 5 1 to 60 s E See page 7-12
Duration
DC Injection
403 0.5 0.0 to 10.0 s E. See page 7-12
Delay
6.6
PWM Switching 2.0 to 8.0 kHz
450 or E See page 7-3
Frequency 2.0 or 2.0 to 4.5 kHz

451 DC Link Voltage 0 0 to 1000 R See page 7-51

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-69

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Timed
Overcurrent 0 = Disabled
452 0 L.E See page 7-18
Avoidance 1 = Enabled
Enable
Motor 150%
453 Overload 60 10 to 3600 s E. See page 7-13
Duration
0 = No Action
1 = Warning at 0% remaining
Action on Motor 2 = Warning at25% Trip at 0%
454 2 L.E.M See page 7-14
I2T Time-out remaining
3 = Warning and reduce at
25% trip at 0% remaining
Motor Cooling 1 =Shaft driven fan
455 1 L.E.M See page 7-14
Fan Type 2 = Separately excited fan
Operator
456 0 0 to 9999 O. See page 7-24
Security Code
Engineer
457 0 0 to 9999 E. See page 7-24
Security Code
0 =Auto Locking Off
1 = Auto Locking of Engineer
458 Auto Locking 0 Parameters Only M.L.E See page 7-24
2 = Auto Locking of all
Parameters
0 = No source selected
1 = Local
2 = Digital Inputs
Active Control
459 1 3 = RS485 Serial Link R.L See page 7-48
Source
4 = Default Control State
5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF
6 = RS232 Serial Link
0 = No Source Selected
1 = Local Reference
2 = Analog Reference
3 = RS485 Serial Link
4 = PID Controller
Active Reference 5 = Raise/Lower
460 1 R.L See page 7-48
Source 6 = Default Reference
7 = RS232 Serial Link
8 = Reference Sequencer
9 = Fixed Speed Menu
10 = Trim reference
11 = Square Root Function
Synchrostart 1 = Forward Only
461 1 L.E.S See page 7-23
Mode 2 = Forward then Reverse
CEGELEC
462 - 0 to 9999 E
Security Code
Parameter Number to
LED Display Display
463 When KEYPAD 2 1 to 698 L.E See page 7-51
fitted and Appendix A page A
17

Page 7-70 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
This bit field is available
only to the Serial Links
and indicates the status of
various drive functions.
The bits are defined as
follows (active high)
0 = Drive output enabled
1 = Direction (0 = FWD)
2 = Accelerating
3 = Decelerating
4 = In Current Limit
Drive Status Bit
464 0 −32768 to 32767 R.E. 5 = At Speed
Field
6 = Stopping
7 = Starting
8 = Reversing
9 = Stopped
10 = Running
11 = Tripped
12 = Warning
13 = Regenerating Power
14 = Not defined
15 = Not defined
See page 8-9
Freq. to reach
465 full accel/decel. 0 0 to 50.0 Hz E. See page 7-8
rate
Current Fed
466 10.0 1.0 to 50.0 E.S See page 7-4
Start frequency
Firmware Issue
467 As issue 1.00 to 99.99 R See page 7-51
Number
Over
Temperature 0 = Disabled
468 0 E.L See page 7-18
Avoidance 1 = Enabled
Enable
Keypad removal 0 = Trip on Keypad loss See Appendix A pages A-
469 0 E.L
OK 1 = No trip on Keypad loss 9 and A-17
Synchrostart 20 to 100 (% of Drive rated
470 50 E See page 7-23
Current current)
471 Hours Run 0 0 to 23 hrs R
See page 7-50
472 Days Run 0 0 to 9999 days R
0 = No action
1 = Warning
Action on low
473 0 2 = Trip E.L See page 7-19
motor volts
3 = Warning and frequency
limit
Energy
474 Consumed 0 0 to 999.9 R See Page 7-52
(kWh)
Energy
475 Consumed 0 0 to 9999 R See Page 7-52
(MWh)
Review Mode 0 = Disabled
476 0 E See Page 7-52
Enable 1 = Enabled

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-71

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
1 = English
Keypad text
477 1 2 = German L.E. See Page A-17
language
3 = French
0 = Print nothing
1 = Print all parameters
2 = Print non default set-up
parameters
478 Printer Options 0 3 = Print the parameters in the E See Page 7-56
RS232 user page
4 = Print History log
5 = Print history when the drive
trips
1 = 200 Hz max.
Frequency 2 = 400 Hz max
479 1 S.L.E See Page 7-27
multiplier 4 = 800 Hz max
8 = 1600 Hz max.
480 Stability Gain 50 0 to 500 E. See Page 7-10
Stability Time
481 20 10 to 1000 E. See Page 7-10
Constant
Synchro-start
482 25.00 1.00 to 50.00 E. See Page 7-23
Scan Rate
0 = No Torque Limit
Torque Limit
483 0 1 = Fixed Value L.E.M See Page 7-9
Mode
2 = Fixed Value x Ref.2
Torque Limit
484 10.0 2.0 to 200.0 Hz E See Page 7-9
Cut-in Frequency
Torque Limit
485 0.5 0.1 to 50.0 Hz/s E See Page 7-9
Speed
Motor Full Load (Drive rating
486 E
Power Factor dependent) 0.10 to 1.00 See Page 7-10

History Sample Samples


500 0 0 to 99 O
Display Number See page 11-5
History Sample
As Data Recorded
501 1 Playback 0 -9999 to 9999 R
See page 11-5
Parameter
History Samples
502
2 to 10 As Parameter 501
to 0 -9999 to 9999 R
510 Playback See page 11-5
Parameters
History log
511 0.01 0.01 to 100.00 s S.E. See page 7-53
Sample Period

Page 7-72 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
1 = Drive Frequency, Hz
2 = Drive Current, A
3 = Motor Voltage, V
4 = Motor Power, kW
5 = Not Used
6 = DC Link Voltage, V
7 = Frequency Reference, Hz
8 = Drive Running, 0/1
9 = Direction, 0=FWD,
1= REV
10 = Stopping, 1=yes, 0=no
History Channel 11 = Starting, 1=yes, 0=no
512 1 Data to be 1 12 = Accelerating, 1=yes, L.E.M.S See page 7-53
recorded 0=no
13 = Decelerating, 1=yes,
0=no
14 = In Current Limit, 1=yes,
0=no
15 = At Speed, 1=yes, 0=no
16 = Warning, 1=yes, 0=no
17 = Trip, 1=yes, 0=no
18 = Process Speed
19 = Timed Over-current
Remaining, (%.)
20 = Internal Temperature, oC.
1 = Average over sample
period
History Channel
2 = Maximum over sample
513 1 Recording 1 L.E.M.S See page 7-54
period
Mode
3 = Minimum over sample
period
History Channel
514 2 Data to be 2 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-53
recorded
History Channel
515 2 Recording 2 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-54
Mode
History Channel
516 3 Data to be 3 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-53
recorded
History Channel
517 3 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-54
Mode
History Channel
518 4 Data to be 4 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-53
recorded
History Channel
519 4 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-54
Mode
History Channel
520 5 Data to be 5 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-53
recorded
History Channel
521 5 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-54
Mode

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-73

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
History Channel
522 6 Data to be 6 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-53
recorded
History Channel
523 6 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-54
Mode
History Channel
524 7 Data to be 7 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-53
recorded
History Channel
525 7 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-54
Mode
History Channel
526 8 Data to be 8 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-53
recorded
History Channel
527 8 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-54
Mode
History Channel
528 9 Data to be 9 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-54
recorded
History Channel
529 9 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-55
Mode
History Channel
530 10 Data to be 10 1 to 20 (as P512) L.E.M.S. See page 7-54
recorded
History Channel
531 10 Recording 1 1 to 3 (as P513) L.E.M.S See page 7-55
Mode
Trip History
Fault Codes
540 Element 1, Last 0 0 to 999 R.L
See page 11-4
Trip
Trip History
541
Elements 2 to Fault Codes
to 0 0 to 999 R.L
549 10, Previous See page 11-4
Trips
Time since last Used with P551
550 0 0 to 3599 s R
trip (seconds) See page 7-52
Time since last
551 0 0 to 672 hrs R Used with P550
trip (hours)
Load Fault
600 5 1 to 100 s E See page 7-15
Violation Time
0 = No Action
1 = Warning After Violation
Action on Load Time
601 0 L.E.M See page 7-15
Fault 2 = Trip After Violation Time
3 = Warning Immediately Trip
After Violation Time
Forward
602 0 0.0 to 200.0 Hz E See page 7-16
Frequency 1

Page 7-74 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Max. Current at
603 0.0 0 to 1.5 x FLC (A) E See page 7-16
Fwd. Freq. 1
Min. Current at
604 0 0.0 to 1.5 x FLC (A) E See page 7-16
Fwd Freq. 1
605 As P602, P603,
See As Parameters 602, 603,
606 P604 for See comments E
Comments 604
607 Forward Freq. 2
608 As P602, P603,
See As Parameters 602, 603,
609 P604 for See Comments E
Comments 604
610 Forward Freq. 3
611 As P602, P603,
See As Parameters 602, 603,
612 P604 for See Comments E
Comments 604
613 Reverse Freq. 1
614 As P602, P603,
See As Parameters 602, 603,
615 P604 for See Comments E
Comments 604
616 Reverse Freq. 2
617 As P602, P603,
See As Parameters 602, 603,
618 P604 for See Comments E
Comments 604
619 Reverse Freq. 3
Number of
650 references in 1 1 to 5 references M.E. See page 7-32
sequence
0 = Stopped and reset
1 = Run, manual trigger only,
Freeze when drive stopped
2 = Auto and manual trigger
only. Freeze when drive
stopped
3 = Run, manual trigger only.
Continue when drive
stopped.
4 = Auto and manual trigger.
651 Sequencer Mode 0 M.E.L See page 7-33
Continue when drive
stopped.
5 = Run sequence, exernal
trigger only, reset
sequence when drive
stopped
6 = Run sequence, auto
trigger only, reset
sequence when drive
stopped
Triggers on 0 - 1
Sequencer
652 0 0 or 1 E.L transition.
manual trigger
See page 7-33
Present Sequencer point
653 1 1 to 5 R
sequencer point See page 7-33

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-75

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
1 to 5 = Programmable
references P669 to P673
6 = Analog reference
1st reference 7 = RS485 serial link
654 1 M.E.L See page 7-33
source 8 = PID Controller
9 = Raise Lower
10 = Default reference (P120)
11 = RS232 serial link
655 Time at 1st 0 0 to 3599 s
M.E. See page 7-34
656 Reference 0 0 to 336 hrs
2nd reference 1 to 11
657 2 M.E.L See page 7-33
source meanings as P654
658 Time at 2nd 0 0 to 3599 s
M.E. See page 7-34
659 reference 0 0 to 336 hrs
3rd reference 1 to 11
660 3 M.E.L See page 7-33
source meanings as P654
661 Time at 3rd 0 0 to 3599 s
M.E. See page 7-34
662 reference 0 0 to 336 hrs
4th reference 1 to 11
663 4 M.E.L See page 7-33
source meanings as P654
664 Time at 4th 0 0 to 3599 s
M.E. See page 7-34
665 reference 0 0 to 336 hrs
5th reference 1 to 11
666 5 M.E.L See page 7-33
source meanings as P654
667 Time at 5th 0 0 to 3599 s
M.E. See page 7-34
668 reference 0 0 to 336 hrs
1st
669 programmable
reference
2nd
670 programmable
reference
3rd
671 programmable 0.0 -200.0 to +200.0 Hz E See page 7-35
reference
4th
672 programmable
reference
5th
673 programmable
reference

Page 7-76 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 7. Parameters

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
1 = Programmable Reference 1
(Parameter 669)
2= Analog Reference 1
3 = RS485 serial Link
4 = PID Controller
Trim Ref.
680 2 5 = Raise/Lower S.E.L.M See page 7-31
Primary Input
6 = Preset Reference
(Parameter 120)
7 = RS232 Serial Link
8 = Reference Sequencer
9 = Fixed Speed Menu
(%age of the frequency
Trim reference reference set in Parameter
681 100 -150.0 to +150.0% E
scale factor A 151
See page 7-31
Trim reference
Hz at 100% of REF2 input
682 frequency range 0 -100.0 to +100.0 Hz E
See page 7-31
(scale factor B)
Trim reference
683 0 -200 to +200 Hz R See page 7-32
output
1 = Programmable Reference
1 (P 669)
2 = Analog references
3 = RS485 serial link
4 = PID controller
Square root 5 = Raise/Lower
690 2 S.E.L.M See page 7-36
function 6 = Preset Frequency
Reference (P 120)
7 = RS232 serial link
8 = Reference Sequencer
9 = Fixed Speed Menu
10 = Trim Reference Output
Remote Control
691
Pointer 1 1 = Local
Remote Control 2 = Terminal block (RUN1 and
692 STOP)
Pointer 2
1 3 = RS485 Serial Link E.L. See page 7-41
Remote Control 4 = Preset RUN/STOP state
693
Pointer 3 5 = 4-20 mA ON/OFF
Remote Control 6 = RS 232 Serial Link
694
Pointer 4

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 7-77

Print Home
7. Parameters Alspa GD2000E

Par
Function Default Range Att Comments
No.
Remote 1 = Local
695 Reference 2 = Analogue References
Pointer 1 (REF1)
3 = Analogue references
Remote
696 (REF2)
Reference
4 = RS 485 Serial Link
Pointer 2
5 = PID Controller
Remote 6 = Fixed Frequency Ref in
697 Reference P669
1 E.L See page 7-41
Pointer 3 7 = Fixed Frequency Ref in
P670
8 = Fixed Frequency Ref in
P671
Remote 9 = Fixed Frequency Ref in
698 Reference P672
Pointer 4 10 = RS232 Serial Link
11 = Reference Sequencer
12.= Trim Reference
GD2104E, GD2145E and
0 = 150% Overload
998 Duty Type 0 E GD2207E only.
1 = 110% overload
See page 7-1.
101 to 112 (single bridge
System drives) See page 7-5 and
999 0 E.L.M
Configuration 201 to 212 (dual bridge drives) Chapter 10 para 10.3
301 to 312 (triple bridge drives)

Page 7-78 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

Serial Communications

WARNING:
HIGH VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY REMAIN FOR
UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN ISOLATED FROM THE INPUT
SUPPLY.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE ISOLATED AND THE UNIT ALLOWED TO STAND
WITHOUT POWER FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES BEFORE OPENING THE
HINGED FRONT PANEL.

8.1 Introduction
The GD2000E has two serial communications ports, an RS232 port and an RS485 port.
Each port can receive and transmit messages in either GEM 80 ESP, MODBUS RTU or
MODBUS ASCII message protocols.

The two ports are completely independent of each other and each port is configured
separately using its own set of drive parameters. Both serial ports may be used to read
from or write to the drive parameters. The RS232 port can be used to update/read
parameters every 100 ms. The RS485 port can be used to update/read parameters
every 10 ms.

8.1.1 RS232 Serial Port

The RS232 Serial Link is connected through a 9 way D-type socket on the front panel of
the GD2000E unit. This connector is also used for the Enhanced Programming unit and
is not available if the Enhanced Programming unit is fitted.

The RS232 port can operate at up to 9600 baud and operates using half duplex
communications, ie reception is ignored while transmitting. This allows 2-wire
communications links to be used.

8.1.2 Connection Details

Table 8-1 RS232 port connections

Pin Name Description


1 - Not used
2 TXD RS232 data transmit connection
3 RXD RS232 data receive connection
4 - Not used
5 0V Signal 0 V and power supply 0 V
6 +12V Power supply
7 - Not used
8 +12 V Power supply
9 - Not used

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-1

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

Figure 8-1 RS232 point to point connections

Note: The shield/screen of the RS232 cable must be connected to the body of
the D-type connector which connects to the frame ground of the drive
through the connector retaining screws. The maximum cable length is 3 m.

8.1.3 RS485 Serial Link

The RS485 serial link is connected to the user terminal block TB8 which is accessed
through the hinged front panel of the drive unit. Cable entry is through the gland plate
at the bottom of the unit.

The RS485 port can operate up to 19.2 kB using half-duplex communications, i.e.
reception is ignored while transmitting. This allows 2-wire RS485 links to be used if
required.
Table 8-2 RS485 connections

Terminal Name Function Remarks


1 SHIELD Screen Earth
2 TX+ RS485 positive Transmit Line
3 TX- RS485 negative Transmit Line
Must be shielded
4 RX+ RS485 positive Receive Line
5 RX- RS485 negative Receive Line
6 SHIELD Shield ground GD2032E and above only.

RS485 Connections

The method of connecting a RS485 2 wire multi-drop serial link is shown in Figure 8-2.

Page 8-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

Figure 8-2 RS485 2-wire multi-drop connections

The method of connecting a RS485 4 wire multi-drop serial link is shown in Figure 8-3

Figure 8-3 RS485 4-wire multi-drop connections

8.2 Access Authority


Updating any of the user parameters is only allowed if the communications device
attempting to read/write to the parameter has access authority. Both serial links have
an ‘engineer’ status with regard to updating/accessing drive parameters.

8.3 Configuring GD2000E for Serial Port Communications


To configure the unit for serial communications, a number of parameters must be set to
match the settings of the controlling device. The RS232 port and the RS485 port are
configured independently.

8.3.1 RS485 Serial Port Parameters

To configure GD2000E for ESP communications using the RS485 port, the following
parameters must be set from the front panel of the unit:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-3

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 200 - Serial Links Write Enable

The value set determines whether the drive parameters can be read/written to via the
serial links.

Allowed values are:

0 = Refuses write access.


1 = Allows read and write access.
This affects both the RS232 and the RS485 serial links.

Parameter 225 - RS485 Serial Link Baud Rate

Set the required value (in kbaud). Allowed values are 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6 and 19.2.

Parameter 226 - RS485 Serial Link Drive Address

Set the required tributary number. Allowed values are:


0 to 255

Note: (1) For GEM 80 ESP systems the address must be in the range 0 to 14 inclusive
(15 is used for broadcast messages).
(2) For MODBUS ASCII and MODBUS RTU the address must be in the range 1
to 255 inclusive. (0 is used for broadcast messages). There may be other
limitations due to characteristics of the external master system.

Parameter 227 - RS485 Serial Link Message Protocol

Allowed values:
0 = No protocol
1 = GEM 80 ESP protocol
2 = MODBUS RTU
3 = MODBUS ASCII

Parameter 228 - RS485 Serial Link Timeout Period

When used with a programmable controller operating in free running mode the
timeout period should be set to a value greater than the scan time of the
Programmable Controller. If a timeout occurs, the RS485 link becomes unhealthy as a
control or reference source. The link is restored to healthy when the next valid message
is received.

If communications are non repetitive, set the value to 0. This sets the timeout detection
period to infinity and disables the serial link as a control or reference source.

Page 8-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

Allowed values are:


0 = No timeout detection.

0.1 to 99.9 seconds

Parameter 229 - RS485 Serial Link CRC Fail Count

This read only parameter indicates the number of errors detected by the cyclic
redundancy check on messages received by the RS485 serial link.

Parameter 230 - RS485 Serial Link Timeout Count

This read only parameter indicates the number of RS485 serial link timeouts that have
occurred. Parameter 228 must be set to a value greater than 0 for timeouts to occur.

Parameter 233 - RS 485 Serial Link Parity Select

Set the value to match the controlling device. Allowed values are:

1 = 8 bit data, no parity


2 = 8 bit data, even parity
3 = 8 bit data, odd parity
4 = 7 bit data, even parity
5 = 7 bit data, odd parity
6 = 7 bit data, parity reset

7 = 7 bit data, parity set

Parameter 249 - Accept Broadcast Messages

Allowed values:
0 = Ignore broadcast messages.
1 = Accept broadcast messages.
Note: Broadcast messages not specifically intended for GD2000E will produce
unpredictable effects. This parameter should therefore be set to 0 unless it
can be guaranteed that ALL broadcast messages produced by the system
are intended for GD2000E.

8.3.2 RS232 Serial Port Parameters

To configure GD2000E for GEM 80 ESP communications using the RS232 port, the
following parameters must be set from the front panel of the unit:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-5

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

Parameter 200 - Serial Links Write Enable

The value set determines whether the drive parameters can be written to via the serial
links. Allowed values are:
0 = Read-only access
1 = Allows Read and Write access.
This affects both the RS232 and the RS485 serial links.

Parameter 201 - RS232 Serial Link Baud Rate

Sets the required value (in kbaud). Allowed values are 1.2, 2.4, 4.8 and 9.6.

Parameter 202 - RS232 Serial Link Drive Address

Set the required tributary number. Allowed values are:


0 to 255
Note: (1) For GEM 80 ESP systems the address must be in the range 0 to 14 inclusive
(15 is used for broadcast messages).
(2) For MODBUS ASCII and MODBUS RTU the address must be in the range 1
to 255 inclusive. (0 is used for broadcast messages). The master system
may have high address limitations.

Parameter 203 - RS232 Serial Link Message Protocol

0 = No protocol
1 = ESP protocol

2 = MODBUS RTU
3 = MODBUS ASCII
4 = Enhanced Keypad

5 = Printer (See Chapter 7 Para 7.10 for further information on printing).

Parameter 204 - RS232 Serial Link Timeout Period

When used with a programmable controller operating in free running mode the
timeout period should be set to a value greater than the scan time of the
programmable controller. If a timeout occurs, the RS232 link becomes unhealthy as a
control or reference source. The link is restored to healthy when the next valid message
is received.

If communications are non-repetitive, set the value to 0. This sets the timeout detection
period to infinity and disables the serial link as a control or reference source.

Page 8-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

Allowed values are:


0 = No timeout detection

1 to 99.9 (seconds).

Parameter 205 - RS232 Serial Link CRC Fail Count

This read only parameter indicates the number errors detected by the cyclic redundancy
check on messages received.

Parameter 206 - RS232 Serial Link Timeout Count

This read only parameter indicates the number of serial link timeouts that have
occurred. Parameter 204 must be set to a value greater than 0 for timeouts to occur.

Parameter 209 - RS232 Serial Link Parity Select

Set the value to match the controlling device. Allowed values are:

1 = 8 bit data, no parity


2 = 8 bit data, even parity
3 = 8 bit data, odd parity
4 = 7 bit data, even parity
5 = 7 bit data, odd parity
6 = 7 bit data, parity reset

7 = 7 bit data, parity set

Parameter 249 - Accept Broadcast Messages

Allowed values:

This parameter affects both RS232 and RS485 links.

0 = Ignore broadcast messages


1 = Accept broadcast messages.
Note: Broadcast messages not specifically intended for GD2000E will produce
unpredictable effects.
This parameter should be set to 0 unless it can be guaranteed that ALL
broadcast messages produced by the system are intended for GD2000E.

8.4 Using Serial Links as Control and Reference Source


The RS232 and RS485 serial ports may be used to provide the principal or the back-up
control reference and frequency reference for the GD2000E.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-7

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

8.4.1 RS232 Serial Link

To use the RS232 port to control the GD2000E the following parameters must be set
from the front panel:

Parameter 11 - Principal Control Source

Set the value to 6 to specify the RS232 port as the principal control reference.

Parameter 12 - Principal Reference Source

Set the value to 7 to specify the RS232 port as the principal reference source.

The following parameters may then be written to by the RS232 serial link to provide
stop/start and speed control.

Parameter 207 - RS232 Serial Link Frequency Reference

Allowed values are:


-200.0 to +200.0 representing the output frequency in Hz.

Parameter 208 - RS232 Link Run/Stop Request

Allowed Values:
0 = STOP request

1 = RUN request.

8.4.2 RS485 Serial Link

To use the RS485 port to control the GD2000E the following parameters must be set
from the front panel:

Parameter 11 - Principal Control Source

Set the value to 3 to specify the RS485 port as the principal control reference.

Parameter 12 - Principal Reference Source

Set the value to 3 to specify the RS485 port as the principal reference source.

The following parameters may then be written to by the RS485 serial link to provide
stop/start and speed control.

Parameter 231 - RS485 Serial Link Frequency Reference

Allowed values are -200.0 to +200.0 representing the output frequency in Hz.

Page 8-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

Parameter 232 - RS485 Serial Link Run/Stop Request

Allowed Values:
0 = STOP request
1 = RUN request.
Note: (1) If a timeout occurs, when the serial links are used as the principal control or
reference source, the drive will switch to the backup control or reference
until the next valid message is received by the serial links. If no backup
control/reference source is specified the drive will trip.
(2) Similarly if the serial links are specified as backup control or reference
source and the serial link is no longer available because of a timeout, the
drive will trip if the principal control/reference source is lost.

8.4.3 Using the Serial Links as the Back-up Reference and Control Sources

The RS232 or RS485 may be specified as the back-up control and reference sources by
setting Parameters 118 and 119 as shown below. All other serial port parameters are
used as for principal control and reference sources.

Parameter 118 - Back-up Control Source

Set the value to 6 to specify the RS232 port as the back-up control source.

Set the value to 3 to specify the RS485 port as the back-up control source.

Parameter 119 - Back-up Reference Source

To specify the RS232 port as the back-up reference source, set the value to 7

To specify the RS485 port as the back-up reference source, set the value to 3

8.4.4 Monitoring the Drive Using the Serial Links

The drive can be monitored using the serial links to access the various monitoring
parameters described in Chapter 7 Para 7.8. Additionally the status of various drive
functions can be accessed by reading Parameter 464, which is available only to the
serial links.

Parameter 464 - Drive Status Bit Field

This read-only parameter is a 16-bit binary word which can be decoded to indicate the
status of various drive functions. The value transmitted by the drive is in the range
-32768 to 32768 and the bit field indicates the following (1 = active).
0 = Drive output enabled
1 = Direction (0 = Fwd)

2 = Accelerating
3 = Decelerating

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-9

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

4 = In current limit
5 = At speed

6 = Stopping
7 = Starting
8 = Reversing
9 = Stopped
10 = Running
11 = Tripped

12 = Warning
13 = Regenerating power
14 = Not defined

15 = Not defined

8.4.5 History Logs

The History log can be configured either using the serial links or using the front panel
controls. The method of configuring the history log is described in Chapter 7 Para 7.9.

To play back the history log:


– Write the sample set number (0 to 99) to Parameter 500 (0 being the most recent).

– Read Parameter 511 to identify the sample period.

– Read Parameters 501 to 510, the history data, as required.

To read the entire history log


– Repeat the above procedure, changing the value in Parameter 500 at each repetition.

Note: The values written to Parameter 500 by one device, do not affect the
values written to Parameter 500 by other devices i.e. If Parameter 500 is
changed by the RS485 serial link it will not change the sample set which is
read by the RS232 serial link, or the front panel display.

8.5 GEM 80 ESP Protocol


The GD2000E is addressed as a tributary port when processing ESP messages. The
drive may have a system address number between 0 and 14 inclusive. Global
messages (messages with address = 15) will only be processed if Parameter 249 is set
to 1.

A full description of the ESP protocol, message structure, CRC generation and inclusion
can be found in the GEM 80 Serial Communications Manual, which is available from
CEGELEC Industrial Controls.

Page 8-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

The drive parameters are accessed in pre-defined groups (referred to as pages), each
page containing a group of related parameters. A complete list of the pre defined
parameter pages is shown in Table 8-3. Pages 9 and 10 provide a user-defined
parameter page, the method of accessing the user-defined parameter page is
described in Para 8.5.4.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-11

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

8.5.1 GD2000E ESP Pages

Table 8-3 ESP parameter pages

Page No. Parameter Numbers


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 90 91 92
93 94
2 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
3 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
4 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125
126 127
150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162
5
163 164 165 166
167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179
6
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188
7 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
8 200 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233
9 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222
via RS232
serial link 223 224
9 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246
via RS485
serial link 247 248
10
via RS232 14 parameters defined by the contents of 211 to 224
serial link
10
via RS485 14 parameters defined by the contents of 235 to 248
serial link
250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262
11
263 264
12 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307
13 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 483 484 485 486
400 401 402 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459
14 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471
472 473 474 475 476
15 500 511 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510
16 512 514 516 518 520 522 524 526 528 530
17 513 515 517 519 521 523 525 527 529 531
18 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551
600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612
19
613 614 615 616 617 618 619
650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661
20 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673
680 681 682 683
21 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698

Page 8-12 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

8.5.2 Writing Data to the GD2000E

GEM 80 programmable controllers use the K tables to store data to be transmitted over
the serial links. The addresses of the K tables used depend on the serial port used and
the type of controller. The GEM 80 controller technical manual should therefore be
consulted for detailed information on how to configure a GEM 80 controller.

When used with GD2000E the data passed to the K tables for transmission must be set
as follows:

1st K table drive parameter page number to write to.


2nd K table drive parameter page to read from.
3rd K table value to be written to 1st item of
GD2000E parameter page.
4th K table value to be written to 2nd item of
parameter page.
5th K table etc...

Note: (1) Do not transfer data to the GD2000E until all the data relating to the page
is correct. Since all the parameters in the specified page will be overwritten
by the data in the K-tables.

(2) If there is a valid page number in the second K table, the parameter values
in that page will be transferred to the GEM 80 J tables. To prevent a
transfer to J tables a zero should be placed in the 2nd K table.

8.5.3 Reading Data from the GD2000E

To read data from the GD2000E place the required page number in the 2nd K table
and transfer the K tables to the GD2000E. The GD2000E then copies the values of the
parameters listed in the specified page to the GEM 80 J tables. On receipt the contents
of the J tables will be as follows:

1st J table Error word associated with the last


message transaction.
2nd J table Page number
3rd J table Value contained in 1st item on parameter
page.
4th J tables Value contained in 2nd item on
parameter page.
5th J table etc...

Note: If a read operation is required without changing any GD2000E


parameters a zero must be placed in the 1st K table.

8.5.4 Accessing a User-Defined Page

Generally the ESP parameter pages have fixed contents. To increase flexibility, the
contents of parameter page 10 are user definable. The group of parameters which are
accessed on page 10 are specified by the contents of the page 9 parameters.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-13

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

To use the user-defined parameter page it must first be configured by defining the
contents of Page 9. Once configured it is accessed (as page 10) in exactly the same
way as the other parameter pages

8.5.5 Configuring a User-Defined Page from the Front Panel

The RS232 and RS485 serial ports have independent user-defined pages. See
Table 8-3.

Use the Mode and Up and Down keys to set the page 9 parameters as
follows:

RS232 RS485 Content


Port Port
210 234 Number of items to be included in page 10
211 235 1st page 10 parameter number
212 236 2nd Page 10 parameter number
etc... (See Table 8-3 for complete list of page 9 parameter
numbers.)

Note: If read and write parameters are mixed within the same page, and the
page is written to the GD2000E, the read only parameters are not
overwritten and bit 10 of the error word (‘Access error’) is set (see para
8.5.8). The drive continues to function correctly.

Parameter 210 - Number of Elements in the RS232 User Defined Page

Defines the number of parameters contained in the user-defined page for the RS232
serial link. Allowed values:
1 to 14.

Parameter 211 to 224 - RS232 Serial Link User Defined Page Elements 1 to 14

These parameters define the contents of the user configured parameter page for the
RS232 Serial link. Allowed values:
Any valid parameter number in the range 1 to 698.

Parameter 234 - Number of Elements in RS485 User Defined Page

Defines the number of Parameters contained in the user-defined page for the RS485
serial link. Allowed values:
1 to 14.

Page 8-14 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

Parameter 235 to 248 - RS485 Serial Link User Defined Page Elements 1 to 14

These parameters define the contents of the user configured parameter page for the
RS485 Serial link. Allowed values:
Any valid parameter number in the range 1 to 698.

8.5.6 Configuring a User Defined Page from GEM 80

Set the GEM 80 K tables as follows:

1st K table Page to write to (9)


2nd K table Page to read from
3rd K table Number of items to be included in page 10 (max 14)
4th K table 1st parameter number to be included in page 10
5th K table 2nd parameter number to be included in page 10 etc...

8.5.7 Message Length

The amount of data sent to the drive is specified by the message length set in the P
tables of the GEM 80. The expected length of reply message is also specified in the
P-tables of the GEM 80. When communicating with the GD2000E using a fixed
message length, the GD2000E will accept the amount of data required by the intended
page, any further message data is ignored.

If the message length contains less data than is required by the page, the number of
parameters updated is given by the number of data words received.

The reply sent back by the GD2000E will be ‘n’ data words, where ‘n’ is the number of
parameters listed in the specified reply page. If this is greater than the expected reply
length, the whole message is ignored by the GEM 80. If the reply message is shorter
than the expected length of reply, the GEM 80 updates only those J-table locations that
have received an associated data word.

8.5.8 Error Messages

The 1st data word of the reply is an error word generated during the parameter
read/write cycle of the message and is placed in the 1st J table. Particular errors are
indicated by individual bits within the word:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-15

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

Bit Error
0 ‘Write’ Page number too large.
1 ‘Read’ Page number too large.
2 Data sent, page length too short
3 Attempting to alter ‘stop to edit’ parameter with drive running.
4 CRC failure occurred.
5 Message Structure incorrect.
6 Data sent, page length too long.
7 Attempt to write out of range data to parameter.
8 Serial Link read access not enabled (P200 = 0).
9 Trying to access non-existent parameter.
10 Access Error
11 to 15 Not defined.

8.5.9 Error Handling

If the GEM 80 receives a message that is corrupted or no message arrives before the
GEM 80 timeout period occurs, it asks for re-transmission of the last reply by sending to
the source of the message failure, an ENQ ADDR message.

The first time the GD2000E receives a valid ENQ ADDR message, it re-transmits the
last reply message. If the next message received is ENQ ADDR, the GD2000E responds
with an NAK, a negative acknowledgement message. From then on, each successive
ENQ ADDR is responded to by a NAK reply until a valid data transfer message is
received by the GD2000E.

If the GD2000E receives a correctly addressed message that has an incorrect CRC
word attached, processing of that message is reset and the CRC count associated with
the serial port is incremented.

8.5.10 MODBUS RTU

The GD2000E can communicate using MODBUS RTU message protocol via the system
link and/or the slow serial link. The GD2000E is configured to operate as a slave
address, with an address range of 1-255. Broadcast messages i.e. functions intended
for address 0 are ignored, this allows the GD2000E to be included in existing
communications systems where broadcast messages may already be in use.

The MODBUS functions supported by the GD2000E allow reading of n-parameters,


writing of n-parameters, writing a single parameter and a loop-back communications
test. These correspond to the function numbers :
MODBUS Function
MODBUS Function Name GD2000E Application
Number.(dec.)
03 Read Multiple Holding Registers. Read from Multiple Drive Parameters.
04 Read Multiple Input Registers. Read from Multiple Drive Parameters.
06 Preset Single Holding Register. Write to Single Drive Parameter.
16 Preset Multiple Holding Registers. Write to Multiple Drive Parameters.
08 Sub-function 00 Loop-back Diagnostic Test. Loop-back diagnostic Test.

Page 8-16 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

Read Multiple Drive Parameters

Number of Total
Func
Drive 1st drive number of
tion CRC word
Addr parameter parameters
No.
to read to read
03 or H L H L H L
04 byte byte byte byte byte byte

Drive Response

Num- Number of Total


Func
Drive ber 1st drive number of
tion CRC word
Addr of parameter parameters
No.
bytes to read to read
03 or H L H L H L
04 byte byte byte byte byte byte

Write to a Single Drive Parameter

Func Drive
Drive Value to
tion parameter CRC word
Addr write
No. to write
H L H L H L
06
byte byte byte byte byte byte

Reply to write single parameter request

Func Drive
Drive Value to
tion parameter CRC word
Addr write
No. to write
H Lb H L H L
06
byte yte byte byte byte byte

Request to Write Multiple parameters

Number of
Func Number of No. Value to Value to
Drive 1st drive
tion parameters of write to 1st write to Nth CRC word
Addr parameter
No. to write bytes parameter parameter
to write
16 H L H Lb H L H L H L
(Dec) byte byte byte yte byte byte byte byte byte byte

Response to Multiple Parameter write

Number of
Func Number of
Drive 1st
tion parameters CRC word
Addr parameter
No. written
written to
H L H L H L
16
byte byte byte byte byte byte

Diagnostic Loopback request

Sub
Func
Drive Function
tion Data CRC word
Addr number
No.
0000
H L H L H L
08
byte byte byte byte byte byte

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-17

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

Loop-back Test Response

Sub
Drive Func
Function
Addr tion Data CRC word
number
No.
0000
H L H L H L
08
byte byte byte byte byte byte

Exception Message

Func
Drive Error
tion CRC word
Addr Code
No.
H L
01
byte byte

The MODBUS protocol is designed and described around data exchange between
PLCs. When used on a GD2000E the term ‘word’ becomes synonymous with drive
parameter. Hence, a MODBUS message intending to access word 110 is interpreted by
the GD2000E as a requirement to access drive parameter 110. The start of an RTU
frame is assumed to be the first character received after a gap in communications of at
least 3.5 character times, i.e. the time taken for 3.5 characters to be transmitted taking
into account baud rate, data word length, stop bits and parity selection.

For transfers of 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit and no parity, a character is transferred
approximately every 1 ms. Hence a 3.5 character gap equates to no characters being
sent for approximately 3.5 ms.

The end of a message frame is also indicated by a 3.5 character gap. That is, the last
character received before the communications gap occurred is assumed to be the last
character of the message.
Note: the message structures show that the function required defines the length
of message to be sent by the master device. If the GD2000E detects a end
of frame gap before the total expected message is received, message
processing is reset and the GD2000E starts to look for the next message
i.e. the received frame is flushed. The CRC word included at the end of
each message is generated in the same way as that generated for ESP
messages, i.e. the same algorithm is used.

8.5.11 Error Messages

If the GD2000E receives messages requiring an unsupported function or an attempt to


read/write more than 32 drive parameters, an exception message of error code 01, is
sent back by the drive. If a correctly addressed message is received with an incorrect
CRC word, the GD2000E flushes the message frame and increments the CRC count.

Page 8-18 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 8. Serial Communications

8.5.12 MODBUS ASCII

The difference between MODBUS ASCII and MODBUS RTU lies only in the way the
message is framed, the error checksum is generated and then how the message
content is represented. The start and end of the message are not time framed as with
RTU but, marked by specific start and end characters. The error word included at the
end of the message is generated using a Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) rather
than a CRC error word. Each byte of the message frame is represented by two ASCII
characters.

These differences are shown in the following examples :-

Read Multiple Drive Parameters in MODBUS ASCII


Drive Function Number of 1st drive Total number of
: LRC word CR LF
Address Number parameter to read parameters to read

Read Contents of Parameter 300 from address 1 request


3A 30 31 30 33 30 31 32 43 30 30 30 31 43 45 00 0A

8.5.13 GEM 80-16 and GEM 80-10 N-Bus Protocol.

The N-bus protocol used by GEM 80-16 and GEM 80-10 can be used to communicate
with GD2000E MODBUS, provided the GD2000E is addressed as a non C50, C100
subscriber.

Although N-bus is generally compatible with the MODBUS protocol used by GD2000E
there is a difference in the way N-Bus processes address information (GD2000E
parameter numbers) in messages. MODBUS changes addressing mode with the
message function (e.g. bit addressing for bit data word addressing for word data),
whereas N-bus starts all word addresses on a 16-bit boundary. This means that
GD2000E parameter numbers originating from GEM 80-16 will have a four bit offset
when included in the message frame.

Therefore, when using GD2000E within a GEM 80-16 network a GD2000E parameter
number should not be specified as a ‘word’ data type (i.e. it should not have the ‘W’
prefix when programmed from the GEM 80-16 system programmer).

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 8-19

Print Home
8. Serial Communications Alspa GD2000E

Page 8-20 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Installation

WARNING:

1) DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY


REMAIN FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN
DISCONNECTED FROM THE INPUT AC SUPPLY.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE DISCONNECTED AND THE UNIT ALLOWED TO


STAND WITHOUT POWER FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES BEFORE OPENING
THE HINGED FRONT PANEL OR COVERS.

2) HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT. EQUIPMENT GROUND MUST BE MADE


BEFORE CONNECTING THE A.C. SUPPLY. IT IS ALSO ESSENTIAL THAT THE
MOTOR IS GROUNDED.

Note: The Alspa GD2000E range of inverters has been designed to IEC
specifications using SI units. In this manual approximate values for inches,
lbs, h.p. are given here for convenience.

9.1 Introduction
This chapter contains installation information for drive models up to GD2207E series of
units and covers three frame sizes. The method of installing the drives is similar for all
the frame sizes but differs in detail. GD2104E to GD2207E differ from the other drives
in that the DC link inductor is fitted externally. This chapter is organised in four sections:
(1) General information which is common to all drives.
(2) Installation details for GD2005E, 2008E, 2012E and 2016E.
(3) Installation details for GD2032E, 2040E, 2052E and 2077E.
(4) Installation details for GD2104E, 2145E and 2207E.
(5) For GD2282E to GD21131E DELTA based modular drives see Appendix C.

9.2 General Information


9.2.1 Receipt of Equipment on Site

When the equipment arrives on site, unpack it carefully and inspect it for any sign of
damage. Check the complete consignment against the packing slip for any loss in
transit. If any damage or loss has occurred, contact CEGELEC immediately giving the
following details:
– A list of damaged or missing items.

– A description of damage.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-1

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

– The order number or packing slip details.

9.2.2 Identification of Drive Unit

Details of the type of drive unit, serial number, modification status and basic electrical
information are given on the identification label fixed to the right hand side of the unit.

9.2.3 Storage

If equipment delivered to site is not to be installed immediately:


– Re-pack it in its original packing material. If this is not possible it should be enclosed
in polythene sheet to protect it from the ingress of dust.
– Store it in a clean dry atmosphere, preferably at room temperature (The storage
temperature limits are -25o C to +70o C).

9.2.4 Environment

To ensure trouble-free operation with minimum maintenance, the installation site


should fulfil the following requirements:
– The atmosphere in which the drive is mounted must be clean and dust free, in
particular it must be free from corrosive vapours, water absorbent dusts and
conductive dusts.

However, the power device cooling system can use ‘dirty’ air providing it does not
contain corrosive, conductive, or explosive dusts or gasses. It can be easily
separated from the control cubicle internal air by ducting the intake and output to the
outside of the cubicle. As the cooling fans draw air through the power device cooling
path a negative pressure is developed, so a small amount of clean air from the
cubicle will constantly bleed into the dirty air duct and not vice versa. The air outlet
must be carefully sealed as it is at a higher pressure than the internal cubicle “clean”
air.
o o
– The ambient temperature should be in the range 0 C to 40 C, with no rapid
o
changes of temperature. At ambient temperatures above 40 C the continuous
output load current must be derated by 2% per oC up to a maximum of 50o C.
– The Relative Humidity should be in the range 5% to 95% (non condensing).

Where necessary, measures should be taken to prevent the ingress of metallic swarf
generated by process or maintenance activities. Where there is a risk of falling water, a
drip proof canopy should be mounted over the drive, to prevent water from entering the
drive.

Altitude.

The normal operating altitude for the unit is up to 1000 m (3,300 ft) above sea level.
Above this, the drive should be derated by 7.3% per 1000 m (3,300 ft) up to a
maximum of 2000 m (6,600 ft).

Page 9-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

9.2.5 Disposal Instructions

Some GD2000E drives contain power electronic devices which may contain beryllium
oxide ceramic. Under normal circumstances they are not hazardous. Do not grind or
cut open these devices. Unserviceable units or parts must be disposed of as hazardous
waste. Do not incinerate.

9.2.6 Torque Settings

All power terminals must be connected as described in the relevent installation


procedures and tightened to the correct torque loading, shown in the Table 9-1
Table 9-1 Tightening torques - power terminals

Drive Unit Power Connections Torque Terminal Material Conductor Size


GD2005E
GD2008E 1.2 Nm
M4 Screw Pin crimp CU 2.5 mm2
GD2012E (11 lb ins)
GD2016E
GD2032E 6.0 mm2
GD2040E 2.0 Nm 10 mm2
M5 stud Ring crimp CU
GD2052E (18 lb ins) 10 mm2
GD2077E 16 mm2
AC DC
2
GD2104E 35 mm 25 mm2
Ring crimp CU
35 Nm 2
GD2145E M10 bolt or Copper clad 50 mm 50 mm2
(310 lb ins)
aluminium
GD2207E 50 mm2 50 mm2
When P998 = 1
GD2104A471 35 mm2 25 mm2
Ring crimp CU
35 Nm
GD2145A471 M10 bolt or Copper clad 50 mm2 50 mm2
(310 lb ins)
aluminium
GD2207A471 50 mm2 50 mm2

9.3 Installation Details for GD2005E, 2008E, 2012E and 2016E


9.3.1 Special Tools and Equipment

A torque screwdriver is required.

9.3.2 Heat Loss from Unit

The maximum heat loss from the units are as follows:


– GD2005E - 81.5 W max.

– GD2008E - 121.0 W max.

– GD2012E - 191.0 W max.

– GD2016E - 250.0 W max.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-3

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

A more detailed account of the heat losses to the environment is given in Chapter 2
Table 2-1.

9.3.3 Acoustic Noise

The maximum acoustic noise output of the drive units is not more than 75 Db(A) for all
models.

9.3.4 Acoustic Noise at the Motor

Acoustic noise is generated at the motor as a consequence of the PWM switching of the
output power. The noise output and frequency depend on the PWM switching frequency
and the construction of the motor.

9.3.5 Radio Frequency Emissions

GD2005/8/12A451 are fitted with internal RF filtering and comply with the radio
frequency emission limits of EN50081-2, provided the installation instructions
regarding cable shielding and segregation contained in Para 9.3.11 are adhered to.
GD2005/8/12A421 and GD2016A421 do not contain RF filtering components.

9.3.6 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference

All GD2000E units are shielded from radio interference when the front panels are
closed. Care should be taken that no radio frequency transmissions (e.g. from portable
telephones) take place in the vicinity of the unit, when the front door is open and the
drive is powered up.

9.3.7 Cooling and Ventilation

The GD2000E units are air cooled. It is essential that adequate clearance to allow a
free flow of cooling air through the louvres at the top and bottom of the unit is
maintained at all times. Minimum clearances for ventilation are shown in Figure 9-1.

Page 9-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Figure 9-1 Space requirements

9.3.8 Access

Access to the front of the unit is required to operate the front panel controls. Clearance
to the front is required for the hinged front door which gives access to the User
terminations (see Figure 9-1).

9.3.9 Installing the Drive Unit

GD2000E units are suitable for either wall mounting or fitting in a panel, with suitable
ventilation.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-5

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

Mounting the Drive Unit on a Wall

Figure 9-2 Drilling dimensions

– Mark out the mounting centres to the dimensions shown in Figure 9-2.

– Drill and 4 holes for the 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws.

– Insert the two top screws and screw home leaving 6 to 8 mm (1/4" to 5/16") of the
screw from the wall.
– Lift the drive unit, position the two top keyhole slots on the drive unit over the
protruding screw heads and hang the unit on the two mounting screws.
– Insert the two lower 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws and tighten.

– Tighten the top two 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws.

Page 9-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

9.3.10 Electrical Connections

WARNING

THE DC+ AND DC- TERMINALS ON THE POWER TERMINAL BLOCK CARRY A
DANGEROUS DC VOLTAGE (UP TO 800 V).

Location of Electrical Connections

The power input and output connections are located on the power terminal block on
the filter and power board and the control connections are located on three terminal
blocks (TB6, TB7 and TB8) inside the unit. All connections are accessible when the
hinged front panel is opened.

The cables exit the drive unit through an aperture in the base of the drive. For panel
mounted drives, a cover plate is provided to protect the cables as they exit the unit. This
cover plate is fitted with grommets and does not provide any restraint for the cables.
The installer must provide adequate support for the cables.

A cable gland box is available for free mounted drive units which secures the cables
and prevents the ingress of dust and moisture. This unit covers the cable aperture and
is fixed with four screws as shown in Figure 9-3.

9.3.11 Torque Settings

All power terminals must be tightened to the correct torque loading, shown in Table 9-1

Figure 9-3 Cable gland box

Grounding

The drive frame must be connected to ground with a suitably rated cable, connected to
the ground ( ) terminal (M4 screw) on the drive.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-7

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

AC Input Power Supply Connections

Figure 9-4 Location of power connections

Connect the AC input power cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size) to the R, S and
T terminals (M3 screw terminals). See Figure 9-4

The main input supply to the GD2000E is not phase sensitive.

Connecting the Motor (GD2005/8/12A451)

To comply with with radio frequency requirements, the motor cable must be shielded or
steel wire armoured. The shield must be connected to both the motor frame and the
ground ( ) terminal of the drive. This is in addition to any separate ground connection
of the motor which may be required by local safety regulations.

Connecting the Motor (GD2005/8/12A421 and GD2016A421)

The motor frame must be connected to the ground ( ) terminal of the drive by a
suitably rated ground cable.

Connect the motor to the U, V and W terminals. See Figure 9-4. For normal forward
motor rotation the output follows the sequence U: V: W at the output terminals.

Page 9-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Control Connections

Figure 9-5 Location of control connections

The control connections are connected to terminal blocks TB6 and TB7 and the RS485
connections are connected to terminal block TB8. See Figure 9-5.

The terminal blocks TB6, TB7 and TB8 used for the low voltage are suitable for cable
sizes up to 2.5 mm2 (#14 awg).

Segregation

The control connections are, in general, low voltage and low current signals. This
makes them inherently susceptible to interference from electromagnetic noise
generated by power cabling. Therefore, in all applications, the control wiring should
not be run directly alongside power wiring. Ideally separate trunking should be used to
run control wires. If this is not possible, a separation of at least 300 mm (12") should be
maintained between the control wires and any power cables, wherever possible.

To minimise radio frequency emissions and interference input supply power cabling
should be routed separately from the output cabling to the motor.

9.4 Installation Details for GD2032E to 2077E


9.4.1 Special Tools and Equipment

A torque wrench is required.

9.4.2 Heat Loss from Unit

The maximum heat output of the units are as follows:


– GD2032E - 421 W.

– GD2040E - 550 W.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-9

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

– GD2052E - 723 W.

– GD2077E - 1047 W.

9.4.3 Acoustic Noise

The maximum acoustic noise output of the drive units is not more than 75 dB(A) for all
models.

9.4.4 Acoustic Noise at the Motor

Acoustic noise is generated at the motor as a consequence of the PWM switching of the
output power. The noise output and frequency depend on the PWM switching frequency
and the construction of the motor.

9.4.5 Radio Frequency Emissions

GD2032E to GD2077E do not contain RF filtering components. If an RF filter is used it


should be connected between the input fuses and the R S T terminals of the drive. To
ensure the effectiveness of the filter, the motor cable should be shielded or steel wire
armoured.

9.4.6 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference

All GD2000E units are shielded from radio interference when the front panels are
closed. Care should be taken that no radio frequency transmissions (e.g. from portable
telephones) take place in the vicinity of the unit, when the front door is open and the
drive is powered up.

9.4.7 Cooling and Ventilation

The GD2000E units are air cooled. It is essential that adequate clearance to allow a
free flow of cooling air through the louvres at the top and bottom of the unit is
maintained at all times. Minimum clearances for ventilation are shown in Figure 9-6.

Page 9-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Dimensions mm
Unit (inches)
A B D E F J K M P
GD2032E 370 407 350 53.5 294 20 282 330 580
GD2040E (14.6) (16.0) (13.8) (2.1) (11.6) (0.8) (11.1) (13.0) (22.8)
GD2052E 460 653 440 52.6 530 20 276 440 660
GD2077E (18.1) (25.7) (17.3) (2.1) (20.1) (0.8) (10.9) (17.3) (28.0)

Figure 9-6 Mounting dimensions (GD2032 to GD2077)

9.4.8 Access

Access to the front of the unit is required to operate the front panel controls. Clearance
to the front is required for the hinged front door which gives access to the user
terminations (see Figure 9-6).

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-11

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

9.4.9 Installing the Drive Unit

GD2000E units are suitable for either wall mounting or they may be fitted in a panel.

Mounting the Drive Unit on a Wall

WARNING:

THESE DRIVE UNITS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT INJURY SUITABLE


MECHANICAL LIFTING APPARATUS SHOULD BE USED.

– Mark out the mounting centres to the dimensions shown in Figure 9-6.

– Drill 4 holes for the 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws.

– Insert the two top screws and screw home leaving 6 to 8 mm (1/4" to 5/16") of the
screw protuding from the wall.
– Lift the drive unit, position the two top keyhole slots on the drive unit over the
protruding screw heads and hang the unit on the two mounting screws.
– Insert the two lower 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws and tighten.

– Tighten the top two 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws.

9.4.10 Electrical Connections

WARNING:

THE DC+ AND DC- TERMINALS ON THE POWER TERMINAL BLOCK CARRY A
DANGEROUS DC VOLTAGE (UP TO 800 V).

Location of Electrical Connections

The power input and output connection are located on the filter and power board
(GD2032E and GD2040E see Figure 9-7.) or on the terminal block (GD2052E and
GD2077E see Figure 9-8.). The control connections are located on three terminal
blocks (TB6, TB7 and TB8) inside the unit. All connections are accessible when the
hinged front panel is opened.

The cables exit the drive unit through an aperture in the base of the drive. For panel
mounted drives, a cover plate is provided to protect the cables as they exit the unit. This
cover plate is fitted with grommets and does not provide any restraint for the cables.
The installer must provide adequate support for the cables as they exit the unit to
prevent the cables being pulled loose from their terminations.

A cable gland box is available for free mounted drive units which provides cable
restraint and prevents the ingress of dust and moisture. This unit covers the cable
aperture and is fixed with four screws.

Page 9-12 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Torque Settings

All power terminals must be tightened to the correct torque loading, shown in the Table
9-1

Grounding

The drive frame must be connected to ground with a suitably rated cable, connected to
the ground ( ) terminal (M5 screw) on the drive.

AC Input Supply Connections (GD2032E and GD2040E)

Figure 9-7 Power connections for GD2032E and GD2040E

Power connections for GD2032E and GD2040E

Connect the AC input power cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size) to the R, S and
T terminals (M5 stud terminals). See Figure 9-7

The AC input supply to the GD2000E is not phase sensitive.

Connecting the Motor GD2032E and GD2040E

The motor frame must be connected to the ground ( ) terminal of the drive by a
suitably rated ground cable.

Connect the motor to the U, V and W terminals. See Figure 9-7. For normal forward
motor rotation the output follows the sequence U: V: W at the output terminals.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-13

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

Note: If the motor is not is not rated for inverter duty, or the motor cable is
non-standard or long, an Alspa GD LOM may have to fitted to the output
of the drive. See publication T1622 ‘Alspa GD LOM Technical Manual’
for details.

AC Input Power Supply Connections (GD2052E and GD2077E)

Figure 9-8 Power connections for GD2052E and GD2077E

Power connections for GD2052E and GD2077E

Connect the AC input power cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size) to the R, S and
T terminals on the power terminal block. (M5 terminals). See Figure 9-8

The AC input supply to the GD2000E is not phase sensitive.

Connecting the Motor GD2052E and GD2077E

The motor frame must be connected to the ground ( ) terminal of the drive by a
suitably rated ground cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size).

Connect the motor to the U, V and W terminals on the power terminal block. See
Figure 9-7. For normal forward motor rotation the output follows the sequence U: V: W
at the output terminals.

Page 9-14 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Note: If the motor is not is not rated for inverter duty, or the motor cable is
non-standard or long, an Alspa GD LOM may have to fitted to the output
of the drive. See publication T1622 ‘Alspa GD LOM Technical Manual’
for details.

Control Connections GD2032E to GD2077E

Figure 9-9 Control connections for GD2032E and GD2077E


Control connections for GD2032E and GD2077E

The control connections are connected to terminal blocks TB6 and TB7 and the RS485
connections are connected to terminal block TB8. See Figure 9-9 (GD2032E shown).

Terminal blocks TB6, TB7 and TB8 are suitable for cable sizes up to 2.5 mm2 (#14
awg).

Segregation

The control connections are, in general, low voltage and low current signals. This
makes them inherently susceptible to interference from electromagnetic noise
generated by power cabling. Therefore, in all applications, the control wiring should
not be run directly alongside power wiring. Ideally separate trunking should be used to
run control wires, if this not possible, a separation of at least 300 mm (12") should be
maintained between the control wires and any power cables, wherever possible.

To minimise radio frequency emissions and interference input supply power cabling
should be routed separately from the output cabling to the motor.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-15

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

9.5 Installation Details for GD2104E to GD2207E


GD2104E to GD2207E drives are provided with a separate DC link inductor, which
can be provided either as a loose item for mounting in a cubical, or it can be housed in
a reactor box which is fitted beneath the main drive unit. The reactor box can also be
supplied with optional line reactors. The installation sequence depends on the type of
DC link inductor used.

9.5.1 Special Tools and Equipment

A torque wrench is required.

9.5.2 Heat Loss from Unit

See Chapter 2 Table 2-0.

9.5.3 Acoustic Noise

The maximum acoustic noise output of the drive units is not more than 75 Db(A).

9.5.4 Acoustic Noise at the Motor

Acoustic noise is generated at the motor as a consequence of the PWM switching of the
output power. The noise output and frequency depend on the PWM switching frequency
and the construction of the motor.

9.5.5 Radio Frequency Emissions

GD2104E to GD2207E units do not contain RF filtering components. If an RF filter is


used it should be connected between the input fuses and the R S T terminals of the
drive. To ensure the effectiveness of the filter, the motor cable should be shielded or
steel wire armoured.

9.5.6 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference

All GD2000E units are shielded from radio interference when the front panels are
closed. Care should be taken that no radio frequency transmissions (e.g. from portable
telephones) take place in the vicinity of the unit, when the front door is open and the
drive is powered up.

9.5.7 Cooling and Ventilation

The GD2000E units are air cooled. It is essential that adequate clearance to allow a
free flow of cooling air through the louvres at the top and bottom of the unit is
maintained at all times. Minimum clearances for ventilation are shown in Figures 9-10
and 9-14.

9.5.8 Access

Access to the front of the unit is required to operate the front panel controls. Clearance
to the front is required for the hinged front door which gives access to the User
terminations (see Figure 9-10 and 9-14).

Page 9-16 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

9.5.9 Installing the Drive Unit with Separate DC Link Inductor

WARNING:

THESE DRIVE UNITS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT INJURY, SUITABLE


MECHANICAL LIFTING APPARATUS SHOULD BE USED.

Figure 9-10 - Mounting dimensions for GD2104E and GD2207E


Mounting dimensions for GD2104E and GD2207E

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-17

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

GD2000E units are suitable for either wall mounting or they may be fitted in a panel.

Mounting the Drive Unit

– Mark out the mounting centres to the dimensions shown in Figure 9-10.

– Drill 6 holes for the 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws.

– Insert the six mounting screws and screw home leaving 6 to 8 mm (1/4" to 5/16") of
each screw protuding from the wall.
– Lift the drive unit into position and hang the unit on the six mounting screws.

– Tighten the 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws evenly.

Page 9-18 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Installing the DC Link Inductor

Dimensions mm Weight
Ref. Unit (inches) kg
A B C D E F G H J K (lbs)
1.5 overload drives (P998 = 0)
114 60 234 114 190 227 40 9 19 240 31
33Z0324/10 GD2104E
(4.5) (2.4) (9.2) (4.5) (7.5) (8.9) (1.6) (0.4) (0.8) (9.4) (68)
114 60 234 133 209 247 40 9 19 240 35
33Z0325/10 GD2145E
(4.5) (2.4) (9.2) (5.2) (8.2) (9.7) (1.6) (0.4) (0.7) (9.4) (77)
165 60 286 140 216 270 41 13 24 285 65
33Z0326/10 GD2207E
(6.5) (2.4) (11.3) (5.5) (8.5) (10.8) (1.6) (0.5) (0.9) (11.2) (143)
1.1 Overload drives (P998 = 1)
286
165 60 116 160 223 38 13 24 280 40
50Z0028/01 GD2104E (11.25
(6.5) (2.36) (4.56) (6.3) (8.8) (1.5) (0.5) (0.95) (11.0) (88)
)
286
165 60 142 173 253 38 13 24 280 51
50Z0028/02 GD2145E (11.25
(6.5) (2.36) (5.6) (6.8) (10.0) (1.5) (0.5) (0.95) (11.0) (112)
)
286 273
165 60 161 216 38 13 24 280 57
50Z0028/03 GD2207E (11.25 (10.75
(6.5) (2.36) (6.34) (8.5) (1.5) (0.5) (0.95) (11.0) (125.4)
) )

Figure 9-11 DC link inductor - mounting dimensions

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-19

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

The DC link inductor is supplied as a loose item to be installed by the user.

Location

The DC link inductor must be located as close as possible to the main drive unit,
preferably directly below the drive. The DC power cable route should be kept as short
and direct as possible. The DC link inductor must be enclosed to prevent accidental
contact with live parts.

The mounting dimensions and weight of the DC Link inductor units is given in Figure
9-11.

Mechanical Installation

WARNING:

DC LINK INDUCTOR UNITS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT INJURY, SUITABLE


MECHANICAL LIFTING APPARATUS SHOULD BE USED.

Four slots for M8 (5/16") fixings are provided on each of three faces of the unit.

Refer to Figure 9-11 and mark out and drill four holes suitable for M8 (5/16") fixings.

Position the inductor unit on its mountings, using mechanical lifting gear, and secure
with four M8 (5/16") fixings.

Page 9-20 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

9.6 Electrical Connections GD2104E to GD2207E


WARNING

THE TERMINALS ON THE DC LINK INDUCTOR UNIT CARRY A DANGEROUS


DC VOLTAGE (UP TO 800 V). ENSURE THE DRIVE IS DISCONNECTED FROM
THE MAIN AC POWER SUPPLY AND THE DC LINK IS FULLY DISCHARGED
BEFORE WORKING ON THE DC LINK INDUCTOR UNIT

9.6.1 Location of Electrical Connections

Figure 9-12 Power connections for GD2104E to GD2207E


Power connections for GD2104E to GD2207E

The power input and output connections are located inside the drive as shown in
Figure 9 -12 and the control connections are located on three terminal blocks (TB6,
TB7 and TB8) on the user termination panel. All connections are accessible when the
hinged front panel is opened.

The cables exit the drive unit through an aperture in the base of the drive. For panel
mounted drives, a cover plate is provided to protect the cables as they exit the unit. This
cover plate is fitted with grommets and does not provide any restraint for the cables.
The installer must provide adequate support for the cables as they exit the unit to
prevent the cables being pulled loose from their terminations.

A cable gland box is available for free mounted drive units which provides cable
restraint and prevents the ingress of dust and moisture. This unit covers the cable
aperture and is fixed with four screws.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-21

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

Torque Settings

All power terminals must be tightened to the correct torque loading, shown in the
Table 9-1

9.6.2 Connecting the DC Link Inductor

The core of the DC link inductor must be properly grounded.

The DC link inductor connecting cables are not provided with the drive. Two
Connecting cables are to be manufactured by the installer, using suitable cable,
terminated with M10 (3/8") ring terminals at each end.
– Route the cables through the gland plate at the base of the drive unit and connect
the cables to the DC+ and RECT+ terminals on the drive unit.
– Connect the two cables to the two terminals on the DC link inductor using M10 (3/8")
bolts, nuts and washers. The polarity of the connections is not important.

Ground Connections

The drive frame must be connected to ground with a suitably rated cable.

AC Input Power Supply Connections

Connect the AC input power cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size) to the R, S and
T terminals (M10 (3.8") stud terminals). See Figure 9-12

The AC input supply to the GD2000E is not phase sensitive.

Connecting the Motor

The motor frame must be connected to the ground terminal ( ) of the drive with a
suitably rated cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size).

Connect the motor to the U, V and W terminals. See Figure 9-12. For normal forward
motor rotation the output follows the sequence U: V: W at the output terminals.

Note: If the motor is not is not rated for inverter duty, or the motor cable is
non-standard or long, an Alspa GD LOM may have to fitted to the output
of the drive. See publication T1622 ‘Alspa GD LOM Technical Manual’
for details.

Page 9-22 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

9.6.3 Control Connections

Figure 9-13 Control connections for GD2104E to GD2207E


Control connections for GD2104E to GD2207E

Segregation

The control connections are, in general, low voltage and low current signals. This
makes them inherently susceptible to interference from electromagnetic noise
generated by power cabling. Therefore, in all applications, the control wiring should
not be run directly alongside power wiring. Ideally separate trunking should be used to
run control wires, if this not possible, a separation of at least 300 mm (12") should be
maintained between the control wires and any power cables, wherever possible.

To minimise radio frequency emissions and interference input supply power cabling
should be routed separately from the output cabling to the motor.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-23

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

9.6.4 Installing the Drive Unit with Reactor Box

WARNING:

THESE DRIVE UNITS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT INJURY, SUITABLE


MECHANICAL LIFTING APPARATUS SHOULD BE USED.

Figure 9-14 Mounting dimensions for GD2104E to GD2207E


Mounting dimensions for GD2104E to GD2207E

Page 9-24 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

When using the reactor box the gland plate must be removed from the drive unit and
fixed in to position on the bottom of the reactor box. This allows cooling air to be dawn
through the reactor box by the drive unit fan.

GD2000E units are suitable for either wall mounting or they may be fitted in a panel.

Preparation

Prior to mounting the drive unit and reactor box, relocate the gland plate as follows:
– Unscrew the six screws holding the gland plate at the base of the drive unit and
remove the gland plate. The screws should be retained.
– Position the gland plate on the base of the reactor box and fix in position using the
original screws.

Mounting the Drive Unit and Reactor Box

– Mark out the mounting centres to the dimensions shown in Figure 9-14.

– Drill 10 holes for the 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws.

– Insert the ten mounting screws and screw home leaving 6 to 8 mm (1/8" to 5/16")
protuding from the wall.
– Lift the reactor into position and hang the unit on the four lower mounting screws.

– Tighten the four 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws evenly.

– Lift the drive unit into position and hang the unit on the six upper mounting screws.

– Locate the drive unit on to the lip of the reactor box so that the drive unit drops into
position on top of the reactor box.
– Tighten the six 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws evenly.

9.6.5 Electrical Connections

WARNING

THE DC+ AND DC- TERMINALS ON THE POWER TERMINAL BLOCK CARRY A
DANGEROUS DC VOLTAGE (UP TO 800 V).

Location of Electrical Connections

The power input and output connections are located inside the drive as shown in
Figure 9-15 and the control connections are located on three terminal blocks (TB6, TB7
and TB8) on the user termination panel. All connections are accessible when the hinged
front panel is opened.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-25

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

The cables exit the drive unit through an aperture in the base of the drive. For panel
mounted drives, a cover plate is provided to protect the cables as they exit the unit. This
cover plate is fitted with grommets and does not provide any restraint for the cables.
The installer must provide adequate support for the cables as they exit the unit to
prevent the cables being pulled loose from their terminations.

A cable gland box is available which secures the cables and prevents the ingress of dust
and moisture. This unit covers the cable aperture and is fixed with four screws.

Torque Settings

All power terminals must be tightened to the correct torque loading, shown in the
Table 9-1

9.6.6 Connecting the DC Link Inductor

Figure 9-15 - Power connections for GD2104E to GD2207E


Power connections for GD2104E to GD2207E

Ground Connections

The drive frame must be connected to ground with a suitably rated cable, connected to
the Ground terminal on the drive.

AC Input Power Supply Connections

Connect the AC input power cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size) to the R, S and
T terminals (M10 (3/8") stud terminals). See Figure 9-15

Page 9-26 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

The AC input supply to the GD2000E is not phase sensitive.

Connecting the Motor

The motor frame must be connected to the ground ( ) terminal of the drive by a
suitably rated ground cable (refer to Table 9-1 for conductor size).

Connect the motor to the U, V and W terminals. See Figure 9-15. For normal forward
motor rotation the output follows the sequence U: V: W at the output terminals.

Control Connections

Figure 9-16 Control connections for GD2104E to GD2207E


Control connections for GD2104E to GD2207E

The control connections are connected to terminal blocks TB6 and TB7 and the RS485
connections are connected to terminal block TB8. See Figure 9-16.

Terminal blocks TB6, TB7 and TB8 are suitable for cable sizes up to 2.5 mm2
(#14 awg).

Segregation

The control connections are, in general, low voltage and low current signals. This
makes them inherently susceptible to interference from electromagnetic noise
generated by power cabling. Therefore, in all applications, the control wiring should
not be run directly alongside power wiring. Ideally separate trunking should be used to
run control wires, if this not possible, a separation of at least 300 mm (12") should be
maintained between the control wires and any power cables, wherever possible.

To minimise radio frequency emissions and interference input supply power cabling
should be routed separately from the output cabling to the motor.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-27

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

Table 9-2 Control Connections

Terminal Name Function Remarks


1 SHIELD Shield ground
2 0V(A) Analog Common
Analog Input 1
3 REF1V Voltage Input Range = -10 V to +10 V
Impedance = 100 kΩ
Analog Input 1
4 REF1I Current Input Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Impedance = 50 Ω
Analog Input 2
5 REF2V Voltage Input Range = -10 V to +10 V
Impedance = 100 kΩ
Analog Input 2 Must be shielded
6 REF2I Current Input Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Impedance = 50 Ω
7 +REFSUPPLY +10 V Reference Supply for 10 kΩ Potentiometer
8 -REFSUPPLY -10 V Reference Supply for 10 kΩ Potentiometer
Analog Output 1
9 ANOUT1V Voltage Output Range = -10 V to +10 V
Max. Load = 5 mA
Analog Output 1
10 ANOUT1I Current Output Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Max. Load R = 500 Ω
Analog Output 2
11 ANOUT2V Voltage Output Range = -10 V to +10 V
Max. Load = 5 mA
Analog Output 2
12 ANOUT2I Current Output Range = -20 mA to +20 mA
Max. Load R = 500 Ω
Hardwire Plant Interlock
13 INTERLOCK
must be held active for drive to RUN
14 MTRIP Digital Input 1 Motor Thermostat Input
Digital Input 2 Stops drive if Terminal Block
15 STOP
Control selected.
+10 V to +50 V = Active
Digital Input 3 Run request input if Terminal O/C to +5 V = Inactive
16 RUN1
Block Control selected.
Digital Input 4 Run request input if Terminal
17 RUN2
Block control selected
Digital Input 5 Direction control pin for analog
18 DIRECTION
references
Digital Output 3 Open Collector Output for (GD2005E to 2016E only)
19 OCOP External Relay or 24 V Lamp. Max. Load = 50 Free Wheel Diode to +24 V
mA included in drive
+24 V Supply for logic inputs and external use.
20 +24 V
Max. Load = 500 mA.
21 0V(B) 0 V for +24 V external supply Do not confuse with 0V(A)
22 SHIELD Shield ground

Page 9-28 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 9. Installation

Table 9-3 Digital output connections (TB7)

Terminal Name Function Remarks


1 NO1 Normally Open contact of RELAY1
2 COMMON1 Common of RELAY 1
3 NC1 Normally Closed contact of RELAY1
4 NO2 Normally Open Contact of RELAY2
5 COMMON2 Common of RELAY2
6 NC2 Normally Closed Contact of RELAY2
7 NO3 Normally Open Contact of RELAY2
GD2032E and above
8 COMMON3 Common of RELAY3
only
9 NC3 Normally Closed Contact of RELAY3

Table 9-4 RS485 connections (TB8)

Terminal Name Function Remarks


1 SHIELD Shield ground
2 TX+ RS485 positive transmit line
3 TX- RS485 negative transmit line
Must be shielded
4 RX+ RS485 positive receive line
5 RX- RS485 negative receive line
GD2032E and above
6 SHIELD Shield ground
only

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 9-29

Print Home
9. Installation Alspa GD2000E

Page 9-30 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 10. Commissioning

Commissioning

WARNING:

(1) DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY


REMAIN FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN
DISCONNECTEDFROM THE AC INPUT SUPPLY.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE DISCONNECTED AND THE UNIT ALLOWED TO


STAND WITHOUT POWER FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES BEFORE OPENING
THE FRONT DOOR.

NOTE: ON DRIVES FITTED WITH A 12-PULSE UNIT OR THE REACTOR BOX IT


IS NOT NECESSARY TO GAIN ACCESS TO THESE ITEMS TO CARRY OUT
WORK ON THE MAIN DRIVE UNIT.

(2) THERE IS HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT. EQUIPMENT GROUND MUST BE


MADE BEFORE CONNECTING THE AC SUPPLY. IT IS ALSO ESSENTIAL THAT
THE MOTOR IS GROUNDED.

CAUTION:

High voltage test equipment can cause damage if applied directly to the
drive. Cables must be disconnected from the drive when carrying out high
voltage insulation tests.

10.1 Mechanical Checks


Check that:
– The drive unit has been installed in accordance with the instructions given in
Chapter 9.
– There is adequate clearance around the drive unit for ventilation, and that the
ventilation louvres are not covered or blocked.

10.2 Input Power Connections


Check the voltage of the 3-phase input supply is within the range specified in the
technical specification (Chapter 2).
– Ensure that the correct fuses are fitted.

– Ensure that all phases of the main input supply are present and within tolerance

– Ensure the drive is correctly grounded.

– Ensure that the 3-phase input supply is connected to terminals R, S & T.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 10-1

Print Home
10. Commissioning Alspa GD2000E

10.3 System Configuration (DELTA Based Drives Only)


Refer to Chapter 7 para 7.1.3 for further information on System Configuration for
DELTA based drives.
CAUTION:

Connecting the AC input supply to the output terminals U, V and W will


result in permanent damage to the drive.

– Ensure the motor is NOT connected at this stage.

– Apply power to the drive.

– The drive drive will trip with some or all of the the following faults:

Code 19 = New PIB


Code 20 = User Edits lost
Code 69 = Configuration trip

– Reset fault codes 19 and 20 (press the the and keys, on the front panel,
simultaneously or the key on the Enhanced Keypad). The Configuration trip will
not reset.
– Set P999 to the correct value for the drive see Tables 10-1, 10-2 and 10-3 at the end
of this chapter.
– Wait for the controller to save this value to non-voltaile memory (ie wait for the least
significant decimal point on the LED display to stop flashing).
– De-energise (Power off) the drive and wait until all LEDs are off.

The drive is now configured and commissioning may continue.

10.4 Energising the Drive (All drives)


CAUTION:

Connecting the AC input supply to the output terminals U, V and W will


result in permanent damage to the drive.

– Ensure the motor is NOT connected at this stage.

– Apply power to the drive.

– Check that the 4-digit display on front of drive displays for approximately
6 seconds and then displays .
– Check that the “HEALTHY” l.e.d. is illuminated.

– Check that the +24 V power supply on terminal block TB6 is within tolerance.

– Check that the +10 V and -10 V power supplies on terminal block TB6 are within
tolerance.

Page 10-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 10. Commissioning

10.5 Minimum Parameter Set Up


CAUTION

The procedure described below, returns all parameter settings to their


default values. Any customised settings will be lost. it is recommended that a
record is made of any customised parameter settings prior to carrying out
this procedure, so that these can be re-entered when required.

Check that drive parameters are set to the factory default setting as follows:
– Remove power from the drive and wait until all the l.e.d.s are off.

– Whilst pressing the , & buttons simultaneously, re-apply power to the drive.
To configure the drive parameters to the basic motor settings, adjust the following to
their correct values for the motor:
– P101 Motor Full Load Current
P102 Motor Base Voltage
P103 Motor Base Frequency
P106 Acceleration Rate
P108 Deceleration Rate
P110 Max. Frequency, Forward
P111 Max. Frequency, Reverse

10.6 Connecting the Motor


WARNING:

(1) DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY


REMAIN FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN
DISCONNECTEDFROM THE AC INPUT SUPPLY.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE DISCONNECTED AND THE UNIT ALLOWED TO


STAND WITHOUT POWER FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES BEFORE OPENING
THE FRONT DOOR.

(2) THERE IS HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT. EQUIPMENT GROUND MUST BE


MADE BEFORE CONNECTING THE AC SUPPLY. IT IS ALSO ESSENTIAL THAT
THE MOTOR IS GROUNDED.

– Isolate the drive and wait until all the l.e.d.s on the front panel are extinguished. This
may take several minutes.
– Remove the two retaining screws and open the front panel.

– Ensure the motor is connected to ground.

– Connect the motor to the U, V and W terminals on the drive, ensuring the three
phases are connected to give the correct direction of rotation at the motor.
– Close the front panel of the drive and secure it with the two retaining screws.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 10-3

Print Home
10. Commissioning Alspa GD2000E

10.7 Running the drive from Local Control


– Power up the drive.

– Set Parameter 1, (Frequency Reference) to 0.

– Press the START button.

– Check that the ‘RUNNING’ l.e.d. is lit.

– Using the key, slowly increase the value of parameter 1.


Note: The key increases speed in forward direction, or decreases speed in
reverse. The decreases speed in the forward direction, or increases
speed in reverse.
– Check that the motor speed is increasing. If the motor does not accelerate, it may be
necessary to increase the voltage boost (Parameters 114 and 115). If at any stage
the WARNING or TRIPPED l.e.d.s illuminate, check the cause and correct the fault
(see Chapter 11 Para 11.3).

10.8 Final Configuration


Now configure the drive to operate in its final operating mode. This is achieved by
setting some or all of the remaining drive parameters. See Chapter 7 for a detailed
description of all the drive functions that may be configured. It is recommended that
you keep a record of all the parameter settings.

Page 10-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 10. Commissioning

Table 10-1 DELTA Configuration Data (Single Bridge Drives)

Nominal Current Voltage Parameter 999


Combination Order Codes
Rating and Overload Grade Value
282 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD282-4501 101
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7000/10
385 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/300 102
1.1 O/L
377 A
DELTA EQUIPMENT = GDD377-4501 103
1.5 O/L
480 V SMPS = 30V7000/10
514 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/300 104
1.1 O/L
260 A
N/A N/A
1.5 O/L
354 A
N/A N/A
1.1 O/L
282 A
DELTA EQUIPMENT = GDD282-4501 105
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7100/10
385 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/300 106
1.1 O/L
377 A
DELTA EQUIPMENT = GDD377-4501 107
1.5 O/L
525 V SMPS = 30V7100/10
514 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/300 108
1.1 O/L
260 A
N/A N/A
1.5 O/L
354 A
N/A N/A
1.1 O/L
282 A
1.5 O/L
385 A
1.1 O/L
N/A N/A
377 A
1.5 O/L
690 V
514 A
1.1 O/L
300 A
DELTA EQUIPMENT = GDD300-4601 111
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7200/10
400 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/300 112
1.1 O/L

DELTA Configuration Data (Single Bridge Drives)

Note: Values P999 = 109 and 110 are reserved for future products. If these
numbers are entered they are equivalent to values 111 and 112
respectively.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 10-5

Print Home
10. Commissioning Alspa GD2000E

Table 10-2 DELTA Configuration Data (Dual Bridge Drives)

Nominal Current Voltage Parameter 999


Combination Order Codes
Rating and Overload Grade Value
564 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD282-4501 201
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7000/10
769 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/310 202
1.1 O/L
754 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD377-4501 203
1.5 O/L
480 V SMPS = 30V7000/10
1028 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/310 204
1.1 O/L
520 A
N/A N/A
1.5 O/L
780 A
N/A N/A
1.1 O/L
564 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD282-4501 205
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7100/10
769 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/310 206
1.1 O/L
754 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD377-4501 207
1.5 O/L
525 V SMPS = 30V7100/10
1028 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/310 208
1.1 O/L
520 A
N/A N/A
1.5 O/L
780 A
N/A N/A
1.1 O/L
564 A
1.5 O/L
769 A
1.1 O/L
N/A N/A
754 A
1.5 O/L
690 V
1028 A
1.1 O/L
600 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD300-4601 211
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7200/10
800 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/310 212
1.1 O/L

DELTA Configuration Data (Dual Bridge Drives)

Note: Values P999 = 209 and 210 are reserved for future products. If these
numbers are entered they are equivalent to values 211 and 212
respectively.

Page 10-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 10. Commissioning

Table 10-3 DELTA Configuration Data (Triple Bridge drives)

Nominal Current Voltage Parameter 999


Combination Order Codes
Rating and Overload Grade Value
846 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD282-4501 301
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7000/10
1155 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/320 302
1.1 O/L
1131 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD377-4501 303
1.5 O/L
480 V SMPS = 30V7000/10
1542 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/320 304
1.1 O/L
780 A
N/A N/A
1.5 O/L
1062 A
N/A N/A
1.1 O/L
846 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD282-4501 305
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7100/10
1155 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/320 306
1.1 O/L
1131 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD377-4501 307
1.5 O/L
525 V SMPS = 30V7100/10
1542 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/320 308
1.1 O/L
780 A
N/A N/A
1.5 O/L
1062 A
N/A N/A
1.1 O/L
846 A
1.5 O/L
1155 A
1.1 O/L
N/A N/A
1131 A
1.5 O/L
690 V
1542 A
1.1 O/L
900 A
DELTA Equipment = GDD300-4601 311
1.5 O/L
SMPS = 30V7200/10
1200 A GD2000E Controller = 30V4800/320 312
1.1 O/L

DELTA Configuration Data (Triple Bridge drives)

Note: Values P999 = 309 and 310 are reserved for future products. If these
numbers are entered they are equivalent to values 311 and 312
respectively.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 10-7

Print Home
10. Commissioning Alspa GD2000E

Page 10-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 11. Maintenance

Maintenance

WARNING:

(1) DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY


REMAIN FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN DISCONECTED
FROM THE AC INPUT SUPPLY.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE DISCONNECTED AND THE UNIT ALLOWED TO


STAND WITHOUT POWER FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES BEFORE OPENING
THE FRONT DOOR.

NOTE: ON DRIVES FITTED WITH A 12-PULSE UNIT OR REACTOR BOX, IT IS


NOT NECESSARY TO WORK ON THESE ITEMS WITH POWER APPLIED AND
WITH THE DOOR OPEN.

(2) THERE IS HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT. EQUIPMENT GROUND MUST BE


MADE BEFORE CONNECTING THE AC SUPPLY. IT IS ALSO ESSENTIAL THAT
THE MOTOR IS GROUNDED.

11.1 Preventive Maintenance


The Alspa GD2000E series of a.c. drives require minimum maintenance. The simple
maintenance routines which follow will ensure that the unit performs reliably for many
years.

11.1.1 Special Tools & Equipment

A torque screwdriver or torque wrench, as applicable, is required for the maintenance


of GD2000E.

11.1.2 Maintenance Schedules

Monthly

The following checks should be carried out at monthly intervals:


– Ensure all ventilation louvres are unobstructed.

– Examine the input and output power terminations for signs of overheating.

Six Monthly

– Perform monthly checks as detailed above.

– Check all terminations are secure.

– Remove any accumulated dust from the equipment, using a suction type cleaner with
a non-conducting nozzle.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 11-1

Print Home
11. Maintenance Alspa GD2000E

11.2 Component Replacement


There are no user-maintainable components within the drive. If the drive is suspected to
be faulty, please contact your local authorised CEGELEC dealer.

11.3 Fault-Finding
11.3.1 Fault Indication

When a fault condition arises this is indicated on the front panel of the drive, by either
the WARNING l.e.d. or the TRIP l.e.d. illuminating and the HEALTHY l.e.d being
extinguished.

11.4 Warnings
When the WARNING l.e.d. on the front panel is lit it indicates that a fault has occurred
which has not caused the drive to trip but requires correction by the operator. Each time
a warning condition occurs a fault code is placed in the Warning record, parameters
50 to 59, which may be read back by the operator.

11.4.1 Action in the Event of a Warning

The drive stores warning fault codes in parameters 50 to 59. In the event of a warning:
– Use the front panel controls to select parameter 50 and note the warning code.

– In turn select parameters 51 to 59 and record any additional warning codes which
may be present.
– Check the meaning of each warning code using Table 11-1 and take appropriate
corrective action.

11.5 Trips
When the TRIP l.e.d. is lit this indicates that a serious fault has occurred which has
caused the drive to be shut down. Each time a trip occurs a fault code is placed in
parameters 60 to 69 and the warnings in parameters 50 to 59 are frozen, to record
any warnings which may have occurred prior to the trip.

The trips fault codes contained in Parameters 60 to 69 are in only approximate


chronological order, Parameter 60 containing the most recent fault code.

System Trips and Non-Resettable Trips

Most trips which occur can be reset when the fault has been cleared. Trips 17, 18, 19
and 20 however are classified as ‘system’ trips. Of these trips 19 and 20 are resettable
and trips 17 and 18 are not resettable. To reset trip 19 or 20 the trip fault code must be
interrogated before performing a reset. In the unlikely event of a non-resettable trip
occurring, make a note of the fault code and contact the Customer Support Unit at
CEGELEC.

Page 11-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 11. Maintenance

11.5.1 Action in the Event of a Trip

When a trip occurs, the drive is disabled and the TRIP l.e.d. is lit. The last trip fault code
is stored in Parameter 60. In the event of a trip:
– Use the front panel controls to select parameter 60 and record the fault code.

– In turn select Parameters 61 to 69 and record any additional trip fault codes which
may be present.
– Check the meaning of each trip fault code present using the Table 11-2 and take
corrective action.

11.5.2 Resetting Trips

Resettable Trips

Resettable trips can be reset by issuing a RUN command fom the selected control
source. Trip reset occurs on the rising edge of the RUN signal. This resets all the
resettable trips excluding the System trips (see Table 11-2).

Resetting System Trips

System trips must be reset manually using the front panel controls as follows:

– Press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously, while a parameter in the range
60 to 69 (either number or value) is displayed.

11.5.3 Remote Trip Reset

(Issue 0.22 Firmware onwards)

All resettable trips can be reset by a rising edge on the RUN1 or RUN2 digital inputs.
This feature allows the resettable trips to be reset from a remote location, without
issuing a Run command.

Trip reset request on the RUN1and RUN2 digital inputs is enabled at all times whether
or not ‘digital inputs’ is selected as the control source.

The Trip reset facility is disabled on the RUN2 digital input if any of the reference or
control modes, which use RUN2 (fixed speed menu, remote control selection etc. . .) are
selected.

11.5.4 Auto Reset

Many of the trip conditions which can occur can be configured to reset automatically.
Used in conjunction with the automatic restarting this allows the drive to be configured
to ride through transient faults. Trips configured to auto-reset are also reset when a
RUN request is made either from the front panel RUN button or from the digital
inputs (terminal block TB6). The method of configuring the drive to auto-restart is
described in Chapter 7 Para 7.5.8.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 11-3

Print Home
11. Maintenance Alspa GD2000E

11.5.5 Fatal Errors

A fatal error occurs when an internal fault in the drive makes safe operation impossible.
When a fatal error occurs, the drive is disabled by hardware circuits and an error code
E000, E001 or E002 is displayed on the 4-digit display. The l.e.d. indicators may be lit
randomly.

In the event of a fatal error occurring:


– Make a note of the error code displayed on the 4-digit display.

– Isolate the drive.

– Contact the Customer Support Unit at CEGELEC.

11.5.6 Trip History

Read only Parameters 540 to 549 are used to maintain a record of the fault codes of
the last ten trips. The trips are recorded in reverse chronological order, Parameter 540
containing the most recent trip fault code and Parameter 549 the oldest. This feature is
useful in identifying a trend in drive trips.

Parameter 540 - Last Trip

Contains the fault code of the most recent trip.

Parameters 541 to 549 - Previous Trips

Contain the fault codes of the nine previous trip, in reverse chronological order, with
1 ms resolution in the determination of the order.

11.6 History log


The History log is a user defined record of the performance of the drive over a period
of time. The method of setting up a history record is described in Chapter 7 Para 7.9.

11.6.1 Playing Back the History log.

To read a sample from the History log:

Set the sample number required in Parameter 500. (The sample number applies to all
ten history channels.)

Select the required history channel and read the value. (The meaning of this value will
depend on how the History log is configured.)

To read other samples in the selected history channel record, press the MODE key then
the UP or DOWN keys to scroll through all the values in the record.

Page 11-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 11. Maintenance

Relevant Parameters are:

Parameter 500 - History Display Sample Number

Contains the sample which is displayed when when the History log (Parameter 501 to
510) is interrogated. Allowed values are:
0 to 99 (sample number)
This sample number can be set by selecting and writing to Parameter 500 in the usual
way or it can be incremented and decremented by operating the UP and DOWN
arrow keys while a history record is displayed. This provides a convenient method of
scrolling through all the samples in a record.

Parameter 501 - History Channel 1 Playback Data


Parameter 502 - History Channel 2 Playback Data
Parameter 503 - History Channel 3 Playback Data
Parameter 504 - History Channel 4 Playback Data
Parameter 505 - History Channel 5 Playback Data
Parameter 506 - History Channel 6 Playback Data
Parameter 507 - History Channel 7 Playback Data
Parameter 508 - History Channel 8 Playback Data
Parameter 509 - History Channel 9 Playback Data
Parameter 510 - History Channel 10 Playback Data

These parameters each contain up to 100 samples of history data. When a history
channel is interrogated, the sample number displayed is determined by the value in
Parameter 500. If no data is recorded in the selected sample, the pattern “——” is
displayed.

The meaning of the data display for each sample is determined by the configuration
defined in Parameters 511 to 531.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 11-5

Print Home
11. Maintenance Alspa GD2000E

11.7 Warning Error Codes


Table 11-1 Warning error codes

Fault
Warning Name Description
Code
The drive output current is greater than the continuous
100 Excessive Current rating, if this condition persists the drive will TRIP due to a
Timed Overcurrent
The motor thermostat input (DIGITAL INPUT 1) is low. This
101 Motor Thermostat
can only occur if Parameter 182 is set to option 1.
This indicates that the motor has reached the I2T Warning
2
102 Motor I T condition set in Parameter 454. The motor may overheat
or the drive may trip if this warning is ignored.
Indicates that the output current has exceeded the limits of
the Load Fault envelope set in parameters 600 to 619
103 High Current Load Fault
inclusive. If the load does not reduce, the drive may trip,
depending on the setting of Parameter 601.
This indicates that the output current has fallen below the
Load fault envelope defined in Parameters 600 to 619
104 Low Current Load Fault
inclusive. If the load does not increase, the drive may trip,
depending on setting of Parameter 601.
This indicates that the Principle Reference Source, selected
105 Principle Reference Lost
by Parameter 12, has failed.
This indicates that the Principle Control Source, selected
106 Principle Control Source Lost
by Parameter 11, has failed.
The temperature of the control electronics is at or higher
107 High Temperature than 65 oC. The drive will trip due to over-temperature at
80 oC if no action is taken.
The temperature of the control electronics is at or below 0
108 Low Temperature o
C. The drive will trip if the temperature is less than -10 oC
The backup reference source has failed. The drive will trip
109 Backup Control Source unhealthy
if the principle control source is lost.
The Backup reference source has failed. The drive will trip
110 Backup Reference Source unhealthy
if the principle reference source is lost.
The drive output voltage is less than 90% of the required
motor voltage for the requested running frequency. This
111 Low Motor Volts
Warning only occurs if Parameter 473 is set to option 1 or
3.
Indicate that the drive has detected a problem within its
200 own software. The drive will continue to operate as
201 Internal Software Fault normal. To clear this warning, switch OFF the input power
202 supply and wait until the led indicators on the front panel
are extinguished, then switch ON the input power supply.

Page 11-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 11. Maintenance

11.8 Trip Error Codes


Table 11-2 Trip error codes

A = Auto resetable trip


R = Manually resetable trip
S = System trip
N = Non-resetable trip
Fault
Name Class Description
Code
1 Interlock A.R The INTERLOCK input signal is not present.
The Primary Reference source, and the Backup Reference
2 Reference Loss A.R
source have both failed (or no backup was configured).
The internal DC voltage of the drive has risen above the
3 Overvolts A.R
maximum value.
The internal DC voltage of the drive has fallen below the
4 Undervolts A.R
minimum value.
5 Overload A.R The timed overcurrent limit of the drive has been exceeded.
The internal temperature of the drive has exceeded the
6 Over temp A.R
maximum safe value.
The drive current has exceeded its instantaneous absolute
7 Overcurrent A.R
maximum.
8 U Upper transistor A.R
9 U Lower transistor A.R
10 V Upper transistor A.R
Output IGBT has been disabled by its self protection.
11 V Lower transistor A.R
12 W Upper transistor A.R
13 W Lower transistor A.R
The output currents of the three phases are severely
14 Current imbalance R
imbalanced.
15 Internal low voltage supply R The low voltage supply within the drive has failed.
The 24 V user supply output on TB6/20 has failed, or has
16 User supply R
been overloaded.
The power interface board connected to the control board
17 Wrong Power Interface board N.S
cannot be recognized.
Data that is critical to the satisfactory operation of the drive
18 Critical data loss N.S
has been lost.
the Power Interface Board (or Control Board) has been
19 New Power Interface Board S changed and all Parameters have returned to their factory
default values.
The drive has lost the user edited Parameter table, or the
20 Parameter edits lost S stored History record. All parameters have returned to their
factory default values.
The motor has exceeded its operating temperature.
21 Motor Thermostat A.R Parameter 182 must be configured to Trip (option 2) for
this to occur.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 11-7

Print Home
11. Maintenance Alspa GD2000E

Table 11-2 Trip error codes (continued)

Fault
Name Class Description
Code
The motor I2T limit has been exceeded, Parameter 454
22 Motor I2T A.R
must be configured to Trip (option 2) for this to occur.
The Primary Control source and the backup control source
23 Control source A.R
have both failed (or no backup was configured).
The motor current has been below the minimum allowed
24 Low current load fault A.R threshold for greater than the allowed time and Parameter
601 has been configured to trip in this event.
The motor current has been above the maximum allowed
25 High current load fault A.R threshold for the greater than the allowed time and
Parameter 601 has been configured to trip in this event.
The internal temperature of the drive has fallen below the
26 Under temperature A.R
minimum allowed operating temperature.
The keypad (Enhanced Programming Unit) has been
27 Keypad loss A.R disconnected without proper authorisation. Parameter 469
must be set to option 0 for this to occur.
The drive output voltage is less than 90% of the required
motor voltage for the requested operating frequency.
28 Low motor volts A.R
Parameter 473 must be configure to option 2 for this to
occur.
33 Hardware over-temperature AR.
34 U-phase power supply
Output bridge 1 gate drive SMPS failure
35 V-phase power supply A.R.
Applies to GD2104E and above.
36 W-phase power supply
38 Bridge 2 U Upper transistor A.R
39 Bridge 2 U Lower transistor A.R
40 Bridge 2 V Upper transistor A.R Output IGBT has been disabled by its self protection.
41 Bridge 2 V Lower transistor A.R Delta drives GD2564E and GD2754E only.
42 Bridge 2 W Upper transistor A.R
43 Bridge 2 W Lower transistor A.R
44 U-phase power supply
Output bridge 2 gate drive SMPS failure
45 V-phase power supply A.R.
Applies to GD2564E and above.
46 W-phase power supply
48 Bridge 3 U Upper transistor A.R
49 Bridge 3 U Lower transistor A.R
50 Bridge 3 V Upper transistor A.R Output IGBT has been disabled by its self protection.
51 Bridge 3 V Lower transistor A.R Delta drives GD2846E and above.
52 Bridge 3 W Upper transistor A.R
53 Bridge 3 W Lower transistor A.R
54 U-phase power supply
Output bridge 3 gate drive SMPS failure
55 V-phase power supply A.R.
Applies to GD2846E and above.
56 W-phase power supply
57 Overspeed R The speed limit has been exceeded
The System has not been configured (i.e. the configuration
69 System Configuration S
value in P999 is set at 0). Applies to Mk2 DELTA drives only.

Page 11-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 12. Ordering Information

Ordering Codes

12.1 Main equipment

GD2000E Drive Units - 6-Pulse RFI Suppressed

Order Code Remarks


GD2005A451 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 5 amps
GD2008A451 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 8 amps
GD2012A451 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 12 amps

GD2000E Drive Units - 6-Pulse Drives

Order Code Remarks


GD2005A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 5 amps
GD2008A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 8 amps
GD2012A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 12 amps
GD2016A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 16 amps
GD2032A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 32 amps
GD2040A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 40 amps
GD2052A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 52 amps
GD2077A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 77 amps
GD2104A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 104 amps
GD2145A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 145 amps
GD2207A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 207 amps

GD2104A471 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 145 amps, 1.1 O/L


or 104 amps, 1.5 O/L.
GD2145A471 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 200 amps, 1.1 O/L
or 145 amps, 1.5 O/L.
GD2207A471 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 250 amps, 1.1 O/L
or 207 amps, 1.5 O/L.

33Z0324/10 Loose DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2104E


33Z0325/10 Loose DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2145E
33Z0326/10 Loose DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2207E
50Z0028/01 Loose DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2104A471

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 12-1

Print Home
12. Ordering Information Alspa GD2000E

50Z0028/02 Loose DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2145 A471


50Z0028/03 Loose DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2207 A471

30V6100/60 Boxed DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2104E


30V6100/40 Boxed DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2145E
30V6100/20 Boxed DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2207E

30V6100/70 Boxed DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2104A471


30V6100/80 Boxed DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2145A471
30V6100/90 Boxed DC Link Choke for Alspa GD2207A471

GD2000E 12-Pulse Drives

Order Code Remarks


GD2104C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 104 amps
GD2145C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 145 amps
GD2207C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 207 amps

12-Pulse Extension Units

Order Code Remarks


30V6200/60 12-pulse extension unit for GD2104A471
30V6200/50 12-pulse extension unit for GD2145A471
30V6200/40 12-pulse extension unit for GD2207A471

12.2 Optional Equipment


Order Code Remarks
10Z1605/10 Loose input line reactor for Alspa GD2104E
10Z1588/10 Loose input line reactor for Alspa GD2145E
10Z1588/10 Loose input line reactor for Alspa GD2207E

50Y8658/01 Protective Hood for GD2008E to GD2016E


50Y8658/02 Protective Tray for GD2008E to GD2016E
50Y8659/01 Protective Hood for GD2032E to GD2040E
50Y8659/02 Protective Tray for GD2032E to GD2040E
50Y8660/01 Protective Hood for GD2052E to GD2077E
50Y8660/02 Protective Tray for GD2052E to GD2077E
50Y8661/01 Protective Hood for GD2104E to GD2207E
50Y8661/02 Protective Tray for GD2104E to GD2207E

Page 12-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 12. Ordering Information

Order Code Remarks


GDLOM145-4001 Line Output Module for GD2104E
GDLOM145-4001 Line Output Module for GD2145E
GDLOM207-4001 Line Output Module for GD2207E
GDB400-4001 Dynamic Braking Unit rated at 400 amps
DS1003-4001 Keypad - Mounts on front panel of the drive unit
GDS1009-4001 Remote Keypad Cable (3 metres). The cable is fitted
with 9-way D-Type connectors and connects to the
RS232 port on the front of the Alspa GD2000E.

GD2000E Modular Drives - 6-Pulse (see Appendix C)

Order Code Remarks


GD2282A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 282 amps
GD2377A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 377 amps
GD2564A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 564 amps
GD2754A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 754 amps
GD2846A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 846 amps
GD21131A421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 1131 amps

GD2000E Modular Drives - 12-Pulse (see Appendix C)

Order Code Remarks


GD2282C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 282 amps
GD2377C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 377 amps
GD2564C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 564 amps
GD2754C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 754 amps
GD2846C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 846 amps
GD21131C421 Alspa GD2000E inverter rated at 1131 amps

12.3 Optional Equipment


10Z1633/30 Input Line Reactor for non RFI suppressed GD2008E
10Z1633/30 Input Line Reactor for non RFI suppressed GD2012E
10Z1633/30 Input Line Reactor for GD2016E
10Z1633/20 Input Line Reactor for GD2032E
10Z1633/20 Input Line Reactor for GD2040E
10Z1633/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2052E
10Z1605/30 Input Line Reactor for GD2077E
10Z1605/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2104E
10Z1588/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2145E
10Z1588/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2207E

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 12-3

Print Home
12. Ordering Information Alspa GD2000E

33Z0344/10 Input Line Reactor for DC Choke Box for


GD2104E/GD2145E/GD2207E
31V5400/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2282E (DELTA Cubed)
31V5500/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2377E (DELTA Cubed)
30V6500/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2564E (DELTA Boxed)
30V6700/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2754E (DELTA Boxed)
30V6500/10 Input Line Reactor for GD2846E (DELTA Boxed) *
30V6500/10 Input Line Reactor for GD21131E (DELTA Boxed) *

Note: If using the wall mounted DC Link Chokes (rather than loose ones) for
Alspa GD2104E, 2145E or 2207E you must use Input Line Reactor
33Z0344/10.
* 2 off reactors required for GD2846E and GD21131E.

GDLOM008-4001 Line Output Module for GD2008E


GDLOM016-4001 Line Output Module for GD2012E
GDLOM016-4001 Line Output Module for GD2016E
GDLOM032-4001 Line Output Module for GD2032E
GDLOM052-4001 Line Output Module for GD2040E
GDLOM052-4001 Line Output Module for GD2052E
GDLOM080-4001 Line Output Module for GD2077E
GDLOM145-4001 Line Output Module for GD2104E
GDLOM145-4001 Line Output Module for GD2145E
GDLOM207-4001 Line Output Module for GD2207E
GDLOM282-4001 Line Output Module for GD2282E
GDLOM377-4001 Line Output Module for GD2377E
GDLOM754-4001 Line Output Module for GD2564E
GDLOM754-4001 Line Output Module for GD2754E
GDLOM1131-4001 Line Output Module for GD2846E
GDLOM1131-4001 Line Output Module for GD21131E

Note: Line Output Modules up to GDL0M207-4001 incorporate an output line


reactor. Modules GDL0M282-4001 to GDL0M1131-4001 operate in
conjunction with the main inverter output sharing reactors.

GDB025-4001 Dynamic Braking Unit rated at 20 amps


GDB400-4001 Dynamic Braking Unit rated at 400 amps
GDS1003-4001 Keypad - Mounts on front panel of the drive unit
GDS1009-4001 Remote Keypad Cable (3 Metres). The cable is fitted
with 9-way D-Type connectors and connects to the
RS232 port on the front panel of the Alspa GD2000E.
30V2700/10 Cable gland box for GD2008E and GD2016E
30V2900/10 Cable gland box for GD2032E to GD2077E

Page 12-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E 12. Ordering Information

12.4 Spares
Please contact your local authorised CEGELEC dealer for spares requirements.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page 12-5

Print Home
12. Ordering Information Alspa GD2000E

Page 12-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

Alspa GD2000E Enhanced Keypad

A1 Introduction
The optional Enhanced Keypad provides improved control and programming facilities
for the GD2000E series of a.c. drives. It can either be mounted directly on the front of
the drive unit, covering the existing controls, or it can be mounted in a remote location.
This remote mounting feature is particularly convenient when GD2000E units are
mounted in a panel. The enhanced keypad is then usually mounted in the front panel
door.

The programming and control functions available with the enhanced keypad are the
same as for the drive front panel controls, but it is more user friendly way. The 2-line
l.c.d provides full English language text information about the parameter functions and
values as they are selected.

A2 Description

Figure A-1 - Enhanced keypad layout

The enhanced keypad is a small moulded unit with a ‘super-twist’ liquid crystal display
(l.c.d.) and a membrane keypad containing nineteen programming keys, four drive
control keys and 5 light emitting diode (l.e.d.) indicators. A 9-way D-type connector at
rear of the keypad connects directly to the RS232 port connector on the front panel of a
GD2000E drive, or the keypad can be mounted in a remote location using an
extension cable, available as an option. The general appearance of the unit is shown in
Figure A-1. Power for the keypad is derived from the 9-way D-type connector. The
keypad is active when it is connected to the drive unit.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-1

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

A3 Specification

A3.1 Display

The 2-line by 24 column ‘super-twist’ l.c.d. is, capable of displaying a full


alphanumeric character set.

A3.2 Keypad

This is a sealed membrane type keypad with 23 keys with four drive control keys and
19 Programming Keys

A3.3 LED Indicators

Five l.e.d. indicators provide status information as follows:

HEALTHY : green
RUNNING : green
KEYPAD CONTROL : green
WARNING : yellow
TRIPPED : red

A3.4 Power Consumption

Power Consumption : negligible.


(from the drive SMPS)

A3.5 Dimensions

Width : 180 mm (7.1").


Height : 124 mm (4.9").
Depth : 15 mm (0.6").

A4 Environmental Conditions
Storage temperature : -25 oC to +70 oC
Operating temperature : 0 oC to 50 oC (external case temperature)

Note: The l.c.d. may blacken at temperatures above 50 oC.

Heat Output : Negligible.


Relative Humidity : 5% to 95% non-condensing
IP rating : IP65 (NEMA 4) when sealed on facia.
Maximum Operating : 2000 metres
Altitude
RFI susceptibility : Screened against RFI.

Page A-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

A5 Extension Cable (optional)


Length : 3 m (9’-10").

A6 Operating Instructions

A6.1 Control Keys

There are four control keys: STOP , START , INCREASE , and DECREASE
. These are used to stop and start the drive and control the output frequency from
the keypad. These keys act directly on the drive output without any reference to
parameter settings.

A6.2 The STOP and START Keys

These keys control the stop/start state of the drive when the keypad is specified as the
control source. They directly replace STOP and START keys on the GD2000E front
panel. To activate these controls the Control source, Parameter 11, must be set to
‘Local’.

The STOP key is red. When pressed it issues a stop command to the drive
(provided the drive is configured for local control). On receipt of a stop command the
drive takes action to bring the drive to rest (defined by the Stop mode - Parameter 14)
and disables the output to the drive. In the stopped state the following conditions apply:
– The supply input and the DC Link remain ‘live’.

– When the motor has been brought to a halt the RUNNING l.e.d. is extinguished.

– The History log continues to record.

The START key is green. When pressed it issues a RUN command to the drive. On
receipt of a RUN command the drive takes action to start the motor (defined by the
Start mode set in Parameter 13). Additionally the following conditions apply:
– The output bridge is enabled.

– When the drive is running, the ‘RUNNING’ l.e.d. is lit.

– The History log continues to record except, on the first RUN command after the drive
is energised, or whena a trip occurs. In this case the History log is cleared and a new
History log is started.

A6.3 The INCREASE and DECREASE keys


These keys are used to control the output frequency of the drive. To activate these keys
the frequency reference source Parameter 12 must be configured to either, ‘Local
Reference’, or ‘As Control’ (with the control source, Parameter 11, set to ‘Local’).

The INCREASE key increases the output frequency and the DECREASE key
decreases the output frequency.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-3

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

A6.4 Alphanumeric Keys

The alphanumeric keypad contains 19 keys as shown these are:

Eleven dual function numeric/alphabet keys, which depending on context, generate


numbers 0 to 9 or ten alphabetical characters and the decimal point. Of the
alphabetical characters, only the ‘P’ key is used on GD2000E.

- Switches to the previous higher display level.

- Switches from parameter display to edit mode and back again.

- Increments parameter numbers or values.

- Decrements parameter numbers or values.

- Displays further information.

- Changes sign of a numerical value.

- Backspace/deletes characters when in editing mode. Attempts a trip reset when in


display mode.

- Enter is used to confirm parameter number and numeric values entered.

A6.5 LED Indicators

The l.e.d. indicators on the keypad indicate the following:


- Illuminates green when the drive and all control inputs are in a
healthy condition.
- Illuminates green when the control source, Parameter 11, is set to
‘Local’, indicating that drive can be stopped and started using the
keypad STOP and START keys.
Note: The KEYPAD CONTROL l.e.d. does not indicate the status of the
INCREASE/DECREASE frequency reference control keys when the principal
reference source is set to ‘Local Reference’. The preferred reference
source should be ‘As Control’. With this setting the KEYPAD CONTROL
l.e.d. indicates the availability of STOP/START and frequency reference
control from the keypad.
- Illuminates green when the drive is running.
- Illuminates yellow when the drive has a fault which will cause the
drive to trip if it is not rectified.
- Flashes red when the drive has tripped.

Page A-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

A6.6 Display Format

The 2-line by 24 column liquid crystal display, can display a full alphanumeric
character set.

Initial Conditions

When the keypad is connected to the drive it will display the parameter which was
displayed when it was last disconnected.

Default Display

The keypad displays the default display either when ESC is


pressed when in Parameter display mode, or when a new keypad is first installed.

A6.7 Displaying a Parameter Using the Up and Down Arrow Keys

The parameter which is displayed can be changed either by using the up/down keys or
by entering a new parameter number.

With a parameter number displayed:


– Press the UP key to increment or
the down key to decrement the
displayed parameter number.
The up and down keys auto-repeat at
an accelerating rate.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-5

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

A6.8 Changing the Displayed Parameter Using the Numeric Keys.

With a parameter number in display


mode:
– Press the ‘P’ key followed by the
required parameter number. Then
press enter.

The keying sequence and display is


shown opposite.

A6.9 Displaying Further Information about a Parameter

To display further information:

select the required parameter in


display mode.

Press the ? key to display additional


information about the parameter
and it’s use.

Press the ? key repeatedly to step


through the lines of information,
until the message ‘Information Ends’
is displayed. Further use of the ? key
returns to the first item of
information.

Note: If there is a Warning in existence (i.e. the WARNING l.e.d. is lit) when the
? key is pressed, a menu will be displayed, see Para A6.18. Press ‘1’ to
continue displaying further information.

The information lines display the following information where appropriate:


– Maximum and Minimum values

– Meaning of state parameter values

– Stop-to-Edit

– State Variable

– Engineering Parameter

Page A-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

– Information Ends

A6.10 Editing a Parameter - Direct Numeric Entry

Select the required parameter.

Press MODE.

Enter the new value and press ENTER.

Press MODE or ESC to return to


parameter display mode.

If an invalid value is entered (this can


occur if editing a list parameter) an
error message is displayed, see
Keypad Error Messages. The
UP/DOWN keys must be used to edit
a list parameter.

A6.11 Editing a Parameter - Using the Up and Down keys

Select the required parameter.

Press MODE.

Use the up down keys to step to the


required value.

Press MODE or ESC to return to


parameter display mode.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-7

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

A6.12 Entering a Password

Select Parameter 16.

Press the MODE key.

Enter the engineer or operator


security code and press ENTER.

Press ESC to return to parameter


display mode.

A6.13 Changing a Password

Select Parameter 456.

Press the MODE key.

Enter the new engineer or operator


security code.

Press ENTER.

Press ESC to return to parameter


display mode.

Page A-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

A6.14 Disconnecting the Keypad

GD2000E will trip if the keypad is removed illegally or is inadvertently disconnected.


Parameter 469 can be set to allow the keypad to be disconnected without tripping the
drive, using the procedure which follows.
Note: Parameter 469 ‘Keypad Removal Enable’ must be set to 1 (Enabled).

Press ESC twice.

Select 1 (Keypad Disconnection).

Select 1 (Pass Control to Facia).

If Keypad removal is enabled


(Parameter 469) disconnect the
keypad. The drive will continue to run
and ‘Local’ control and speed
reference is passed to the front panel
controls of the drive. If the keypad
removal is not enabled, an error
message is displayed, see ‘Error
Messages’.

A6.15 Displaying the History Log

History logs can be read in two ways:


– The state of all records can be scanned through for a single sampling period.

– The history (sampling periods) of a single channel can be scanned through.

The method of setting up a History log is detailed in the Chapter 7 Para 7-7.9.

Scanning All History Channels at One Sampling Period.

Set parameter 500 to the required sample number.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-9

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

Select Parameter 500.

Press the MODE key.

Enter the sample number to be


viewed (2 in the example).

Press ENTER.

Select the first history channel to be viewed (P501).

Select the first History Channel.

Use the UP/DOWN keys to step


through the Channels

Page A-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

Scanning the History of a Single Channel

Select the required channel (Parameter


501 to 510).

Press MODE.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to step


through the samples.

Press ESC to return to Parameter


Display mode.

A6.16 Displaying Trip Fault Codes

When the drive has tripped, the ‘TRIPPED’ l.e.d. is flashing red. To display the trip fault
codes proceed as follows:

Press the ? key.

Select ‘display trips’ (2).

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to step


through the trip fault codes.

The message ‘No trip n’ is displayed


after the last trip fault code.

Press ESC to return to parameter


display mode.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-11

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

A6.17 Resetting Trips

There are three ways of attempting a trip reset from the keypad.

(1) Press the START button (the drive must be configured for local control). The drive will
reset and run.

(2) Press the DEL key when in parameter display mode.

(3) Use the keypad controls as described below:

Press the ? key.

Use the DOWN keys to display the


‘Attempt Trips reset’ menu option.

Select ‘Attempt Trips Reset’ and press


ENTER.

Press ESC to return to parameter


display mode.
Note: The arrow symbols at the
right hand end of the
display, indicates that
further menu options can
be viewed by pressing the
UP or DOWN key.

Page A-12 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

A6.18 Displaying Warning Fault Codes

When there is an active warning the WARNING l.e.d. is illuminated yellow. To display
the warning messages:

Press ?.

Select ‘Display Warnings’ and press


ENTER.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scan


through the list of Warnings. When the
last Warning is reached the message
‘No More Warnings’ is displayed.

Press ESC to return to Parameter


display mode.

A6.19 Keypad Error Messages

- Occurs when an invalid parameter number is entered. Use


the UP or DOWN arrow key to skip to the next valid parameter number.

- The drive must be in a stopped condition before the


parameter can be changed. (The parameter table in Chapter 7 of the GD2000E
Technical Manual gives a full list of parameter attributes.)

- The parameter can only be read. This may be because


either:
– The parameter is defined as read only.

– Authorisation is required to change a parameter (i.e. the correct security code needs
to entered.) See Chapter 7 Para 7.6.

- A list parameter (ie one whose value is selected from a


pre-defined list) can only be edited using the up and down arrow keys.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-13

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

- Keypad removal is not permitted by the setting in parameter


469. The drive will trip if the keypad is removed.

- The value entered is outside the maximum and minimum


permitted values for that parameter.

A7 Installation
The keypad may either be fitted directly to the front of the drive unit, or mounted
remotely using an extension cable (see ordering codes).

A7.1 Fitting the Enhanced Keypad to the Drive Unit

– Energise the drive.

– Using the drive front panel controls, set the value of Parameter 203 to 4 to configure
the RS232 port to communicate with the enhanced keypad.
– Remove the yellow blanking plug covering the 9-way D-type socket on the front
panel of the drive unit.
– Position the keypad in the rectangular recess on the front panel of the drive unit
taking care to align the 9-way D-type connector and push the keypad home.
– Secure the keypad using the two retaining screws.

A7.2 Fitting the Keypad in a Remote Location

The enhanced keypad may be fitted to a remote position e.g. in a cubicle door if
required. The keypad must be sited on a flat panel, and requires a cut-out to the
dimensions shown in Figure A-2. Rear access is required for cable entry.

Page A-14 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

A7.3 Mounting Requirements

Figure A-2 Keypad dimensions

The dimensions of the unit are shown in Figure A-2. A clearance of approximately 50
mm (2") is required at the rear of the unit for the cable and connector.

The site chosen should conform to the environmental conditions detailed in the
specification section.

If the unit is to mounted on the outside of an IP65 (NEMA 4) enclosure, a neoprene seal
(see Ordering Codes) must be fitted between the unit and the enclosure. To effect a
proper seal the seating area around the cut-out must be within 0.25mm (10 thou.) of a
flat plane.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-15

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

A7.4 Installation Procedure

Figure A-3 - Cutout dimensions

Refer to Figure A-3 and proceed as follows:


– Mark and cut out the aperture as shown.

– Drill two holes suitable for 4 mm fixing screws as shown.

– Fit the neoprene seal to the groove at the rear of the unit.

– Position the keypad over the aperture and secure with 2 off 4 mm fixing screws.

– Connect the plug end of the extension cable to the 9-way D-type socket on the front
panel of the drive unit. Route the cable carefully with regard to the segregation
requirements. Connect the socket to the connector at the rear of the keypad.
– Energise the drive.

– Using the drive front panel controls, set the value of Parameter 203 to 4 to configure
the drive RS232 port to communicate with the enhanced keypad.

A7.5 Keypad Parameter Settings

When the keypad is fitted the parameters 203, 463 and 469 need to be set to
configure the drive for use with the enhanced keypad.

Other parameters which may need to be set when using the Enhanced Keypad are:
– Parameter 11 - Principle Control Source.

– Parameter 12 - Principle Reference Source.

– Parameter 118 - Back-up Control Source.

Page A-16 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix A Enhanced Keypad

– Parameter 119 - Back-up Reference Source.

Parameter 463 - LED display when keypad fitted

When the keypad is fitted the 4-digit display on the front panel of the drive displays the
contents of a predetermined parameter. The default setting displays parameter 2 the
frequency feedback. This can be changed by setting the value to a different parameter
number in the range:

1 to 698.

Parameter 469 - Keypad removal OK

This parameter determines the action taken by the drive if the keypad is not present
when the drive is energised, or if keypad control is lost while the drive is energised.
Allowed values are:
0 = Keypad removal not allowed.
1 = Keypad removal allowed.

A7.6 Setting the Keypad Text Language

The keypad text can be language can be changed to read in either English, German or
French (not available in some versions of firmware).

Parameter 477 - Keypad Text Language

Input values are:


1 = English.
2 = German.

3 = French (not available in some firmware versions).


To change the text display language:
– Select parameter 477.

– Select the required language and press .


This causes the drive to perform an automatic back-up, indicated by the decimal point
on the display flashing.
– Wait for the decimal point to stop flashing.

– Turn off the power to the drive.

– Energise the drive. The key pad will now display text in the selected language.

A7.7 Maintenance

There are no user maintainable components within the enhanced keypad. The unit may
be cleaned periodically using soap solution and a damp cloth.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page A-17

Print Home
Appendix A Enhanced Keypad Alspa GD2000E

Page A-18 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix B

Relocating the User Termination Panel

B1 Introduction
The User Termination Panel, which carries the control signal wiring, relay outputs and
RS485 serial port connections (Terminal blocks TB6, TB7 and TB8) can be mounted
outside the drive unit to improve access to the terminations. The maximum distance
between the controller and the termination panel is governed by length of the
connecting ribbon cable, which is limited to 3 m long by noise considerations.

Two optional kits are available:


(1) User termination panel, ordering code 30V2100/10. This kit contains a
replacement user termination panel and all the parts needed to to
complete the installation. It is intended primarily for use with GD2005E to
GD2016E size drives in which the user terminations are fixed on the power
power interface board. It may also be specified for larger size drives, where
the customer does not wish to disassemble the drive.
(2) Termination panel mounting kit, ordering code 30V2200/10. This kit can
only be used with drive models GD2032E to GD2207E. The kit contains all
the components required to remount the original user termination panel in
a remote location. Some disassembly of the drive is required to remove the
user termination panel from the drive.

B1.1 Receipt of Equipment on Site

When the equipment arrives on site, unpack it carefully and inspect it for any sign of
damage. Check the complete consignment against the packing slip for any loss in
transit. If any damage or loss has occurred, contact CEGELEC immediately giving the
following details:
– A list of damaged or missing items.

– A description of damage.

– The order number or packing slip details.

B2 Procedure for Installing the Remote Termination Panel 30V2100/10


This section describes the installation of the optional remote Termination panel
30V2100/10 and applies particularly to GD2005E to GD2016E.

B3 Description
The remote termination panel kit contains the following items:

Termination panel circuit board with:


DIN rail card holder fitted.
TB6, TB7 and TB8 free terminal blocks.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page B-1

Print Home
Appendix B Alspa GD2000E

Ground cable
40-way ribbon cable (length = 3 m).

The User Termination Panel is intended for fitting to a DIN 46277-Part 1 or DIN
46277-Part 3 mounting rail. The dimensions of the unit are shown in Figure B-1.

Figure B-1 User termination panel dimensions

B4 Installing the Termination Panel

Figure B-2 Arrangement of remote termination panel

– Select a suitable location for mounting the termination panel, ensuring that there is
adequate clearance for all cabling, and that the cable segregation requirements are
satisfied. Fit DIN type mounting rail (not supplied).

Page B-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix B

– Clip the terminal panel into position on the DIN rail.

– Connect the grounding point on the termination panel to a suitable grounding point
on the frame or panel using the grounding cable provided.

At the Drive Unit

– Ensure the drive is disconnected from the power supply and that no l.e.d.s are lit on
the front panel.
– Unscrew the two retaining screws and open the front panel.

– Locate and remove the lower 40-way ribbon cable connecting the front panel to the
power interface board. Discard the cable or store it for future use.
– Thread the extended 40 way ribbon cable provided in the kit through the cable entry
in the base of the unit (the cable needs to be folded to achieve this) and connect it to
the lower ribbon cable connector on the drive panel.

At the Termination Panel

Route the cable to the remote termination panel, taking care that the segregation
requirements detailed in Chapter 9 Para 9.3.11 are satisfied, and connect it to PL5 on
the termination panel.
– Secure the cable along its route using suitable cable ties or clips.

– Route the control wiring to the termination panel and connect the wires to Terminal
blocks TB6, TB7 and TB8 as required.

B5 Installing a Remote Termination Panel for GD2032E to GD2207E


This section describes the procedure for relocating the original user termination panel
supplied with the drive, using Termination panel mounting kit 30V2200/10.

B6 Description
The remote termination panel kit contains the following items:
DIN rail card holder centre section in 5 sections
DIN rail card holder l/h end Qty 1.
DIN rail card holder r/h end Qty 1.
Grounding screw assembly comprising:
M3 x 16 (grounding) screw. Qty 1.
M3 nuts. Qty 2.
Plain washer. Qty 2.
M3 spring washer. Qty. 2
Grounding cable. Qty 1.
40-way ribbon cable. (length = 3 m).
The User Termination Panel is intended for fitting to a DIN 46277-Part 1 or DIN
46277-Part 3 mounting rail. The dimensions of the unit are shown in Figure B-1.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page B-3

Print Home
Appendix B Alspa GD2000E

B6.1 Removing the User Termination Panel from the Drive

– Disconnect the input AC supply. Ensure that no l.e.d.s are lit on the front panel.

– Unscrew the two retaining screws and open the front door of the drive.

– Locate the User Termination panel.

– Remove the screws holding polycarbonate safety cover and remove the cover.

– Disconnect the 40-way ribbon cable from the user termination panel and from the
control panel on the door. Remove the cable from the drive and store for possible
future use.
– Remove any control wiring which may be connected to the user terminal block.

– Unscrew the four screws and the groundinng screw, holding the user termination
board, remove the board from the drive.
– Refit the polycarbonate safety cover using the original screws (it will be necessary to
place packing washers on the terminal block support pillars to make up the thickness
of the removed user termination panel).

B6.2 Assembling the Termination Panel

Figure B-3 User termination panel - assembly

– Assemble the Grounding terminal as shown in Figure B-3. Tighten the nut.

– Assemble the five card holder centre sections to the right-hand end section as shown
in Figure B-3. Moderate force is required to make the sections click home.
– Insert the termination panel and fit the left-hand end section (see Figure B-3).

B6.3 Mounting the User Termination Panel

Select a suitable location for mounting the termination panel, ensuring there is
adequate clearance for all cabling, and that the cable segregation requirements are
satisfied. Fit a type DIN 46277-Part 1 or DIN 46277-Part 3 rail mounting (not supplied)
for the termination panel.

Page B-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix B

– Fit the termination panel into position on the DIN rail.

– Connect the grounding point on the termination panel to a suitable grounding point
on the frame or panel using the grounding cable provided.
– Thread the extended 40-way ribbon cable through the cable entry in the base of the
unit (the cable needs to be folded to achieve this).
– Connect the 40-way ribbon cable provided to the lower 40 way connector on the
drive door.
– Route the 40-way ribbon cable to the termination panel and connect it to the ribbon
cable connector PL5 on the termination panel, observing the requirements for
segregation..
– Secure the cable along its route using suitable cable ties or clips.

– Route the control wiring to the termination panel and connect the wires to Terminal
blocks TB6, TB7 and TB8 as required.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page B-5

Print Home
Appendix B Alspa GD2000E

Page B-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

GD2000E Modular Drives

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-1

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Page C-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

General Information

C1.1 Introduction
This appendix gives details of the GD OMEGA (GD2000E) control equipment and
shows how this equipment is used with the GD DELTA power equipment to build each
of the modular GD2000E drives in the range GD2282E to GD21131E. It should be
read in conjunction with the GD DELTA Technical Manual which gives details of the
power equipment. A typical arrangement of a GD2000E modular drive is shown in
Figure C-1

Figure C-1 Typical arrangement of a modular drive (GD2754E shown)


Typical arrangement of a modular drive (GD2754E shown)

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-3

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

All drives can be specified with either 6-pulse rectifier input or 12-pulse rectifier input.

The GD2282E to GD21131E range of drives can be supplied either complete, or as a


number of modules to be built in to a customer’s own designed panel.
C1.1.1 Environmental Protection
The environmental protection standard of the drive depends upon the design of
enclosure or panel into which the equipment is installed. It is the responsibility of the
user or subcontractor to ensure that the equipment is adequately protected.
Note: To meet the requirements of IP20 (NEMA 4), the enhanced keypad must
be fitted to the GD2000E controller if the controller is fitted to outside of
the enclosure. An alternative method would be to mount the enhanced
keypad on the outside of the panel, with the controller mounted internally.

C1.2 Overview of GD2000E Control Equipment


C1.2.1 GD2000E Control Module
The GD2000E Control module is based on the standard OMEGA Controller used
thoughout the GD2000E range of drives, and offers the same range of features.

The drive is controlled with the standard 5 key local control panel or optional enhanced
keypad used thoughout the GD2000E range of drives.
C1.2.2 User Termination Panel.
The user termination panel is a small printed circuit board, with card holder suitable for
DIN rail mounting. The circuit board carries all the user terminations.
C1.2.3 Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS)
The SMPS supplies power to the the gate drive circuits on the GD DELTA transistor
module and to the control module. There is one SMPS mounted on each GD DELTA
transistor module.

C1.3 Power Electronics Equipment


Full technical details and installation instructions for the GD DELTA power equipment
are given in the GD DELTA Technical Manual. The overall scheme is shown in this
appendix.

Page C-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Technical Description

C2.1 Introduction
This chapter gives a brief description of the function of the control component parts
which are used to build a GD2000E modular drive.
C2.1.1 GD2000E OMEGA Control Module

Figure C-2 GD2000E control module

The GD2000E OMEGA Control module provides all the control functions of the
GD2000E range of drives. It is a single assembly consisting of the standard GD2000E
front control panel, the control board and power interface board. There are six variants
of the control module, for one, two or three transistor bridges as follows:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-5

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Drive Control Module No. of Transistor


Part Number Modules

GD2282E 30V4800/300
GD2300E 1
GD2377E
GD2564E 30V4800/310
GD2600E 2
GD2754E
GD2846E 30V4800/320
GD2900E 3
GD21131E

The control modules are suitable for mounting on a panel door or other panel and
requires an aperture in the mounting panel.

Power Interface Board

The power interface board (PIB) is part of the GD2000E control module. It provides the
interface between the the control board and and the GD DELTA power modules. There
are three variants of the power interface board, suitable for interfacing to one, two or
three parallel connected transistor modules. Power to this board is provided by the
Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS). Information required by the control board to identify
the current rating of the drive, and the configuration of the power output modules, is
stored on a EEPROM on the PIB.

The PIB also interfaces the pre-charge relay signal and thermistor feed back signals to
the input rectifier modules.

Page C-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-3 Control module - rear view

The Control Module has the following external connectors (all mounted on the PIB):
– A 40-way ribbon cable connector (PL209 on the PIB) for connection to the switch
mode power supply(s).
– A terminal block connector (PL210 on the PIB) for control connections to and from
the input rectifier bridge module.
– 3, 6 or 9 (depending on the type of control module) 26-way ribbon cable connectors
(PL151 to PL153 and PL194 to PL199 on the PIB) for connection to the gate drives on
the transistor bridge modules.
– A 40-way ribbon cable connector (PL3, mounted on the control board) for
connection to the user termination panel.
The three variants of control module have the following 26-way ribbon cable
connectors:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-7

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Table C-1 Gate drive connectors

Connector Function Fitted to (Control module)


PL151 Bridge 1 U phase 30V4800/300
PL152 Bridge 1 V phase 30V4800/310
PL153 Bridge 1 W phase 30V4800/320
PL194 Bridge 2 U phase
30V4800/310
PL195 Bridge 2 V phase
30V4800/320
PL196 Bridge 2 W phase
PL197 Bridge 3 U phase
PL198 Bridge 3 V phase 30V4800/320
PL199 Bridge 3 W phase

The interfaces for the pre-charge relay and the thermistor and thermostat feed-back
signals from the rectifier bridge(s) are connected via the 9-way terminal block (PL210).
C2.1.2 GD2000E Switch Mode Power Supply
The Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS) provides power for the gate drive control circuits
of the output transistor modules and for the control module. One SMPS is required for
each output transistor module. The SMPS is mounted directly on the transistor module
which it powers.

For further information on the SMPS refer to the DELTA Technical Manual (T1641)
C2.1.3 GD2000E User Termination panel

Figure C-4 User termination panel

The User Termination Panel is a small printed circuit board fitted into a card holder
suitable for DIN rail mounting. It provides all the terminations for the digital and
analog inputs and outputs, and the RS485 serial port. The user termination panel is
connected to the GD2000E Control Module with a ribbon cable from PL5.

C2.2 Delta Power Modules


The range of DELTA power modules can be used with the GD2000E Control modules
to build up drives ranging from 282 A to 1131 A. GD2000E uses one or two rectifier
modules to convert the three phase input to DC and up to three transistor modules to
provide the variable frequency three-phase output to the motor.

Page C-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C2.2.1 Delta Rectifier Modules


DELTA rectifier modules, used either singly or in pairs, provide a rectified supply to the
DC link. When two modules are connected in parallel, sharing reactors are required on
the input. The rectifier modules contain integral pre-charge circuits.

Precharge Circuit

Each rectifer module has an integral pre-charge circuit to reduce the current surge
when the unit is switched on. When power is applied, current flows into the DC link
through pre-charge resistors, the rectfier bridge thyristors remain switched off until the
DC link voltage reaches a pre-determined level. When the DC link reaches a
predetermined voltage a signal from the control module closes the pre-charge relay,
switching on the rectifier bridge thyristors
C2.2.2 Delta Transistor Modules
These provide PWM switched three-phase output. When two or more transistor modules
are connected in parallel sharing reactors are required on the output. Each Transistor
Module requires a cooling fan.

When used with the GD2000E each transistor module must be fitted with a switch
mode power supply to provide power for the gate drive circuits and the GD2000E
Control Module.
C2.2.3 Cooling Fans and Fan Boxes
One Cooling Fan is required for each rectifier or transistor module in the drive. These
are supplied with supporting steelwork and ducting.

The cooling systems are available in standard and high performance versions.
C2.2.4 Fan Transformer (Standard Cooling System)
The fan transformer for the standard coling system provides 230 V ac for fans from
2-phases of three-phase input. There are several versions available to supply different
numbers of cooling systems. The correct output voltage for the fans is selected by
connection to the appropriate voltage ‘tap’ on the transformer output.
C2.2.5 Fan Transformer (High Performance Cooling System)
The fan transformer for the High Performance Cooilng System provides three-phase
400 V ac from the three phase supply. The correct output voltage for the fans is
selected by connection to the appropriate voltage ‘tap’ on the transformer output.
C2.2.6 DC Link Inductor
Reduces harmonics in the DC link, on systems using 6-pulse rectifier input.
C2.2.7 Inter-Bridge Transformer
An inter-bridge transformer is used on systems using a 12-pulse rectifier output. The
output of the two rectifier modules is connected through the inter-bridge transformer to
the DC link. Its purpose is to force current sharing between the two rectifier modules

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-9

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

and it reduces DC link ripple. A DC link inductor is not normally required on a 12-pulse
system.

Page C-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

System Design

This chapter details the electrical interconnections which need to be made to complete
each drive in the range GD2282E to GD21131E. The power cabling of the delta units
and the control connections are detailed separately for each size of drive. For details of
connections to the user termination panel see GD2000E Technical Manual.

C3.1 GD2282E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse), 380 V to 480 V


The GD2282E drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2282E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 1
GDR 391 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 282 transistor bridge module 1
DC link inductor 1
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 2
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-5 and the
control connections are shown in Figure C-6

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-11

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

C3.2 GD2377E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse), 380 V to 480 V


The GD2377E drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2377E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
GD2000E switch mode power supply 1
GDR 721 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 377 transistor bridge module 1
DC link inductor 1
377 A output reactor 1
Cooling system comprising:
Fan Transformer 1
Cooling fans 2
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-5 and the
control connections are shown in Figure C-6

Page C-12 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-5 Power connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (6-pulse)


Power connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (6-pulse)

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-13

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-6 Control connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (6-pulse)


Control connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (6-pulse) .

Page C-14 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C3.3 GD2282E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse)


The GD2282E drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2282E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 1
GDR 633 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 282 transistor bridge module 1
Inter-bridge transformer 1
282 A output reactor 1
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 2
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-7 and the
control connections are shown in Figure C-8

C3.4 GD2377E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse)


The GD2377E drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2377E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
GD2000E switch mode power supply 1
GDR 633 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 377 transistor bridge module 1
Inter-bridge transformer 1
377 A output reactor 1
Cooling system comprising:
Fan Transformer 1
Cooling fans 2
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-7 and the
control connections are shown in Figure C-8

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-15

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-7 Power connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (12-pulse)


Power connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (12-pulse) .

Page C-16 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-8 Control connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (12-pulse)


Control connections for GD2282E and GD2377E (12-pulse) .

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-17

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

C3.5 GD2564E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse)


The GD2564E (6-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2564E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 2
GDR 721 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 282 transistor bridge module 2
DC link inductor 1
282 A output sharing reactor 2
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 3
Cable assembly kit

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-9

The control connections are shown in Figure C-10

C3.6 GD2754E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse)


The GD2754E (6-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2754E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 2
GDR 872 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 377 transistor bridge module 2
DC link inductor 1
377 A output sharing reactor 2
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 3
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-9

The control connections are shown in Figure C-10

Page C-18 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-9 Power connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (6-pulse)


Power connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (6-pulse) .

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-19

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-10 Control connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (6-pulse)


Control connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (6-pulse) .

Page C-20 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C3.7 GD2564E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse)


The GD2564E (12-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2564E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 2
GDR 1168 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 282 transistor bridge module 2
Inter-bridge transformer 1
282 A output sharing reactor 2
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 3
Cable assembly kit

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-11

The control connections are shown in Figure C-12

C3.8 GD2754E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse)


The GD2754E (12-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2754E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 2
GDR 1168 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 377 transistor bridge module 2
Inter-bridge transformer 1
377 A output sharing reactor 2
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 3
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-11

The control connections are shown in Figure C-12

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-21

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-11 Power connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (12-pulse)


Power connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (12-pulse) .

Page C-22 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-12 Control connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (12-pulse)


Control connections for GD2564E and GD2754E (12-pulse) .

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-23

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

C3.9 GD2846E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse)


The GD2846E (6-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2846E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 3
GDR 1168 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 282 transistor bridge module 3
DC link inductor 1
282 A output sharing ractor 3
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 4
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-13

The control connections are shown in Figure C-14

Page C-24 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-13 Power connections for GD2846E (6-pulse)


Power connections for GD2846E (6-pulse) .

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-25

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-14 Control connections for GD2846E (6-pulse)


Control connections for GD2846E (6-pulse) .

Page C-26 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C3.10 GD2846E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse)


The GD2846E (12-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD2846E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 3
GDR 1168 rectifier bridge module 1
GDD 282 transistor bridge module 3
Inter-bridge transformer 1
282 A output sharing ractor 3
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 4
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-15

The control connections are shown in Figure C-16

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-27

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-15 Power connections for GD2846E (12-pulse)


Power connections for GD2846E (12-pulse) .

Page C-28 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-16 Control connections for GD2846E (12-pulse)


Control connections for GD2846E (12-pulse) .

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-29

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

C3.11 GD21131E Power and Control Circuits (6-Pulse)


The GD21131E (6-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD21131E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 3
GDR 872 rectifier bridge module 2
GDD 377 transistor bridge module 3
DC link inductor 1
377 A output sharing reactor 3
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 5
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-17

The control connections are shown in Figure C-18

Page C-30 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-17 Power connections for GD21131E (6-pulse)


Power connections for GD21131E (6-pulse)

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-31

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-18 Control connections for GD21131E (6-pulse)


Control connections for GD21131E (6-pulse)

Page C-32 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C3.12 GD21131E Power and Control Circuits (12-Pulse)


The GD21131E (12-pulse) drive comprises the following sub assemblies:

Unit Qty
GD21131E control assembly 1
GD2000E termination panel 1
assembly
Switch mode power supply 3
GDR 872 rectifier bridge module 2
GDD 377 transistor bridge module 3
Inter-bridge transformer 1
377 A output sharing reactor 3
Cooling system comprising:
Fan transformer 1
Cooling fans 5
Cable assembly kit 1

The electrical connections for the power equipment are shown in Figure C-19

The control connections are shown in Figure C-20

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-33

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Figure C-19 Power connections for GD21131E (12-pulse)


Power connections for GD21131E (12-pulse)

Page C-34 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Figure C-20 Control Connections for GD21131E (12ulse)


Control Connections for GD21131E (12ulse)

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-35

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Page C-36 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Installation

WARNING:

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY


REMAIN FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN
DISCONNECTED FROM THE INPUT SUPPLY.

THE INPUT AC SUPPLY MUST BE ISOLATED AND THE UNIT ALLOWED TO


STAND WITHOUT POWER FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES BEFORE OPENING
THE HINGED PANEL DOORS OR COVERS.

C4.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the method of installing the GD OMEGA Control unit, SMPS and
User Termination Panel for a GD2000E modular drive, and includes all cabling
associated with the above components as follows:
(1) General Information which is common to all drives.
(2) Installation details for the Control Unit.
(3) Installation details for the user termination panel.
The method of installing the DELTA rectifier and output modules, including connection
to input power supplies and motor is described in the GD DELTA Technical Manual.

C4.2 General Information


C4.2.1 Receipt of Equipment on Site
When the equipment arrives on site, unpack it carefully and inspect it for any sign of
damage. Check the complete consignment against the packing slip for any loss in
transit. If any damage or loss has occurred, contact the supplier immediately giving the
following details:
– A list of damaged or missing items.

– A description of damage.

– The order number or packing slip details.

C4.2.2 Identification of Components


Details of the type of drive unit, serial number, modification status and basic electrical
information are given on the identification label fixed to the the units.
C4.2.3 Storage
If equipment delivered to site is not to be installed immediately:
– Re-pack it in its original packing material. If this is not possible it should be enclosed
in polythene sheet to protect it from the ingress of dust.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-37

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

– Store it in a clean dry atmosphere, preferably at room temperature (The storage


temperature limits are -25o C to +70o C).
C4.2.4 Environment
To ensure trouble-free operation with minimum maintenance, the installation site
should fulfil the following requirements:
– The atmosphere should be clean and dust free, in particular it must be free from
corrosive vapours and conductive dusts.
o o
– The ambient temperature should be in the range 0 C to 40 C, with no rapid
o
changes of temperature. At ambient temperatures above 40 C the continuous
output load current must be derated by 2% per oC up to a maximum of 50o C, see
‘Specification’.
– The Relative Humidity should be in the range 5% to 95% (non condensing).

Where necessary measures should be taken to prevent the ingress of metallic swarf
generated by process or maintenance activities.

Altitude.

The normal operating altitude for the unit is up to 1000 m (3,300 ft) above sea level.
Above this, the drive should be derated by 7.3% per 1000 m (3,300 ft) up to a
maximum of 2000 m (6,600 ft).
C4.2.5 Heat Loss from Unit
The maximum heat loss of the units are as follows:

GD2000E Control Module - negligible.

SMPS (per unit) - negligible.


C4.2.6 Acoustic Noise at the Motor

Acoustic noise is generated at the motor as a consequence of the PWM switching of the
output power. The noise output and frequency depend on the PWM switching frequency
and the construction of the motor.
C4.2.7 Radio Frequency Emissions
If an RF filter is used it should be connected between the input fuses and the R S T
terminals of the drive. To ensure the effectiveness of the filter, the motor cable should
be shielded or steel wire armoured.
C4.2.8 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference

All GD2000E modules are designed for operation within a panel, which will shield the
modules from radio frequency interference. Care should be taken that no radio
frequency transmissions (e.g. from portable telephones) take place in the vicinity of the
unit, when panel doors are open and the drive is energised.

Page C-38 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C4.2.9 Cooling and Ventilation


The GD2000E units are air cooled. It is essential that adequate clearance to allow a
free flow of cooling air through external panel airways is maintained at all times.
C4.2.10 Disposal Instructions
See Health and Safety instructions at the front of this manual.

C4.3 GD2000E Control Module Mechanical Installation

Figure C-21 Control module cut-out dimensions

C4.3.1 Location
The control module is intended for panel mounting and should be located close to the
transistor bridges. There should be adequate clearance at the rear for cable runs and
access to the cable connectors. A cut-out must be made for clearance for the rear of the
module and to allow cabling to pass through. See Figure C-21

The dimensions of the control module are shown in Chapter C3 Figure C-2.

If the unit is to be mounted on the outside of an IP65 (NEMA 4) enclosure, a neoprene


seal (see ordering codes) must be fitted between the module and the mounting panel
and the enhanced keypad must be fitted to the front of the control module. To effect a
proper seal the seating area around the cut-out must within 0.25mm (10 thou) of a
flat plane.
C4.3.2 Installation Procedure
– Mark and cut out the aperture as shown in Figure C-21.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-39

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

– Mark out and drill six holes 3.4 mm (1/8") dia. for the mounting screws.

– Fit the neoprene seal to the groove on the rear face of the front panel.

– Position the module over the aperture and secure with six self-tapping screws.

C4.4 SMPS Mechanical Installation


See Alspa DELTA Tecnical Manual.

C4.5 User Termination Panel Mechanical Installation


C4.5.1 Space Requirements
The dimensions of the user termination panel are shown in Figure C-4
C4.5.2 Description
The remote termination panel kit contains the following items:
Termination panel circuit board with:
DIN rail card holder fitted.
TB6, TB7 and TB8 free terminal blocks.
Ground cable.
40-way ribbon cable (length 3 m (9’-10"). Qty 1.

Figure C-22 Assembling the user termination panel

The User Termination Panel is intended for fitting to a DIN 46277-Part 1 or DIN
46277-Part 3 mounting rail.

Page C-40 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C4.5.3 User Termination Panel - Installation Procedure

Figure C-23 Installing the user termination panel

– Select a suitable location for mounting the termination panel, ensuring that there is
adequate clearance for all cabling, and that the cable segregation requirements are
satisfied. Fit DIN type mounting rail (not supplied).
– Clip the terminal panel into position on the DIN rail.

– Connect the grounding point on the termination panel to a suitable grounding point
on the frame or panel using the grounding cable provided.
C4.6 Assembly Instructions
These instructions are intended for guidance only and apply to all drive sizes. The exact
sequence of installation will depend upon the type of panel and the chosen layout.

A list of major components and circuit diagrams for each of the standard drives can be
found in Chapter C3.
– Install the rectifier modules and transistor modules together with their cooling fans,
fan transformer, bus bars etc in accordance with the instructions in the Alspa GD
DELTA Technical Manual. Transistor modules should be mounted close to the control
module to keep connecting cables short. If the control module is mounted on a panel
door which is hinged on the left, the transistor modules will be mounted on the left of
the panel and the rectifier bridges on the right.
– Depending on whether the drive has 6-pulse input or 12-pulse input, install either a
DC link inductor or an inter-bridge transformer. Instructions for installing these items
can be found in the GD DELTA Technical Manual.
– Fit one SMPS to each transistor module see Page C-40.

– Select a suitable location for mounting the GD2000E control module and install this
module in accordance with the instruction in Page C-39.
– Select a suitable location for the user termination panel and install this item in
accordance with the instructions in Page C-40.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-41

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

C4.7 Electrical connections


The electrical connections are grouped in three separate categories:
C4.7.1 AC Input Power Cables and Motor Cables

Connect the motor and AC input using suitable rated cables and in accordance with
relevant national standards in the country of use.

Refer to the appropriate circuit diagram in Chapter C3 for details of the power
connections required on standard drive configurations.
C4.7.2 High Voltage DC
The DC link and DC connections between modules are not provided in the standard kit.

Connecting the SMPS

The SMPS supply cable(s) are provided in the SMPS boxed kit.
– Connect the SMPS cable to terminal block TB1 of the associated transistor module
taking care that the polarity is correct.
– Connect the free socket connector to PL211 on the SMPS unit.

C4.7.3 Connecting the Cooling System


The fan transformer is connected to two phases of the 3-phase input. The cabling and
protection fuses for this are not provided in the kit (see GD DELTA Technical Manual for
recommended fuses). The cooling fans are connected to the output of the fan
transformer as shown in the circuit diagrams.
C4.7.4 Auxiliary 110 V Connection to 690 V Rectifier Units
On 690V rectifier units,(These can be identified by the Order Number GDDxxx-4601,
where xxx is the current rating) it is necessary to provide a 110 V auxiliary supply to
each unit.

This is connected to ways 8 & 9 of TB1 on each rectifier unit in the system.

Note that a 110 V supply is available from the system fan transformer.

The current consumed by each rectifier is less than 100 mA.

If this supply is not connected, the drives will trip on “PRE-CHARGE FAIL”.

Page C-42 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

C4.7.5 Control Connections for 690 V Systems


There is very little difference between the connections required for low volatge and high
voltage DELTA based systems.

The connections required for each possible 690 V system are as follows :
GD2000 Technical Manual GD2000 Technical Manual
Input Type
Drive Type Appendix C Figure for Power Appendix C Figure for Control
(6/12-Pulse)
Connections Connections
GD2300 6 C-6 C-7
GD2300 12 C-8 C-9
GD2600 6 C-10 C-11
GD2600 12 C-12 C-13
GD2900 6 C-14 C-15
GD2900 12 C-16 C-17

Notes:
1. This assumes that the Pre-charge acknowledge signals have been implemented.

2. This assumes that the 110v auxiliary supply has been connected.

3. The output reactor shown for GD2300 is optional.

4. PL150 on the Delta Modules is now PL1.


C4.7.6 Control Connections

These are low voltage connections between the Control Module, and the transistor and
rectifier bridges and the Control Module and SMPSs. The control connections for each
configuration of drive are shown in Chapter C3. These can be divided into three
groups:
C4.7.7 Pre-Charge Acknowledge on DELTA Based Systems
On DELTA based systems additional system protection is implemented in the form of a
Pre-Charge Acknowledge signal from the GDR rectifier units to the OMEGA control
unit. To implement this, additional connections are required between the OMEGA
control unit and the GDR rectifier unit. If this link is not made, the drive will trip on
“PRE-CHARGE FAIL” at power up. Details of the connections are as follows.

Single Rectifier Systems

On systems where there is a single GDR rectifier unit a single additional wire is required
between the OMEGA control unit and the GDR :

20X4262/20X4282(Power Interface Board) - PL210 pin 9 to GDR rectifier TB1 pin 10

This is in addition to the wiring shown in figures C- 6, C-8, C-10, C- 12, C-14, C-16.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-43

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Double Rectifier Systems

On systems where there are two GDR rectifier units, two additional wires are required.
These effectively “daisy chain” the pre-charge acknowledge signal from rectifier 1 to the
pre-charge signal of rectifier 2 and use the pre-charge acknowledge from rectifier 2 to
signal to the power interface board.

Details are :

20X4262/20X428 (Power Interface Board) PL210 Pin 8 to GDR No.1 TB1 Pin 1. (This is
as shown.)

GDR No.1 TB1 Pin 10 to GDR No.2 TB1 Pin 1. (This replaces the existing wire to GDR
No.2 TB1 Pin 1.)

20X4262/20X4282 (Power Interface Board) PL210 Pin 9 to GDR No.2 TB1 Pin 10. (This
is a new connection.)

This is a modification to the wiring shown in figures C-18 and C-20.

Segregation

The control connections are, in general, low voltage and low current signals. This
makes them inherently susceptible to interference from electromagnetic noise
generated by power cabling. Therefore, in all applications, the control wiring should
not be run directly alongside power wiring. Ideally separate trunking should be used to
run control wires, if this not possible, a separation of at least 300 mm (12") should be
maintained between the control wires and any power cables.

To minimise radio frequency emissions and interference, input supply cables should be
routed separately from the output cabling to the motor.

User Terminations

These will vary according to the application and are described in the Chapter 6 of this
manual.

Gate Drive Ribbon Cables

The Gate Drive cables are 26-way ribbon which are supplied pre-terminated as part of
the Control Module kit. There are three gate drive cables one for each transistor
module, one for each output phase.
– Route the gate drive cables and connect them between the Gate Drive circuit boards
and the Power Interface Board as shown in section C3.

SMPS Ribbon Cable

The SMPS ribbon cable is a 40-way ribbon. This is supplied pre-terminated with either
one, two or three connectors (depending on the number of transistor modules in the

Page C-44 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

drive) which connect to the SMPS units. There are therefore three types of cable,
depending on the model of drive:

Note: The connectors on these cables are configured at the factory specifically
for the type of drive unit. If the cable supplied is lost or damaged in any
way, a new cable must be obtained from the CEGELEC.
– Route the SMPS cable and connect between connector PL212 on each of the SMPS
units and PL209 on the Power Interface Board on the Control Module.
Thermistor/Thermostat feedback and Pre-charge Wiring

The rectifier thermistor/thermostat feedback and precharge wiring is connected


between terminal block TB1 on each rectifier module and PL210 on the power interface
board. These signals should be connected as shown in the appropriate circuit diagram.

PL210 on the Power Interface Board is a screw terminal connector with terminals on the
free half of a 9-way plug and socket. PL210 is suitable for 2.5 mm2 (#14awg) flexible
cables.

User Termination Panel Ribbon cable

The user termination panel connecting cable is a 40-way ribbon cable supplied
pre-terminated.
– Route the ribbon cable and connect it from PL5 on the user termination panel to PL3
on the control module.
User Termination Panel Wiring

The user termination panel wiring will depend on the individual application. Full details
of the user termination panel connections are given in Chapter 6 of the this Manual.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-45

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Page C-46 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix C

Commissioning

C5.1 Introduction
Because of the nature of the GD2000E modular drives it is not possible to give detailed
commissioning instructions for modular drives in this manual. It is the responsibility of
the drive builder to provide full pre-commissioning checks for GD2000E modular
drives, to a point at which it is safe to connect the drive to the supply and motor.

To ensure safety of personnel and equipment these commissioning instructions must


include the following:
– Warnings and Cautions as necessary.

– Mechanical checks

– Electrical checks

On completion of the drive builder’s pre-commissioning checks, the comissioning


instructions in Chapter 10 of this manual should be followed.
Note: For DELTA based drives the System Configuration procedure described in
Chapter 10 para 10.3 must be carried out. Also refer to Chapter 7 para
7.1.3 for additional information.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page C-47

Print Home
Appendix C Alspa GD2000E

Page C-48 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix D

12-Pulse Adaptor Unit

D1 Introduction
The 12-pulse adaptor unit can be fitted to the GD2104E, 2145E and 2207E drives and
GD3104, 3145 and 3207 vector control drives. This unit converts the drive to 12-pulse
operation, reducing the harmonic current imposed on the supply.

The 12-pulse adaptor unit is fitted at the base of the main drive unit and contains all
the circuits and components required to convert the standard drive to 12-pulse
operation.

D2 Technical Description

D2.1 Introduction

The 12-pulse adaptor converts the standard drive to 12-pulse operation and comprises
the following:

Input thyristor bridge - converts one of the 3-phase AC inputs to DC. It is identical to the
input bridge in the main drive unit. The pre-charge function is controlled by the main
drive unit.

Inter-bridge reactor - balances the output of the two input bridges, so that the power
supplied to the DC link is drawn equally from each. It also provides some voltage
smoothing making a separate DC link inductor unnecessary.

Figure D-1 12-pulse adaptor schematic diagram

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page D-1

Print Home
Appendix D Alspa GD2000E

D3 System Design

D3.1 12-pulse drives

Figure D-2 Power Connections

12-pulse drives require two 3-phase AC input supplies phase shifted 30o relative to
each other and these should be connected as shown in Figure D-2.

The control connections for the 12-pulse adaptor unit are connected as shown in
Figure D-3
Note: The existing control wires on PL210 must be left in place. Remove the
existing link connecting PL210/3 and PL210/4.

Figure D-3 12-pulse adaptor control connections

Page D-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix D

D4 Installation
WARNING:

1) DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY


REMAIN FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN
DISCONNECTED FROM THE INPUT AC SUPPLY.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE DISCONNECTED AND THE UNIT ALLOWED TO


STAND WITHOUT POWER FOR AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES BEFORE OPENING
THE HINGED FRONT PANEL OR COVERS.

2) HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT, EQUIPMENT GROUND MUST BE MADE


BEFORE CONNECTING THE A.C. SUPPLY. IT IS ALSO ESSENTIAL THAT THE
MOTOR IS GROUNDED.

Note: The Alspa GD2000E and GD3000 ranges of inverters has been designed
to IEC specifications using SI units. In this manual approximate values for
inches, lbs, h.p. are given here for convenience.

D4.1 General Information

D4.1.1 Receipt of Equipment on Site

When the equipment arrives on site, unpack it carefully and inspect it for any sign of
damage. Check the complete consignment against the packing slip for any loss in
transit. If any damage or loss has occurred, contact CEGELEC immediately giving the
following details:
– A list of damaged or missing items.

– A description of damage.

– The order number or packing slip details.

D4.1.2 Identification of Drive Unit

Details of the type of drive unit, serial number, modification status and basic electrical
information are given on the identification label fixed to the front of the unit.

D4.1.3 Storage

If equipment delivered to site is not to be installed immediately:


– Re-pack it in its original packing material. If this is not possible it should be enclosed
in polythene sheet to protect it from the ingress of dust.
– Store it in a clean dry atmosphere, preferably at room temperature (The storage
temperature limits are -25o C to +70o C).

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page D-3

Print Home
Appendix D Alspa GD2000E

D4.2 Environment

To ensure trouble-free operation with minimum maintenance, the installation site


should fulfil the following requirements:
– The atmosphere should be clean and dust free, in particular it must be free from
corrosive vapours, water absorbent dusts and conductive dusts.
o o
– The ambient temperature should be in the range 0 C to 40 C, with no rapid
o
changes of temperature. At ambient temperatures above 40 C the continuous
output load current must be derated by 2% per oC up to a maximum of 50o C.
– The Relative Humidity should be in the range 5% to 95% (non condensing).

Where necessary, measures should be taken to prevent the ingress of metallic swarf
generated by process or maintenance activities. Where there is a risk of falling water, a
drip proof canopy should be mounted over the drive, to prevent water from entering the
drive.

D4.2.1 Altitude.

The normal operating altitude for the unit is up to 1000 m (3,300 ft) above sea level.
Above this, the drive should be derated by 7.3% per 1000 m (3,300 ft) up to a
maximum of 2000 m (6,600 ft).

D4.2.2 Disposal Instructions

Some Alspa GD2000E and GD3000 drives contain power electronic devices which may
contain beryllium oxide ceramic. Under normal circumstances they are not hazardous.
Do not grind or cut open these devices. Unserviceable units or parts must be disposed
of as hazardous waste. Do not incinerate.

D4.2.3 Special Tools and Equipment

A torque wrench is required.

D4.2.4 Heat Loss from Unit

To follow

D4.2.5 Acoustic Noise

The maximum acoustic noise output of the drive units is not more than 75 Db(A).

D4.2.6 Acoustic Noise at the Motor

Acoustic noise is generated at the motor as a consequence of the PWM switching of the
output power. The noise output and frequency depend on the PWM switching frequency
and the construction of the motor.

Page D-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix D

D4.2.7 Radio Frequency Emissions

GD2000E and GD3000 series drives do not contain RF filtering components. If it is


necessary to use shielded cables to meet RF emission requirements, then external line
output filters must be connected into the output cables.

D4.2.8 Susceptibility to Radio Frequency Interference

All GD2000E and GD3000 units are shielded from radio interference when the front
panels are closed. Care should be taken that no radio frequency transmissions (e.g.
from portable telephones) take place in the vicinity of the unit, when the front door is
open and the drive is powered up.

D4.2.9 Cooling and Ventilation

The Alspa GD2000E and GD3000 drives are air cooled. It is essential that adequate
clearance to allow a free flow of cooling air through the louvres at the top and bottom
of the unit is maintained at all times. Minimum clearances for ventilation are shown in
the following Figures D-4 .

D4.2.10 Access

Access to the front of the drive unit is required to operate the front panel controls.
Clearance to the front is required for the hinged front door which gives access to the
User terminations (see Figure D-4).

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page D-5

Print Home
Appendix D Alspa GD2000E

D4.3 Installing the Drive unit with 12-pulse unit

Figure D-4 Mounting dimensions

Page D-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix D

WARNING:

THESE DRIVE UNITS ARE HEAVY. TO PREVENT INJURY, SUITABLE


MECHANICAL LIFTING APPARATUS SHOULD BE USED.

The gland plate must be removed from the drive unit and fixed in to position on the
bottom of the 12-pulse unit. This allows cooling air to be drawn through the 12-pulse
unit by the drive unit fan.

D4.3.1 Preparation

Prior to mounting the drive unit and 12-pulse unit, relocate the gland plate as follows:
– Unscrew the six screws holding the gland plate at the base of the drive unit and
remove the gland plate. The screws should be retained.
– Position the gland plate on the base of the 12-pulse unit and fix in position using the
original screws.
D4.3.2 Mounting the Drive Unit and 12-pulse unit
– Mark out the mounting centres to the dimensions shown in Figure D-4.

– Drill 10 holes for the 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws.

– Insert the ten mounting screws and screw home leaving 6 to 8 mm (1/8" to 5/16")
protruding from the wall.
– Lift the 12-pulse adaptor into position and hang the unit on the four lower mounting
screws.
– Tighten the four 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws evenly.

– Lift the drive unit into position and hang the unit on the six upper mounting screws.

– Locate the drive unit on to the lip of the 12-pulse unit so that the drive unit drops into
position on top of the 12-pulse unit.
– Tighten the six 6 mm (1/4") mounting screws evenly.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page D-7

Print Home
Appendix D Alspa GD2000E

D4.4 Electrical Connections

WARNING

THE DC+ AND DC- TERMINALS ON THE POWER TERMINAL BLOCK CARRY A
DANGEROUS DC VOLTAGE (UP TO 800 V).

D4.4.1 Location of Electrical Connections

Figure D-5 Connecting the 12-pulse unit

The power input and output connections are located inside the drive and 12-pulse unit,
as shown in Figure D-5. The user control connections are located on the user
termination panel. The 12-pulse adaptor unit control terminals are located on a
terminal block (PL214) located inside the unit. All connections are accessible when the
hinged front panels are opened.

The Internal DC, Ground and 12-pulse unit control connections are located as shown
in Figure D-5.

Page D-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix D

The AC supply, motor and user control cables exit the drive unit through an aperture in
the base of the 12-pulse unit. For panel mounted drives, a cover plate is provided to
protect the cables as they exit the unit. This cover plate is fitted with grommets and does
not provide any restraint for the cables. The installer must provide adequate support for
the cables as they exit the unit to prevent the cables being pulled loose from their
terminations.

A cable gland box is available which secures the cables and prevents the ingress of dust
and moisture. This unit covers the cable aperture and is fixed with four screws.

D4.5 Torque Settings

All power terminals must be tightened to the correct torque loading, shown in the
Chapter 9 Table 9-1.

D4.6 Connecting the 12-pulse Unit

D4.6.1 Ground Connections

The drive frame ground ( ) must be connected to the ground stud of the 12-pulse unit
as shown in Figure D-5 ground with the cable provided. The ground stud (M10) of the
12-pulse unit must be connected to ground with a suitably rated cable.

D4.6.2 Internal DC Connections

Refer to Figure D-5


– Connect the DC+ cable on the 12-pulse unit to the DC+ terminal (M10) on the drive
frame, using the nuts and washers provided.
– Connect the RECT+ cable on the 12-pulse unit to the RECT+ terminal on the drive
frame, using the nuts and washers provided.
– Connect the DC- cable on the 12-pulse unit to the DC- terminal on the drive frame,
using the nuts and washers provided.
D4.6.3 12-Pulse Control Connections

Refer to Figure D-3 and proceed as follows:


– Locate PL210 on the rear of the control panel of the drive, and remove the link
connecting pins 3 and 4 of PL210.
– Connect PL210 and PL214 on the 12-pulse unit as shown.

Terminal block PL214 is suitable for wire sizes up to 1.5 mm2

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page D-9

Print Home
Appendix D Alspa GD2000E

D4.6.4 Input Power Supply Connections

Connect one set of input power cables to the R, S and T terminals (M10 stud terminals)
on the drive, and the phase shifted AC supply to the R2, S2 and T2 connections (M10
stud terminals) on the 12-pulse adaptor. See Figure D-5

The main input supply to the drive is not phase sensitive, but the phase rotation of the
two AC input supplies must be the same.

D4.6.5 Connecting the Motor

The motor frame must be connected to the ground () terminal of the drive by a suitably
rated ground cable.

Connect the motor to the U, V and W terminals. See Figure D-5. For normal forward
motor rotation the output follows the sequence U: V: W at the output terminals.

D4.6.6 User Control Connections (Drive)

The user control connections and the RS485 connections are connected to terminal
blocks on the User Termination Panel. See Chapter 9 Figure 9-16.

The user terminal blocks are suitable for cable sizes up to 2.5 mm2 (#14 awg).

D4.6.7 Segregation

The control connections are, in general, low voltage and low current signals. This
makes them inherently susceptible to interference from electromagnetic noise
generated by power cabling. Therefore, in all applications, the control wiring should
not be run directly alongside power wiring. Ideally separate trunking should be used to
run control wires, if this not possible, a separation of at least 300 mm (12") should be
maintained between the control wires and any power cables, wherever possible.

To minimise radio frequency emissions and interference input supply power cabling
should be routed separately from the output cabling to the motor.

D5 Commissioning
– Check that the drive and 12-pulse adaptor unit are connected in accordance with the
installation instructions.
– Ensure the two AC input supplies are within the tolerances specified in Chapter 2 and
are phase shifted by 30o.
– Carry out the commissioning checks detailed in Chapter 10.

– When the drive is energised and running check that the current drawn from each
phase of the two supplies is balanced.

Page D-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix E. Overload Ratings

DELTA Based Alspa GD2000E 1.1 Overload Ratings

E1 Introduction
The Alspa GD2000E range of modular drives are available with an overload factor of
1.1 with the option of either a standard or a large fan.

The timed overcurrent function trips the drive if the accumulated product of overload
current (ie. current above the drive full load current in P100) and time is equivalent to
110% of the current rating for a period of 60 seconds. The percentage of overload
remaining can be monitored by reading Parameter 17.

The continuous output currents with a 10% overload for 1 minute are shown in the
table below along with the part number of the relevant control module.
Continuous Output
Unit No. Current 10% Overload Control Module Part No.
For 1 Minute
GD2282E 385 A 30V6900/240
GD2377E 514 A 30V6900/250
GD2564E 740 A 30V6900/260
GD2754E 985 A 30V6900/270
GD2846E 1110 A 30V6900/280
GD21131E 1476 A 30V6900/290

To complement the 1.1 overload ratings a large fan is available along with its relevant
supply transformer the order codes of which are shown below.
Order Code Item
31V6900/10 DELTA Fan Unit Large
50Z0018/01 Transformer/Fan/Contactor 2 Fans
50Z0018/02 Transformer/Fan/Contactor 4 Fans
50Z0018/03 Transformer/Fan/Contactor 6 Fans

The following pages provide all the information required with examples provided to
calculate the rating of a GD2000E modular drive taking into account such factors as
supply voltage, supply frequency, altitude above sea level, ambient temperature,
overload required and a standard or a large fan.

E1.1 Re-Rating Procedure

The thermal current data used in these calculations is based on the following:

Altitude = 1000 m ASL (above sea level). Ambient = 40o C


Power Factor range = -0.9 to +0.9. Supply Frequency = 50 Hz

No allowance has been made for external ductwork pressure drops and other air flow
reductions.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page E-1

Print Home
Appendix E. Overload Ratings Alspa GD2000E

1. Select Overload Duty: 1.1 x overload for 60 seconds, or

1.5 x overload for 60 seconds

2. Select Standard or Large Fan

3. Select the operating voltage.


Two choices are available: 380/415 V and 460/480 V. The voltage is represented
in this way since IEC makes no distinction e.g. between 380 V and 415 V.

Read off the IEC thermal current rating from the table.
Note: this is not an actual drive current rating. It is a value on which re-rating
factors are applied to obtain the actual thermal rating. The actual drive
rating is obtained by comparing the thermal rating with the silicon limit
value and then taking the lower of the two.
For voltages in between 415 V and 460 V, linearly interpolate between the two to
obtain the thermal current value at the required voltage.

4. Apply re-rating factors to obtain the actual thermal rating:

I T actual = IT IEC x (re-rating factors)

The re-rating factors correct for actual ambient temperature, altitude and different
supply frequency.

The re-rating formula is as follows:

IT actual = IT IEC x (1.64 - 0.016T2) x (1.073 - 0.000073A2) x (0.8 + 0.004F2)

where:

T2 = Ambient Temperature, A2 = Altitude, F2 = Supply Frequency


Note: where the environmental conditions are the same as those on which the
IEC ratings have been based, then those re-rating factors, of course,
reduce to 1 and can be ignored.
5. Compare the actual thermal rating with the silicon limit rating based on the same
overload rating.

i.e. Compare IT actual and Isilicon limit

The actual drive rating is the lower of the two. The reason for this is explained in the
graph below.

Page E-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix E. Overload Ratings

Figure E-1 Current Rating v Derating factors

Two lines are shown: the Absolute Silicon Limit line, and the Thermal Limit line
(derating curve) dependent on factors such as altitude and temperature. The Thermal
Limit Line begins at a level much higher than the Absolute Silicon Limit line in order that
derating factors are not imposed sooner than they need to be. Example 4 below
displays this point.

Example 1

GD2846E fed from a 480 V 50 Hz supply at 2000m ASL with a 50o C ambient and
1.5 x overload.

What is the maximum continuous current capability?

1.The maximum possible rating is achieved at the lowest switching frequency i.e. 2 kHz.
Referring to the 480 V table with 1.5 x overload for 60 s and large cooling fan:

IEC Thermal Rating Value = 1057 A.

2. Derate for ambient temperature.


= 1057 x (1.64 - 0.016T2)
= 1057 x (1.64 - 0.016 x 50)
= 1057 x 0.84
= 888 A

3. Derate for altitude 2000m ASL


= 888 x (1.073 - 0.000073A2)
= 888 x (1.073 - 0.000073 x 2000)
= 888 x 0.927
= 823 A.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page E-3

Print Home
Appendix E. Overload Ratings Alspa GD2000E

4. Compare derated value against silicon limit for 1.5 x overload = 814 A.

In this case our calculated value of 823 Amps exceeds the absolute silicon limit of
814 A. Therefore the continuous current limit is 814 A.

The rating in this example is silicon limited.

Example 2

GD2282E fed from a 380 V 50 Hz supply at sea level with an ambient of 20o C and
1.1 x overload.

What is the maximum continuous current capability?

1. Assume the maximum possible current is required, so therefore choose the lowest
possible switching frequency i.e. 2 Khz. Refer to the 380/415V table, 1.1 x overload
with large cooling fan.

IEC Thermal Rating Value = 429 Amps.

2. Re-rate for ambient temperature.


= 429 x (1.64 - 0.016T2)
= 429 x (1.64 - 0.016 x 20)
= 429 x 1.32
= 566 Amps

3. Re-rate for sea level conditions.


= 566 x (1.073 - 0.000073A2)
= 566 x (1.073 - 0.000073 x 0)
= 566 x 1.073
= 607 Amps

4. Compare calculated value with absolute silicon limit at 1.1 x overload for 60 s i.e.
385 Amps.

In this case our calculated value of 607 Amps exceeds the absolute silicon limit of 385
Amps. Therefore our true current limit is 385 Amps.

The rating in this example is silicon limited.

Example 3

GD2377E fed from 460 V 60 Hz supply at 1500m ASL with an ambient of 40o C and
1.1 x overload.

What is the maximum continuous current capability?

1. Assume the maximum possible current is required, so therefore choose the lowest
possible switching frequency i.e. 2 kHz. Referring to the 480 V table and
1.1 x overload for 60s with the large cooling fan.

Page E-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix E. Overload Ratings

IEC Thermal Rating Value = 428 Amps.

2. Derate for 1500m ASL.


= 428 x (1.073 - 0.000073A2)
= 428 x (1.073 - 0.000073 x 1500)
= 428 x 0.96
= 410 Amps

3. Rerate for 60 Hz supply.


= 410 x (0.8 + 0.004F2)
= 410 x (0.8 + 0.004 x 60)
= 410 x 1.04
= 426 Amps.

4. Compare calculated value with absolute silicon limit at 1.1 x overload for 60 s i.e.
513 Amps.

In this case the calculated value is less than the silicon limit and therefore this value
must be used i.e. a continuous operating current of 426 amps.

In this example the GD2377E is thermally limited.

Example 4

By how much does a GD2282E need to be derated in an ambient temperature of


44o C? It is fed from a 415 V 50 Hz supply at 1000 m ASL with an overload of 1.5 x
for 60 s. A small fan is being used.

1. Referring to the 2 kHz switching frequency table, GD2282E, 1.5 x 60s, 380/415 V.

IEC Thermal Rating Value = 307 Amps.

2. De-rate for ambient temperature.


= 307 x (1.64 - 0.016T2)
= 307 x (1.64 - 0.016 x 44)
= 307 x 0.936
= 287

In this case the calculated rating is greater than the continuous silicon limit rating at
1.5 x 60 s of 282 Amps. Therefore no temperature derating is required in this case.

[For this drive, a simple calculation will show, ignoring altitude derating, that
temperature derating is not required until we reach 45C ambient.]

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page E-5

Print Home
Print
Page E-6
Switching Frequency P450 = 2 kHz

Continuous rating based on


Supply Volts 380/415 V 50 Hz 460/480 V 50 Hz 460/480 V 60 Hz Absolute silicon limit
silicon limit at overload
1.1 x 60s 1.5 * 60s
FanLoad Const Torque Fan Load Const Torque Fan Load Const Torque
Overload 1.1 x 1.1 x 1.5 x 1.5 x 1.1 x 1.1 x 1.5 x 1.5 x 1.1 x 1.1 x 1.5 x 1.5 x
Fan Type Std Large Std Large Std Large Std Large Std Large Std Large
Drive Size
GD2282E 331 429 307 307 322 418 299 367 335 435 311 382 424 385 282
Appendix E. Overload Ratings

GD2377E 340 440 315 386 331 428 307 376 344 445 319 391 564 513 376
GD2564E 636 825 590 723 619 803 574 705 644 835 597 733 814 740 543
GD2754E 653 845 605 741 635 822 589 721 660 855 613 750 1083 985 722
GD2846E 954 1237 814 1085 928 1205 861 1057 965 1253 895 1099 1221 1110 814
GD21131E 979 1268 908 1112 952 1234 883 1082 990 1283 918 1125 1624 1476 1083

Switching Frequency P450 = 4.5 kHz

Continuous rating based on


Supply Volts 380/415 V 50 Hz 460/480 V 50 Hz 460/480 V 60 Hz Absolute silicon limit
silicon limit at overload
1.1 x 60s 1.5 * 60s
FanLoad Const Torque Fan Load Const Torque Fan Load Const Torque

GD2000E Technical Manual


60 s Overload 1.1 x 1.1 x 1.5 x 1.5 x 1.1 x 1.1 x 1.5 x 1.5 x 1.1 x 1.1 x 1.5 x 1.5 x
Table E-1 Thermal current ratings v IEC current ratings

Fan Type Std Large Std Large Std Large Std Large Std Large Std Large
Drive Size
GD2282E 305 399 283 350 290 380 299 367 302 395 311 382 424 385 282
GD2377E 315 407 291 356 301 387 307 376 313 402 319 391 564 513 376
GD2564E 586 766 543 672 557 729 574 705 579 758 597 733 814 740 543
GD2754E 604 781 559 684 577 743 589 721 600 773 613 750 1083 985 722
GD2846E 880 1149 815 1007 836 1093 861 1057 869 1137 895 1099 1221 1110 814
GD21131E 906 1172 839 1026 866 1114 883 1082 901 1159 918 1125 1624 1476 1083

Issue 2 (9/96)
Alspa GD2000E

Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix E. Overload Ratings

E2 Assumptions For Current Ratings


Voltage : ±10% From Nominal
Ambient : 40o C Derating applies up to 50o C maximum.
Storage Temp. : -25o C to +70o C
Power Factor : Current Ratings apply for power factor in the range
-0.9 to +0.9.
Output Voltage : Ratings apply for inverter output voltage in the range
0 - 100%
Altitude : 1000 metres ASL Derating applies up to 2000 metres
maximum.
Frequency : 50 Hz ±1%
Power Interface Board : 20X4282

E3 Re-Rating Factors
Voltage : Linear Interpolate between 415 V and 480 V ratings
given in tables
Frequency : Rating at Alternative Frequency = Rating at 50 Hz x
(1+ (0.004 x (Actual Frequency - 50)))
Ambient : Current Rating at alternative ambient = Current
Rating at 40o C x (1 +(0.016 x (40o C - Alternative
Ambient in oC))
Altitude : Rating at Alternative Altitude = Rating at 1000 metres
x (1+((1000 - Alternative Altitude) x 0.000073))
Ductwork : No allowance has been made for external ductwork
pressure drops and associated air flow reductions.

Ratings are based on the thermal limits for a given IGBT/Heatsink/Fan Combination
without absolute silicon limit being considered.

Absolute Silicon Limits define the maximum permissible overload and must always be
respected.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page E-7

Print Home
Print
Page E-8
STANDARD FAN
Motor Frame Size Continuous Rating Continuous Rating Assumed Motor Assumed Motor
Shaft Power Shaft Power Shaft Power Shaft Power
380/415 V at 40o C at 40o C Power Factor Efficiency
1.5 x OL 4 Pole 380/415 V 50 Hz 460/480 V 60 Hz 380 V 50 Hz 415 V 50 Hz 460 V 60 Hz 480 V 60 Hz
Units kW Amps Amps kW kW kW kW
GD2282 150 282 282 0.89 94% 155 170 188 196
GD2377 168 315 319 0.89 94% 173 189 213 222
GD2564 280 543 543 0.89 94% 299 327 362 378
GD2754 315 605 613 0.89 94% 333 364 409 426
GD2846 450 814 814 0.89 94% 448 489 543 566
Appendix E. Overload Ratings

GD21131 500 908 918 0.89 94% 500 546 612 638
1.1 x OL
Units kW Amps Amps kW kW kW kW
GD2282 200 331 335 0.89 94% 182 199 223 233
GD2377 250 340 344 0.89 94% 187 204 229 239
GD2564 400 636 644 0.89 94% 350 382 429 448
Table F-2 Alspa GD2000E rating table

GD2754 450 653 660 0.89 94% 360 393 440 459
GD2846 500 954 965 0.89 94% 525 574 643 671
GD21131 600 979 990 0.89 94% 539 589 660 689
LARGE FAN
Motor Frame Size Continuous Rating Continuous Rating Assumed Motor Assumed Motor
Shaft Power Shaft Power Shaft Power Shaft Power
380/415 V at 40o C at 40o C Power Factor Efficiency

GD2000E Technical Manual


1.5 x OL 4 Pole 380/415 V 50 Hz 460/480 V 60 Hz 380 V 50 Hz 415 V 50 Hz 460 V 60 Hz 480 V 60 Hz
Units kW Amps Amps kW kW kW kW
GD2282 150 282 282 0.89 94% 155 170 188 196
GD2377 168 376 376 0.89 94% 207 226 251 262
GD2564 280 543 543 0.89 94% 299 327 362 378
GD2754 315 722 722 0.89 94% 398 434 481 502
GD2846 450 814 814 0.89 94% 448 489 543 566
GD21131 600 1083 1083 0.89 94% 596 651 722 753
1.1 x OL
Units kW Amps Amps kW kW kW kW
GD2282 200 385 385 0.89 94% 212 232 257 268
GD2377 250 440 445 0.89 94% 242 265 297 310
GD2564 400 740 740 0.89 94% 407 445 493 515
GD2754 450 845 855 0.89 94% 465 508 570 595
GD2846 600 1110 1110 0.89 94% 611 667 740 772

Issue 2 (9/96)
Alspa GD2000E

GD21131 750 1268 1283 0.89 94% 698 762 855 892

Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

Electromagnetic Compatibility

F1 Introduction

F1.1 European EMC Directive

The purpose of the European Union’s EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Directive,


89/336/EEC, is to prevent maloperation of equipment due to electromagnetic
disturbances. The maloperation may be due to excessive emissions or inadequate
immunity of equipment.

The essential protection requirements in Article 4 of the Directive state that “apparatus
shall be so constructed that:

(a) the electromagnetic disturbance it generates does not exceed a level allowing
radio and telecommunications equipment and other apparatus to operate
as intended;
(b) the apparatus has an adequate level of intrinsic immunity of electromagnetic
disturbance to enable it to operate as intended."
EMC legislation also exists in other parts of the world, but the details may vary. The
essential protection requirements must always be observed but, particularly for
emissions, the measures required will vary according to the environment of the
installation.

F1.2 EMC Standard

The appropriate EMC standard for drives is IEC 1800-3: Adjustable speed electrical
power drive systems - Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods. It
is expected that this will be harmonized and published by CENELEC as EN 61800-3.

According to the classification of IEC 1800-3, the Alspa GD2000E range of products
have been designed and specified as components for “restricted distribution” i.e. for
use by professional installers. Consequently, customers and users, separately or jointly,
need to have technical competence in the EMC requirements of the application of
drives.

F1.3 Industrial Environment

Due to the design of the GD2000E, providing that it is installed in accordance with
Section 9 of this manual, it is unlikely that it will suffer or cause any maloperation
relating to EMC in an industrial installation - Second Environment as specified in IEC
1800-3.

However, to further reduce the risk of maloperation and hence maximize the
operational integrity of an installed GD2000E with respect to EMC, it is strongly
recommended that the installation guidelines in this Appendix are followed as closely as
possible.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-1

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

Unless otherwise specified in this manual (e.g. where sensitive equipment is on the
same supply - see section F2.2.3), no EMC filters are necessary when using GD2000E
in the Second Environment.

F1.4 Public Low Voltage Network

When using a GD2000E in the First Environment category of IEC 1800-3 (public power
distribution network i.e. no transformer between the user’s installation and domestic
premises), optional EMC filters are available to suppress conducted radio-frequency
interference. For compliance with the limits for the first environment, both the
GD2000E and the filter must be installed as specified in this Appendix.

F1.5 Technical Notes

In this Appendix, some text which does not contain instructions but may aid
understanding is identified as “technical notes”.

F2 Compliance with EMC Requirements

F2.1 Immunity

If installed in accordance with the instructions in this manual, Alspa GD2000E will
comply with the immunity requirements of IEC 1800-3. In particular, this includes:

Electrostatic discharge IEC 1000-4-2 6 kV contact discharge


8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic field IEC 1000-4-3 20 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m
Electrical fast transients/burst IEC 1000-4-4 2 kV
Surge IEC 1000-4-5 1 kV line-line
2 kV line-ground.

All GD2000E units are shielded from radio interference when the front panels and (in
the case of modular drives) the cubicle doors are closed. Care should be taken that no
radio frequency transmissions (e.g. from portable telephones) take place in the vicinity
of the unit, when the front door is open and the drive powered up.

F2.1.1 Supply Voltage Distortion

GD2000E drives are immune to harmonics according to class 2 of IEC 1000-2-4 (total
voltage harmonic distortion = 8%).

GD2000E drives are immune to commutation notches according to immunity class B of


IEC 146-1-1 (notch depth = 40%).

GD2000E drives are immune to 2% voltage unbalance (IEC 1000-2-4 class 2).

The supply frequency range over which the drive can operate is listed in section 2.2.1.

Page F-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

F2.1.2 Voltage Changes, Dips and Interruptions

The voltage range over which the drive may operate is detailed in section 2.2.1 of this
manual.

If the supply voltage is removed or it drops below the operating voltage range, the drive
will trip on under-volts after a time. The length of this time is dependent on the loading
of the motor. Once the drive has tripped, if the supply voltage drops below a lower
value and does not recover within a certain time, the SMPS within the drive may stop
and the control pcb will then become unpowered. This length of time is dependent on
the drive rating.

If the supply voltage returns to normal while the drive is tripped on under-volts, the
drive will remain tripped until it is reset, see section 11.5. If an auto-restart facility is
required, under-volts auto-reset may be enabled, see section 7.5.7 and 7.5.8. If the
SMPS has stopped before power is restored, the drive will go to its normal initial
powered up state.
WARNING

WHEN THE DRIVE IS CONFIGURED TO AUTO-RESTART, IT IS POSSIBLE FOR


THE MOTOR TO START ROTATING WITH NO OPERATOR COMMAND. IF THE
DRIVE IS CONFIGURED TO AUTO-RESTART, IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT ALL
NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL ARE
TAKEN.

F2.1.3 Power Frequency Magnetic Fields

GD2000E drives are immune to field strengths of 30 A/m (38 µT, 0.38 Gauss)
continuously and 300 A/m (380 µT, 3.8 Gauss) short term, according to IEC 1000-4-8.

F2.2 Radio-Frequency Emissions

F2.2.1 Nature of Radio-Frequency Emissions from Drives

The principal source of radio-frequency emissions from a GD2000E is conducted


emissions due to the fast switching edges of the pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage
which is applied to the motor.

TECHNICAL NOTE
Due to the inductance of the motor windings, a PWM waveform of a few kHz will
produce a nearly sinusoidal current waveform in the motor. However, the motor
windings contain stray capacitance to the motor frame. Therefore, the fast voltage
edges of the PWM waveform cause some high-frequency current to flow from the
drive into the motor frame. If this high-frequency current does not have a clearly
defined return path, it can return by unexpected routes, possibly causing disturbances
to other equipment.

If an EMC filter is fitted and the other instructions in this appendix are followed, the
high-frequency current will return to the drive via the filter rather than via the mains
supply.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-3

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

If no EMC filter is fitted, the emissions (measured using a “quasi-peak” detector) are
typically 115 dBµV at 150 kHz, dropping to about 60 dBµV at 30 MHz. The correct
installation of a filter will reduce the emissions by up to 50 dB, the greatest reduction
occurring near 150 kHz.

F2.2.2 First environment

IEC 1800-3 defines the First Environment as the environment in which equipment is
directly connected to a public low voltage supply which also supplies domestic
premises. Therefore, there will be no galvanic isolation between the 3-phase input
terminals of the drive and the mains supply sockets in the neighbouring domestic
premises, i.e. the drive and the domestic premises are fed from the same supply
transformer. This type of supply is frequently used to supply small commercial and light
industrial premises.

If drives are installed in this environment, the filters described in this appendix must be
used. It is assumed that the supply network is a TN or TT system according to the
definitions in IEC 364 i.e. the neutral of the supply is grounded somewhere in the
supply network.

F2.2.3 Second environment

IEC 1800-3 defines the Second Environment as the environment in which there is one
or more supply transformers isolating the drive from domestic premises. IEC 1800-3
does not require the use of filters in this environment.

TECHNICAL NOTE
Isolating transformers provide significant attenuation of conducted radio-frequency
interference. Therefore, emissions from drives installed in this environment are very
unlikely to disturb equipment in domestic premises. Other equipment installed in an
industrial environment which has the correct immunity for this environment will not be
disturbed by emissions from drives.

Occasionally, very sensitive equipment (e.g. thermocouples, pH meters etc with long
unscreened leads, radio-controlled equipment) may be in use in the same environment
as the drive. If it is not practical to improve the immunity of such equipment, it may be
necessary to filter the emissions from all power electronic equipment, including drives.
Alternatively the drives and the sensitive equipment may be fed from separate
transformers.

F2.2.4 Supply Networks in which the Neutral is Not Grounded


WARNING

IF THE NEUTRAL OF THE SUPPLY SYSTEM IS NOT CONNECTED TO GROUND


SOMEWHERE IN THE SUPPLY SYSTEM, THE FILTERS DESCRIBED IN THIS
APPENDIX MUST NOT BE USED. THE USE OF THESE FILTERS IN SUCH A
SYSTEM WOULD CAUSE DANGER.

In the following supply systems, the neutral of the supply is not grounded and the filters
described in this appendix must not be used:

Page F-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

(1) Ungrounded Network - the neutral is either isolated from ground or


connected to ground through a high impedance (this is known as an IT
network according to the definitions in IEC 364);
(2) “Line Grounded” or “Corner Grounded” network - one of the three phases is
grounded and the other two phases are at the line-line voltage with respect
to ground (used in some countries particularly the USA).
Alspa GD2000E drives rated up to 12 Amps with ordering codes ending A451 contain
internal filters and must not be used on these supplies. Alspa GD2000E drives with
ordering codes ending A421 should be used instead.
TECHNICAL NOTE
EMC filters contain capacitors to ground. If an EMC filter is connected in either of
these two networks, the voltage rating of these capacitors may be exceeded.

Ungrounded networks are used in certain industries to permit continued operation


(with alarm) in the presence of a single ground fault.

In some countries, safety regulations prohibit the use of high leakage current
equipment, such as these filters, in ungrounded networks.

If drives are used in such a network, all other equipment connected to this network must
have sufficient immunity for use in this environment.

F2.2.5 12-Pulse Drives

“12-pulse” drives are used to reduce the harmonic emissions (see F2.3, Harmonic
Emissions).

If a 12-pulse drive is used in the second environment or has an isolating transformer,


then EMC filters are not required.

If further reduced radio-frequency emissions are required, one filter should be placed
on the input side of each rectifier. To ensure correct operation, the requirements of
CEGELEC Industrial Controls application note T1541 must be followed.
TECHNICAL NOTE
To achieve a good reduction of harmonics from a 12-pulse system, there must be
good current sharing between the two rectifier bridges. The filter ratings are based on
the assumption that this current sharing has been achieved.

If EMC filters are fitted on a 12-pulse drive with an isolating transformer, the star-point
of the star secondary of the transformer must be grounded.

F2.2.6 Other emission standards

The following standards contain the same emission limits as the First Environment
emission limits of IEC 1800-3:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-5

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

EN 50081-2 Generic emission standard for the


industrial environment.*
EN 55011 / CISPR 11 class A group 1 Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM)
radio-frequency apparatus.
EN 55022 / CISPR 22 class A Information technology equipment (ITE).
* Note: This standard does not contain conducted radio-frequency emission limits
for equipment rated greater than 1000 V. Therefore, if a drive (or group
of drives) has a dedicated isolating transformer with a primary voltage
greater than 1000 V, this transformer may be regarded as part of the
drive and EMC filters are not then required.
Certain aspects of EN 55014 / CISPR 14 (household and similar) are inappropriate for
drives such as GD2000E.

F2.3 Harmonic Emissions

The harmonic emissions produced by GD2000E drives are significantly lower than the
emissions from many drives of this type.

TECHNICAL NOTE
If a rectifier is directly connected to the d.c. link capacitors of a drive, the input current
will consist of an impulse of current at the peak of the supply voltage waveform. This
impulse has a high harmonic content and places extra stress on the d.c. link
capacitors. If an inductor is introduced between the rectifier and the d.c. link
capacitors, the input current become less impulsive, resulting in an improvement in
the harmonic content of the current. The d.c. link inductors in the GD2000E drives
are of larger values than those in many drives of this type, resulting in a better input
current waveform.

The following table lists the typical harmonic currents in the mains supply produced by
a GD2000E. They are expressed as a percentage of the rms input current and are
based on a drive running at rated load (rms input currents are given in Table 5-1). The
harmonics are affected to some extent by the reactance of the a.c. supply. Two
conditions are given, 0.4% reactance (as in IEC 1800-3) and 5% (representing
operation with a typical transformer of rating equal to the drive rating).
Harmonic current as a percentage of rms current
Supply Fundamental
5th % 7th % 11th % 13th % 17th % 19th % 23rd % 25th %
reactance %
0.4% 95.0 25.4 13.0 8.3 5.9 4.9 3.9 3.4 2.8
5% 96.4 24.1 8.3 6.1 3.8 2.3 1.9 1.0 0.9

A 12-pulse option is available for GD2104E, and larger drives. This will give a
significant reduction in the 5th, 7th, 17th and 19th harmonic currents. The degree of
reduction of these harmonics will depend on the way that the 12-pulse system is
installed. For further details, see CEGELEC Industrial Controls application note T1541.

F3 Installation Instructions for Compliance with EMC Requirements


These instructions are supplementary to the installation instructions in section 9 of this
manual. The instructions in section 9 must always be followed.

Page F-6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

F3.1 Additional Safety Requirements for Filters

WARNING

THE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGES.

THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE ENCLOSED WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS


INSTALLED AND BEFORE THE EQUIPMENT IS ENERGISED.

WARNING

HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT FLOWS TO GROUND WHEN THIS EQUIPMENT IS


ENERGISED.

GROUND CONNECTIONS TO THE EMC FILTERS, THIS EQUIPMENT AND TO


THE MOTOR(S) POWERED BY THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED AT
ALL TIMES.

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH ENERGY LEVELS EXIST WITHIN THE EMC FILTER
AND THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE PRESENT FOR 5 MINUTES AFTER THE
EQUIPMENT IS ISOLATED FROM ALL ENERGY SOURCES.

THE INPUT SUPPLY MUST BE ISOLATED AND ALL MOTORS CONNECTED TO


THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE AT A STANDSTILL FOR A PERIOD OF 5 MINUTES
BEFORE ACCESS TO THE EMC FILTERS OR THE EQUIPMENT IS ALLOWED.

Local safety regulations and, in particular, the safety regulations for equipment with
high leakage current, must be observed. If there is a conflict between safety rules and
the installation instructions below, the safety rules must be observed.

Neither the filter nor the drive may be subjected to high voltage insulation tests.

RCDs/Ground Fault Protection

Drives and their EMC filters (where fitted) produce high leakage currents (> 3.5 mA).
Therefore an RCD (earth leakage circuit breaker/ground fault detection) may produce
nuisance trips if connected to the a.c. line (mains) input.

If ground fault protection is required, then a core-balanced current transformer and a


ground fault relay may be used. The relay should have adjustable sensitivity. If the
relay is only required to protect against ground faults in the motor, the current
transformer could be placed on the cable to the motor. If the relay is required to
protect against ground faults in the drive and motor, the current transformer could be
placed between the filter and the drive.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-7

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

F3.2 Cubicle Layout

Figure F-1 Power Circuit

The power circuit of a drive system is shown in Figure F-1. In a particular system,
certain components may be omitted.

If necessary to achieve compliance with the segregation rules below, the input reactor
may be placed between the EMC filter and the GD2000E, instead of in the position
shown in Figure F-1.

All equipment in the cubicle must be mounted directly on the same metal back sheet as
the drive. If this is not possible, then the extra equipment must be mounted on a metal
sheet which has a continuous metal-metal contact to this back sheet. Connecting metal
sheets to each other by wire or braid is not adequate.

To ensure a good metal-to-metal contact, the drive and filter must be mounted on the
metal back sheet. The metal sheet should preferably be plated but unpainted. If the
metal sheet has been painted, the paint must be removed from around and under all
the screws, to allow metal-to-metal contact.

All cables in the cubicle should be mounted as close as possible to the metal back sheet
and preferably within 50 mm (2"). Cables between items on different metal sheets
bonded to each other should be routed close to the metal back sheets and not through
mid-air.

If required due to space limitations in the cubicle, the filters for drives up to and
including GD2077E, may be mounted behind the drive. In this case, the installer must
provide a metal mounting bracket for the drive. This bracket must be capable of

Page F-8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

supporting the weight of the drive. The bracket must provide a good metal-to-metal
contact between the drive and the metal back sheet, so the requirements for mounting
the bracket in the cubicle and the drive on the bracket are the same as for mounting
the drive directly on the cubicle back sheet. To allow adequate ventilation for the filter,
the clearances shown in Figure F-2 must be observed.

Figure F-2 Ventilation requirements for filter behind drive

Ventilation requirements for filter behind drive

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-9

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

F3.3 Cabling and Segregation

F3.3.1 Cabling and Segregation Within Cubicle

Figure F-3 Segregation Rules in cubicle

Figure F-3 illustrates the segregation rules within the cubicle, but does not indicate a
preference for any particular layout. The numbers in the Figure are explained as
follows:
(1) The cables and components between the a.c. line input and the input of the
EMC filter must be kept at least 300 mm (12") away from cables and
components on the drive side of the filter.
(2) Cables and components on the a.c. line input to the EMC filter must be kept
at least 300 mm (12") away from the cables and components which are
connected to the d.c. link or between the drive and the motor. The areas
near these two types of cable are shown with different types of shading in
Figure F-3.
(3) An output line reactor (if fitted) must be kept at least 300 mm (12") away from
the input line reactor (if fitted) and from the EMC filter. If the input line
reactor is on the input side of an EMC filter, the distance between this
reactor and an output reactor must be increased to 500 mm (20").

Page F-10 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

Additionally, reactors must be mounted such that their axes are mutually perpendicular
or separated by a minimum 300 mm (12").

Control and signal cables, including serial communications cables, must be kept at
least 300 mm (12") away from any power cables and components.

If the above segregation distances between cables and components cannot be


achieved, metal barriers should be placed between the groups of cables and
components. The metal barriers should be connected to the cubicle back sheet.
However, this technique cannot be used to reduce the distances between reactors.

Where cables of different types must cross each other, they should cross at right angles.

Subject to the above segregation rules, cables should be kept as short as possible.

Similar segregation rules apply for other equipment which may be mounted in the
cubicle. The installation instructions for that equipment should be consulted.

F3.3.2 Conductor Sizes

The cables to the filter must be the same size as the power connections to the drive -
see section 9.2 of this manual. The ground conductors should be the same size as the
other power conductors unless local safety regulations, in particular the regulations for
equipment with high leakage current, dictate a larger size.

F3.3.3 Cabling and Segregation External to Cubicle

In the wiring external to the cubicle, three types of cable can be identified:
(1) mains supply cable;
(2) motor cable;
(3) control and signal cables including serial communications cables.
These groups of wiring must be kept at least 300 mm (12") away from each other. If
they are in metal conduits or trunking, then each group must be in a separate conduit
or trunking.

F3.4 Contactor Suppression

Contactor coil suppression is strongly recommended, even if the contactor is outside the
drive cubicle. If the contactor is inside the drive cubicle, its coil must be suppressed.
Suppression components should be sized to match the rating of the contactor. Suitable
components can be supplied by CEGELEC on request.

On drives GD2005E to GD2016E, Digital Output 3 is an open collector output. This


output contains a free-wheel diode back to the 24 V supply, so that it may drive a small
relay without additional suppression (see section 2.1.2 for the rating of this digital
output). R-C suppression must not be fitted on any coil supplied from the
open-collector output.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-11

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

F3.5 Motor Cable

The motor cable must be shielded and the shield bonded solidly to both the drive
cubicle and the motor. If this is not done properly, an EMC filter on the drive input will
not be fully effective.

The motor cable must be:


(1) steel wire armoured
or:

(2) enclosed in a conduit or metallic trunking which contains no other cables.


All three phases must be enclosed by the same armour or conduit. If the current rating
of a high-power motor is beyond the capabilities of a single armoured 3-core cable,
several 3-core armoured cables should be connected in parallel, with each cable
carrying all three phases.

The armouring or conduit must be continuous throughout its length. The armour or
conduit must be connected to the motor by a 360o metal cable gland. A “pig-tail”
(short piece of wire linking the shield to the motor or cubicle) is not an acceptable
alternative to a 360o gland.

The armour or conduit must be connected to the cubicle back sheet by the use of a
360o metal cable gland in a glanding plate or by a metal saddle-clip. The gland plate
or saddle-clip must be bolted directly to the back sheet and not spaced off by pillars or
brackets. Again, the use of a pig-tail is not permitted.

If local safety regulations do not accept the grounding of the motor via the cable
armour or shield alone, an armoured or shielded four-core cable should be used. The
fourth core must then be connected both to the drive cubicle and the motor frame. The
armour or shield must still be connected at both ends as described above.

While the motor already has a connection to ground via the drive and the motor cable,
the motor frame and the ground connection of the driven plant should be electrically
connected to each other.

TECHNICAL NOTE
This “equipotential bonding” conductor between the motor and the driven equipment:

(1) prevents voltages hazardous to personnel being developed between the


motor and the driven equipment and
(2) prevents current flowing through the shaft bearings and causing their
premature failure.

Minimizing the length of the motor cable will generally reduce the radio-frequency
emissions.

Page F-12 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

Circulating currents

In some installations, equipment of much higher power rating than the drive may cause
large potential differences between the ground at the drive cubicle and the ground at
the motor. Grounding of both ends of the motor cable would then result in large
currents flowing in the armour or conduit. If this problem is likely to occur then
precautions such as the following must be taken.
(1) Connect a “potential compensation” cable in parallel with the motor cable.
This cable is of much larger cross-sectional area than the motor cable, so
the induced current flows through this rather than through the shield of the
motor cable.
(2) As an alternative, ground the armour/conduit and any fourth core at one end
only. The armour/conduit and fourth core should be indirectly grounded at
the other end via a 1 µF capacitor. The capacitor must be of at least
X2-class safety rating, for example Rifa PHE 820EF7100M. This option
should be used if safety rules prevent the grounding of both ends of the
motor cable.

TECHNICAL NOTE
The connection of a capacitor in series with the cable shield will introduce a “pig-tail”
connection. This will give some degradation of the shielding performance of the
shield. However, it may be the best that can be achieved in the circumstances.

F3.6 Control Connections

With the exception of relay outputs, all control connections on the GD2000E are
referenced to protective ground within the drive and are not isolated. All cable shields
must be connected to the appropriate Shield/Screen terminals on the drive’s User
Termination Panel. The Shield/Screen terminals are connected to protective ground
within the drive.

The 0 V wires inside the various cables must be connected to the appropriate 0 V
terminals on the drive. The various 0 V connections (A0V, B0V) should not be confused
with each other or with the shield connections.

F3.6.1 Shielding of Cables

The following cables must be shielded:


(1) analogue inputs and outputs;
(2) RS 485 serial link;
(3) RS 232 serial link;
The shield of the RS232 serial link cable must be connected to the metal backshell of
the D-type connector and not to the connector pins. The shields of the other shielded
control cables must be connected to the appropriate “Shield” terminals on the
GD2000E termination panel. Connecting the shield to a ground/earth bar in the
cubicle is not an acceptable alternative.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-13

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

The shields of shielded cables must be continuous throughout their length. If the
shielded cable is contained within an overall armoured cable or conduit, the armour or
conduit should be connected to the cubicle back sheet in the same manner as the
motor cable.

While the shield of a shielded cable must be connected to the “Shield” terminal on the
drive, the correct connection for the shield at the other end of the cable will depend on
the nature of the equipment connected there. The user instructions for the associated
equipment should be consulted. In the absence of such information, the following
guidelines may be used:
(1) If the input or output of the associated equipment is isolated from ground and
has very low capacitance to ground; the shield should generally be
grounded at the GD2000E end only.
(2) If the input or output of the associated equipment is not isolated; the cable
shield must be grounded at both ends.

If it is necessary to disconnect one end of the cable shield to prevent disturbance


current from other equipment flowing through the shield, then galvanic
isolation must also be provided for all of the wires inside the cable.
Proprietary analogue or digital galvanic isolation units should be used for
this purpose. The break in the shield must be at the same point as the
galvanic isolation.

(3) Some equipment contains inputs and outputs which are galvanically isolated
but in which there is some stray capacitance to ground. In this case, the
associated equipment may provide a shield connection in which the shield
is capacitively connected to ground.

F3.7 Drive not in a Fully Enclosed Cubicle

If a drive is not installed in a fully enclosed cubicle, it is the responsibility of the installer
to take any additional safety precautions which may be necessary. In particular, the
EMC filters are not suitable for mounting outside a cubicle, so the installer will have to
provide an additional enclosure for the filter.

The filter and drive must still be mounted on the same metal sheet and the motor cable
armour/conduit must be directly bonded to this metal sheet.

The cable between the EMC filter and the drive must be shielded or armoured, with the
shield or armour bonded to both the drive and the filter enclosure. At the drive end of
the motor cable, the shield or armour must be directly bonded to the drive and not just
to the metal sheet which supports the drive.

F4 EMC Filters
If EMC filters are required, the filters below should be used. They are suitable for use
on supplies up to 480 V nominal in which the neutral is grounded (i.e. TN or TT system
according to IEC 364). For correct performance, they must be installed in accordance
with the instructions in this manual and the motor cable should be less than 100 m
(328 ft) in length.

Page F-14 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

Filters for 6-pulse drives are listed in Table F-1 and F-2 and filters for 12-pulse drives
are listed in Table F-3 and F-4.

For 12-pulse, one filter is placed on the input side of each rectifier bridge. The filter
ratings in Table F-3 and F-4 are based on the assumption that there is good current
sharing between the two input bridges. To ensure this current sharing (and therefore
achieve the reduction of supply harmonics which 12-pulse can offer), the requirements
of CEGELEC Industrial Controls application note T1541 must be followed.

Table F-1 Filters for 6-pulse Drives (1.5x Overload)

Filter CEGELEC
Drive Quantity Power loss W Weight kg (lbs) Leakage mA
Order code
GD2005E 1 78899/700 1 2.6 4.8 (10.6) 35
GD2008E 1 78899/700 1 2.6 4.8 (10.6) 35
1
GD2012E 78899/700 1 2.6 4.8 (10.6) 35
GD2016E 78899/700 1 2.6 4.8 (10.6) 35
GD2032E 78899/702 1 7.7 9.5 (20.9) 73
GD2040E 78899/702 1 12 9.5 (20.9) 73
GD2052E 78899/702 2 12 20 9.5 (20.9) 73
GD2077E 78899/702 2 12 44 9.5 (20.9) 73
78899/655 1 25 9.5 (20.9) 217
GD2104E
or 78899/676 1 165 10 (22) 250
78899/656 1 49 13 (29) 217
GD2145E
or 78899/677 1 216 16 (35) 400
78899/657 1 70 28 (62) 259
GD2207E
or 78899/678 1 336 40 (88) 400
GD2282E 78899/657 1 70 28 (62) 259
or 78899/678 1 336 40 (88) 400
GD2377E 78899/658 1 60 45 (99) 300
or 78899/680 1 480 40 (88) 400
GD2564E 78899/659 1 80 45 (99) 300
or 78899/684 1 720 50 (110) 500
GD2754E 78899/660 1 90 140 (309) 300
or 78899/686 1 360 110 (242) 600
GD2846E 78899/660 1 90 140 (309) 300
or 78899/687 1 405 120 (264) 600
GD21131E 78899/661 1 140 140 (309) 300

1
Alspa GD2000E drives with ordering codes ending A451 contain internal filters. If a drive with ordering code
ending A451 is used, the filters listed in this table are not required.
2
Output inductor for GD2052E and GD2077E :To ensure full compliance of GD2052E and GD2077E , an out-
put inductor should be used. Two ferrite cores CEGELEC order code 45001/100 should be taped to each other
with non-metallic tape or cable ties. All three phases of the motor cable should then be passed through the cores
twice, as shown below. All three phases should be passed through in the same sense. The cable armour and
any ground connection should not pass through the ferrite cores.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-15

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

Figure F-4 Output Inductor

Table F-2 Filters for 6-pulse Drives (1.1x overload)

Filter Power loss Weight kg Leakage mA


Drive Quantity
CEGELEC Order code W (each) (lbs) (each) (each)
78899/656 1 49 13 (29) 217
GD2104E
or 78899/677 1 216 16 (35) 400
78899/657 1 70 28 (62) 259
GD2145E
or 78899/678 1 336 40 (88) 400
78899/657 1 70 28 (62) 259
GD2207E
or 78899/678 1 336 40 (88) 400
78899/658 1 60 45 (99) 300
GD2282E
or 78899/680 1 480 40 (88) 400
78899/659 1 80 45 (99) 300
GD2377E
or 78899/683 1 660 50 (110) 500
78899/660 1 140 140 (309) 300
GD2564E
or 78899/686 1 360 110 (242) 600
78899/661 1 140 140 (309) 300
GD2754E
or 78899/688 1 450 120 (264) 600
GD2846E 78899/661 1 140 140 (309) 300

Page F-16 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

Table F-3 Filters for 12-pulse Drives (1.5x Overload)

Filter Power loss Weight kg Leakage mA


Drive Quantity
CEGELEC Order code W (each) (lbs) (each) (each)
78899/654 2 23 9.5 (20.9) 217
GD2104E
or 78899/675 2 120 10 (22) 250
78899/654 2 23 9.5 (20.9) 217
GD2145E
or 78899/675 2 120 10 (22) 217
78899/655 2 25 9.5 (20.9) 217
GD2207E
or 78899/676 2 165 10 (22) 250
78899/656 2 49 13 (29) 217
GD2282E
or 78899/677 2 216 16 (35) 400
78899/657 2 70 28 (62) 259
GD2377E
or 78899/678 2 336 40 (88) 400
78899/658 2 60 45 (99) 300
GD2564E
or 78899/679 2 420 40 (88) 400
78899/658 2 60 45 (99) 300
GD2754E
or 78899/681 2 540 50 (110) 500
78899/659 2 80 45 (99) 300
GD2846E
or 78899/682 2 600 50 (110) 500
78899/660 2 90 140 (309) 300
GD21131E
or 78899/685 2 315 110 (242) 600

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-17

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

Table F-4 Filters for 12-pulse Drives (1.1x Overload)

Filter Power loss Weight kg Leakage mA


Drive Quantity
CEGELEC Order code W (each) (lbs) (each) (each)
78899/654 2 23 9.5 (20.9) 217
GD2104E
or 78899/675 2 120 10 (22) 250
78899/655 2 25 9.5 (20.9) 217
GD2145E
or 78899/676 2 165 10 (22) 250
78899/656 2 49 13 (29) 217
GD2207E
or 78899/677 2 216 16 (35) 400
78899/657 2 70 28 (62) 259
GD2282E
or 78899/678 2 336 40 (88) 400
78899/658 2 60 45 (99) 300
GD2377E
or 78899/679 2 420 40 (88) 400
78899/658 2 60 45 (99) 300
GD2564E
or 78899/681 2 540 50 (110) 500
78899/659 2 80 45 (99) 300
GD2754E
or 78899/684 2 720 50 (110) 500
78899/660 2 90 140 (309) 300
GD2846E
or 78899/685 2 315 110 (242) 600
78899/660 2 90 140 (309) 300
GD21131E
or 78899/687 2 405 120 (264) 600

Page F-18 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

F4.1 Dimensions of Filters

The dimensions of the filters are given below.

Figure F-6 Mains Filter 78899/700

Figure F-5 Mains Filter 78899/702

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-19

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

A B C D E F G H I K L M N P Q R S T U V

510 180 115 360 470 156


78899/656
(20.1") (7.1") (4.5)" (14.2") (18.5") (6.1")
4 25 30 16 9
(0.16) (1.0") (1.2") (0.6") (0.4") M10
700 260 530 660 220
78899/657 130
(27.6") (10.2") (20.9") (26.0") (0.9")
(5.1")

65 109
78899/658
(2.6") (4.3")
700 300 150 250 200 280 2 20 790 87.5 20 9
M5 M16 80 40 90 235 75
(27.6") (11.8") (5.9") (9.8") (7.9") (11.0") (0.08") (0.79") (31.1") (3.44") (0.8") (0.35") 105
78899/659 (3.15") (1.6") (3.5") (9.3") (3.0")
(4.1")

78899/660
556 430 265 360 150 400 1.5 25 680 135 25 13 122 85 160 320 90 160
M6 M20
78899/661 (21.9") (16.9") (10.4") (14.2") (5.9") (15.7") (0.06") (1.0") (26.8") (5.3") (1.0") (0.5") (4.8") (3.3") (6.3") (12.6") (3.5") (6.3")

Connector Sizes
Filter Max. Cable Size
78899/654 25 mm2 or AWG3 cable
78899/655 50 mm2 or AWG1/0 cable
78899/656 95 mm2 or AWG4/0 cable
78899/657 150 mm2 or AWG6/0 cable

Figure F-7 Filter Dimensions

Page F-20 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility

Amp A B C D E F G H I
78899/675 80 420 350 15 190 6.5 400 100 130 375
78899/676 110 (16.5") (13.8") (0.6") (7.5") (0.26") (15.7") (3.9") (5.1") (14.8")

Figure F-8 Filter Dimensions

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page F-21

Print Home
Appendix F. Electromagnetic Compatibility Alspa GD2000E

Amp A B C D E F G H I
460 340 15 200 6.5 490 145 170 400
78899/677 180
(18.1") (13.4") (0.6") (7.9") (0.26") (19.3") (5.7") (6.7") (15.7")
78899/678 280
740 540 20 270 10.5 740 200 210 640
78899/679 350
(29.1") (21.3") (0.8") (10.6") (0.4") (29.1") (7.9") (8.3") (25.2")
78899/680 400
78899/681 450
78899/682 500 824 640 20 400 10 840 200 320 740
78899/683 550 (32.4") (25.2") (0.8") (15.7") (0.4") (33.1") (7.9") (12.6") (29.1")

78899/684 600
78899/685 700
78899/686 800 884 700 20 450 12 900 250 350 800
78899/687 900 (34.8") (27.6") (0.8") (17.7") (0.5") (35.4") (9.8") (13.8") (31.5")

78899/688 1000

Figure F-9 Filter Dimensions

Page F-22 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix G. Firmware History

Firmware History

Firmware issue 0.16

First production GD2000.

Firmware issue 0.18

Parameter 20 Motor I2T remaining added. Parameters 166, 169 and 172 four options
added:

18 - Selected control source is the same as P184


19 - Selected Control source is not the same as P184
20 - Selected reference source is the same as P185
21 - Selected reference source is not the same as P185.
P184 Control source indicator, options as P11. P185 Reference source indicator.,
options as P12 except no zero option.

P127 - ‘Backup control expected’ added

P651 options 5 and 6 added

P11 option 7 added

P118 option 7 added

P691, P692, P693 and P694 added.

P12 option 12 added

P119 option 12 added

P695, P696, P697 and P698 added.

New Parameters added to ESP pages

Page 1 P20, Page 4 P127, Page 6 P184 and P185 Page 14, P474, 475 and 476, Page
21 (new page P690 to P698.) P474 and P475 added. P476 added

Firmware Issue 0.20

P478 ‘Printer driver’ added P203 option 5 ‘Printer’ added P479 ‘Frequency multiplier
added.

New parameters added to ESP pages and new page 14

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page G-1

Print Home
Appendix G. Firmware History Alspa GD2000E

Firmware Issue 0.22

Remote trip reset feature added.

P350 Options 3 and 4 added.

Parameter 450 - PWM switching frequency - additional settings for larger drives.

Parameter 480 - Motor Stability Gain added.

Parameter 481 - Motor Stability Time Constant added.

Firmware Issue 0.24

Overhaul avoidance trigger made less sensitive.

Current clipping clocked at 10 kHz.

German text option for enhanced keypad added.

Parameter 477 - Keypad Text Language - new parameter added to allow keypad
language to be selected. (French text not yet available).

Firmware Issue 0.26

Possible corruption of PIB serial E2 PROM introduced by Issue 0.22 firmware, corrected.

Firmware Issue 0.28

Inhibit Frequency Multiplier changed to operate in the correct sense.

Transfer to RUN/STOP control to hard-wire inputs now seamless.

Increased range for motor volts, current and frequency.

Motor volts and frequency no longer stop to edit.

Parameters 21 and 22 - real and Imaginary Current added.

Parameter 155 and 160 - Analog Output Signal - New options 12 to 16 added.

Active Reference available as Analog Output

Parameters 166, 169, 172 - Option 22 ‘pre-charge complete’ added.

Parameter 403 - DC Injection Delay added.

Parameter 482 - Synchro-start scan rate added.

Page G-2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Appendix G. Firmware History

Firmware issue 0.36

Parameters 7, 483, 484, 485 and 486 added.

Firmware issue 0.38

No functional changes.

Firmware issue 0.40

Parameter 999 ( System Configuration for compatibilty with DELTA based drives) added.

Current fed start operates with correct ramp rates when in reverse.

Auto-locking disabled when setup review (P476) is enabled.

Firmware issue 0.42

Parameter 186, 187 and 188 added (Hoist brake Control). ‘Hoist Brake
Control’Option 23 ‘Hoist Brake Control’ added to P166, P169 and P72.

Firmware issue 0.44

Parameter 998 ‘duty Type’ to allow selection of 1.1x and 1.5x overload ratings.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Page G-3

Print Home
Appendix G. Firmware History Alspa GD2000E

Page G-4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Glossary

Glossary

ADC (Analog-to-Digital convertor) Baud

A device which converts an analog input signal into a The unit for the measurement of the rate at which
digital output signal. data is transmitted during data communications. 1
Baud = 1 bit of information/second. As virtually all
Alphanumeric communications uses just two signal levels (one for 0
and one for 1), Baud can normally be taken as
Containing both letters and numbers synonymous with bits/second.

Analog Binary

Continuously variable, as distinct from variable in Numerical representations using 1’s and 0’s or ON
discrete steps. and OFF states only. The digits in a pure binary
number have weightings in ascending powers of 2, i.e.
ASCII 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 etc.

Short for “American Standard Code for Information


Thus, decimal 79 = binary 1001111 (64+8+4+2+1)
Interchange”. This is a 7-bit code basically consisting
of 32 control codes and 96 character codes. It is widely
Broadcast
used for data transmission, especially in the data
messages sent to printers and VDU’s.
Serial link transmission by a control port of a
common message to all tributary ports on a network,
Asynchronous Motor
rather than sending separate messages one at a time
to each secondary port. Broadcast messages therefore
Another name for an induction motor.
get the information to the secondaries quicker, but
Base Drive and Gate Drive the secondaries cannot then immediately
acknowledge the message.
Printed circuit assembly containing circuits for:
Closed Loop Control
– signal isolation between control and power stages;
A control system in which a measurement is
– the generation of appropriate voltage or current driving continually made of the quantity being controlled,
pulses for the base of bipolar power transistors, or the gates and compared against a reference value. Corrective
of IGBT’s, or GTO thyristors. action is then taken as necessary to reduce the
difference between the reference signal and the
The printed circuit may also contain circuits for measurement signal.
monitoring the performance of the driven device, e.g.
for overcurrent protection. Commissioning

Base Frequency The process of setting a newly installed equipment or


system to work, and checking that it performs to the
On an a.c. drive, the frequency of the power output design specifications after installation.
from the drive determines the speed of the motor. So
as to keep the flux constant, the voltage is made Control Port
proportional to the frequency (see: V/F Ratio).
However, at a certain frequency, the maximum A serial port that acts as the master port on a serial
voltage of which the drive is capable is reached. This link. It exercises control over the message traffic on a
is called the base frequency of the drive. serial link network (ie a control port can initiate a
message transaction). See also Tributary port..
Base Speed
Convertor
Base speed is the speed at which a motor runs when
supplied at full rated voltage from the drive output, Power electronics circuit that changes one or more of
with full field strength and with the motor providing the properties of the power supply, e.g. frequency,
full load torque. magnitude, or a.c.-to-d.c.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Glossary Page 1

Print Home
Glossary Alspa GD2000E
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Earth (Ground)

A method of checking the integrity of data. CRC 1. Safety Earth


checks are often used to check data transmitted over
communications links or to check data being read Earth connection used for safety purposes in case of
from magnetic or other media. electrical insulation breakdown. Safety earth
connections must be permanently and directly
Current Fed Start
connected to earth without fuses or links; they must
use cable of a heavy enough gauge to conduct any
The drive operates as a constant current source
fault currents without the equipment voltage rising to
during start up. The constant current is maintained
levels unsafe for personnel.
at the current limit by varying the voltage applied to
the motor.
2. Signal Ground
DAC (Digital-to-analog convertor)
Noise-free earth connection used for the 0V of the
Electronics device that converts a digital input signal control electronics.
into an analog output signal.
Encoder
D.C. Link
Device coupled to the motor shaft that provides
In the GD 2000 the power circuit, the alternating feedback information about the position/speed of the
supply voltage is rectified to a direct voltage. Filtering motor armature or rotor. Encoders are of two types:
and energy storage components form the d.c. link to
the inverter bridge. The two main components are the 1. Incremental
d.c. link choke and the d.c. link capacitor bank.

DC Injection Braking See: Pulse Generator.

DC current is injected into the motor for a short 2. Absolute


period of time to establish a magnetic flux in the
stator. This gives increased the braking torque and a
Provides a number representing position. The speed
zero speed braking torque.
of the encoder can be deduced by subtracting one
Digital position number from another position number
measured a given time apart. An absolute encoder
A digital circuit is one that responds only to discrete does not lose its datum on power outage, and
input voltage levels, and whose output consists only therefore requires no zeroing procedure.
of discrete voltage levels. Usually, only two voltage
Error Signal
levels are recognized.

Disturbance The difference between the reference (setpoint) signal


and the feedback (measured value) signal on a closed
Any undesired change of variable affecting the loop control. Under steady state conditions, error
operation of the plant. The main purpose of closed signals tend to zero on controls that include integral
loop control systems is to hold the output variable at action.
the correct value despite disturbances. Not all
ESP (Extended Simple Protocol)
disturbances are rapid. Some are (e.g. change of load
torque applied to a drive, changes on power input
Standard protocol for serial link communications by
voltages), but others are slow (e.g. changes in ambient
CEGELEC Industrial Control products.
temperature).

Dynamic Braking ESP gives a very high confidence that data


transmission errors are detected at the receiving end
A method of braking which is depends on the motor to of the link and that detected errors are corrected by
generate a braking effect. This is achieved by using automatic retransmission.
the motor and inverter to convert the kinetic energy
of the load back in to electrical energy, which is then
dissipated in a resistor, under the control of a
‘Dynamic Braking Unit’.

Glossary Page 2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Glossary
Fan Fluxing For an object that rotates such as a motor, its inertia
defines how much torque it requires to make it
The torque characteristics of an ac motor connected to accelerate at a certain rate. For a drive system, the
a variable frequency ac drive are determined by the total inertia will consist of the moment of inertia of
relationship between voltage and output frequency. the motor and the rotational or linear inertia of the
Some motor loads such as pumps and fans have a equipment being driven.
torque characteristic which is proportional to the
square of the motor speed. Fan fluxing provides a Inertia Compensation
“square law” output voltage/frequency relationship to
match torque of the motor to a fan or pump type load. Additional current reference, often provided on
tension control systems as an open loop correction,
Fast Fluxing Start that calls for the portion of motor current required to
accelerate the drive. The signal is required where no
DC current is injected into the motor to establish the tension feedback from a tension transducer is
magnetic flux before rotation begins. This gives high available, or where the response of this feedback
starting torque with fast acceleration, but causes a cannot be made fast enough.
short delay before the motor begins to rotate.
Input
Feedback Signal
Term applied to all signals coming from the plant
In a closed loop control system, a signal taken from and/or the operator into a functional device or item of
the output being controlled, normally isolated from it equipment.
and scaled to electronics levels (e.g. +10V full scale).
The closed loop control compares this signal against Integral Control
the reference signal so as to determine what action to
take if it is not of the correct value. Closed loop control in which the control amplifier (if
analog) or control algorithm (if digital) includes an
Forced Ventilation (F.V.) integral term.

Ventilation where cooling is effected by a ventilation


The output from an integral term tends to ramp up or
fan.
down as long as there is any input signal, and only
stops moving when its input is zero. If the input
History Record
signal is, in fact, the error between the reference and
feedback for a particular quantity, then integral
A diagnostic aid and a feature of the GD 2000 series
control will tend to make the feedback signal exactly
of drive units, whereby specified drive data is
equal to the reference, in the steady state.
recorded, while the drive is operating and can be
replayed later.
Interlock
IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
Any hardwired circuit or software algorithm ensuring
that operations are carried out in the correct
A power semiconductor device, used to switch the
sequence. This is particularly important on the start
three phase power output of the GD 2000 series of
up and shutdown of a drive. On many types of drive
drives.
and industrial plant, operations carried out in an
Induction motor incorrect sequence can result in equipment damage or
personnel hazard.
A form of motor having a 3-phase stator winding and
Inverter
a passive “cage” rotor. As the rotor has no
commutator, slip rings or brushgear, an induction
Equipment which converts a d.c. input into an a.c.
motor is rugged and relatively maintenance free.
output.
Formerly, induction motors were always connected to
the a.c. supply and therefore ran at a nominally
Inverting Bridge
constant speed. When connected to a variable
frequency drive unit such as GD 2000 an induction
An electrical circuit which converts a dc input to an ac
motor can be used for variable speed and torque
ouput.
applications which previously would have required a
dc motor. IR Comp
Inertia
See: Voltage Control with IR Comp.
A measure of the tendency of a mechanical body to
resist any change to its present state of motion.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Glossary Page 3

Print Home
Glossary Alspa GD2000E
I2T Measured Value

A quantity proportional to the total heat produced by Synonym for “feedback signal”, used more widely in
a given current I. The power dissipated in resistance process control than motor control. In a closed loop
R equals I2R. For a fixed value of resistance, the control system, it is the signal taken from the output
energy dissipated in a given time t is therefore being controlled, normally isolated from it and scaled
proportional to I2T. This quantity is often referred to to electronics levels (e.g. +10V full scale). The closed
in the context of devices, circuits and algorithms, that loop control compares this signal against the setpoint
provide protection of motors and power semiconductor signal so as to determine what action to take if it is
devices. not of the correct value.

Leg Memory

That part of a bridge circuit that has one a.c. line The storage space on a microprocessor-based drive
connection and one d.c. output connection. that a user can store data or instructions in. It also
includes internal work space used by the processor
Limits but not visible to the user.

In a control system, circuits (analog) or algorithms Module


(digital) that prevent variables exceeding safe values,
despite what is done to the reference by an operator, An assembly designed to be easily removable for
programmable controller or computer, or to the load. maintenance or replacement.

Line (a.c.) Monitoring

The incoming a.c. supply wires or busbars. The observation of the working of a system or
equipment.
Link
Multidrop Serial Link
2. Link for a.c. drives: See DC Link.
Serial link using the same wires to connect a
3. Link for serial I/O: See Serial Link. controller to two or more tributary devices e.g. drives
or programmable controllers.
Load
Natural Ventilation (N.V.)
1. Convertors
Ventilation where all the cooling is by natural
convection.
The circuit connected to the convertor output
terminals. Normally consists of a motor armature, or Non-inverting Bridge
a motor or generator field, or, on an a.c. drive, an
inverter. A bridge that is NOT capable of returning energy
from the load to the a.c. supply.
2. Inverters
Open Loop Control

The 3-phase circuit connected to the inverter output A control system that has no feedback from any
terminals. Normally consists of an a.c. induction measurement transducer.
motor.
Optical Isolation
3. Motors
Means of achieving a high degree of electrical
isolation between conductors in different parts of a
The torque applied mechanically to the motor by the
system. Uses a light source in one circuit to activate a
process being driven. The purpose of a drive system is
light sensitive device in a second electrically separate
to control the motor torque so as to balance the
circuit. Besides preventing the imposition of high
applied load.
voltages on sensitive electronic equipment, it also
prevents the passage of high frequency electrical
interference.

Glossary Page 4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Glossary
Parameter Reference

A value placed in a specific location in memory which A signal (analog or digital) representing the required
is used to control the operation of GD 2000 and to value of the quantity being controlled. Synonym for
provide information about the operation of the drive. “setpoint”, the term more commonly used in process
control, whereas “reference” is more commonly used
Point-to-Point Serial Link in motor control.

A serial communications link connecting a controller Regeneration


to a single tributary.
The returning of power from a motor back into the
Position Control supply or into a resistor.

Closed loop control in which the position of some


With a d.c. motor, regeneration can occur if the motor
output shaft or device must follow a position
is fed via a full controlled convertor of a type capable
reference. Accurate position controls are always
of inversion, and if the control system is suitably
digital to avoid drift. They usually incorporate speed
designed.
inner loops with speed limits to prevent excessive
speed being called for on large position movements.
With an a.c. motor, regeneration occurs when power
Program flows from the motor back through the inverter to the
d.c. link. So as not to cause the d.c. link voltage to rise
Set of logical instructions that determines the and the drive to trip as a result of “Overvoltage”, this
behaviour of a microprocessor-based drive. Normally, regenerated energy can be accommodated in one of
the term is used to refer just to the instructions two ways:
provided by the user as the “user program”. In
addition, the microprocessor obeys program – the regenerated energy can be dissipated in a resistor con-
instructions provided as firmware permanently built nected across the d.c. link (resistive regeneration) under the
into a drive during manufacture. control of a dynamic braking unit.

Pulse Generator – if the drive is equipped with a convertor capable of inversion,


the regenerated energy can be returned to the supply as for
A speed transducer producing pulses at a rate the d.c. drive case.
proportional to speed. Before it can be used, the pulse
Regulation
train has to be converted into an analog signal or a
digital number (e.g. by counting pulses over a defined
1. Supply
time interval).

PWM - Pulse Width Modulation. The regulation of the supply from a source of power is
the fractional drop in volts that occurs when the
A method of controlling power output of a drive, by current drawn is increased from zero to the rated (full
switching the output, which has a fixed voltage, on load) current. Thus, a transformer will be said to have
and off. The total period of the on off cycle is fixed at a a 7% regulation if its output voltage falls from 100%
constant value and power is varied by altering the (when open circuit) to 93% (when in a circuit drawing
‘mark space ratio’ ie the time switched off compared full load current).
to the time switched off within the fixed period.
2. Motor
Rated Speed

For an induction motor, the shaft speed of the motor The regulation of a motor (on its own, not controlled
when operating at rated voltage and supply frequency by a drive) is the fractional drop in speed that occurs
with rated torque applied. The rated speed will be when the torque on its shaft is increased from zero to
less than the corresponding synchronous speed by a the rated (full load) torque. Thus, a motor is said to
fraction of synchronous speed called the rated slip. have a 5% regulation if its speed falls from 1500
rev/min to 1425 rev/min when full load torque is
Rectifier applied to its shaft.

A circuit that converts a.c. to d.c. The regulation of a motor is normally quoted in terms
of base speed. See also ‘Slip’.

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Glossary Page 5

Print Home
Glossary Alspa GD2000E
3. Drive The Alspa GD series of drives generally drives
support three protocols, GEM80 ESP which is also
The regulation of a drive is measured in the same used by GEM80 programmable controllers, MODBUS
way as for a motor. However, where the drive ASCII and MODBUS RTU which are used by
incorporates a closed loop speed control, for instance, GEM80-16 controllers.
regulation depends on the characteristics of the drive,
Serial Port
not on those of the motor. The regulation of a drive is
normally quoted in terms of base speed of the motor.
A serial link interface of a drive unit or controller i.e
Resolution the output connector and the associated internal
circuitry and logic.
The smallest change of reference or setpoint to which
Setpoint
the control must respond. In digital systems, the
resolution cannot be better than 1 bit, but may be
A signal (analog or digital) representing the required
worse depending on the system. In an analog system,
value of the quantity being controlled. Synonym for
the resolution may be defined as the smallest change
“reference”, the term more commonly used in motor
in voltage, current, speed, etc., that the system will
control, whereas “setpoint” is more commonly used in
respond to.
process control.
Resolver
Signal Ground
Position transducer that resolves an angular position
See: Earth
into sine and cosine components. It is in effect a
transformer where the coupling between windings
Single Ended Non-inverting (SENI) Convertor
varies with angle. Resolvers normally operate at
frequencies of 400 Hz and above.
A single bridge giving only one polarity of output and
incapable of transferring energy back into the supply.
May also be used as a speed transducer on systems
that can detect the change in position over a defined Slip
time interval.
When load torque is applied to the shaft of an
Ribbon Cable induction motor, the shaft speed drops. If this speed
drop is expressed as a fraction of the synchronous
Flat cable of multiple conductors with insulation speed of the motor, then this quantity is called the
joined edge-to-edge in the form of a ribbon. You can ‘slip’. Thus, if a motor is operating at a synchronous
make connections between plugs or sockets and speed of 1200 rev/min and, because of load torque, is
ribbon cable in a single, simple operation that bares running at 1080 rev/min, then it is said to be running
and connects all the wires at once. with a slip of 0.1 (or 10%).

Scaling
See also: Rated speed; synchronous speed.
The multiplication of any signal or parameter value
Slip Compensation
by a factor.
An adjustable control on GD 2000 series drives. It
Serial Link
attempts to compensate for changes in motor speed
(or slip) caused by changes in load torque. The drive
Data communication path that carries signals one
output frequency is increased in response to an
after another (serially) along a pair of wires, rather
increase in motor current.
than simultaneously along several wires in parallel.
Snubber Circuit
Serial Link Protocol
A circuit fitted to protect power semiconductor
Definition of the way in which data to be
devices against voltage or current surges. Snubber
communicated is packaged for transmission serially
circuits are used:
along a link. The protocol allows the data to be routed
to the correct destination, and allows for error
detection and correction. – in convertors, across thyristors or diodes to limit the voltage
stress on them due to stored charge recovery effects;
– in inverter circuits, to limit the rate of rise of voltage across
a device that has been commutated off;
– in some inverters, to limit the rate of rise of current in a
device that has been commutated on.

Glossary Page 6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Glossary
Software Synchronous speed = (Supply frequency x 120)/No. of
poles
Any program in a microprocessor-based system (drive
or programmable controller). Usually taken to mean a
For instance, the synchronous speed of a 4-pole
user program, as the built-in executive software
induction motor on a 50 Hz supply is 1500 rev/min.
programmed into the system when manufactured is
normally referred to as firmware.
See also: Slip.
Speed Control
Tension Control
Closed loop control of motor speed using a speed
feedback signal. In most cases, this signal comes from A control system trying to maintain tension, usually
a tachogenerator, but on digital systems may on in strip material. Often associated with unwinding
occasion be taken from a pulse generator or resolver. and rewinding the strip, a process rather like that on
a tape recorder.
Squirrel Cage Motor
Toggle
See Induction Motor.
Any action that has two stable states. Often used for
Stall the action of any key on a keypad where successive
presses of the key cause alternating results. eg the
The condition of a motor when stationary but mode key toogles between Parameter value and
producing a torque. Parameter number each time it is pressed.

Status Torque Control

Operational condition of a GD 2000 or GEM80 A control system setting the torque provided by a
programmable controller e.g. Stopped, Running, motor. It is usually difficult to directly measure
Healthy, Tripped. torque, and therefore a torque control will generally
set the torque indirectly.
Steady State Regulation
Tributary Port
The steady state regulation of a drive is the drop in
motor speed, expressed as a fraction of base speed, A serial communications port which can only respond
that occurs after full load torque has been applied to to messages addressed to it by the control port on the
the motor output shaft, measured after sufficient time link. A tributary port cannot initiate a message
has elapsed for any transient effects to have died transaction.
away. Speed controlled drives incorporating speed
feedback and integral action in the controller have Uncontrolled Convertor
zero steady state regulation.
Otherwise called an uncontrolled rectifier. Consists of
Striker Pin Fuse (S.P.F.) a bridge in which all the legs contain diodes. Has the
ability to rectify only, with no ability to control the
Sometimes referred to as a Trip Indicator Fuse. It output voltage.
indicates when a main fuse has ruptured. The striker
pin consists of a spring-loaded plunger with the Unit
spring held under compression by a high resistance
fuse wire. Rupture of the fuse wire releases the A self-contained piece of equipment or assembly.
plunger which, normally, operates the microswitch.
Variable
Suicide
1. Physical Quantity
The killing off of any residual voltage from a
generator, convertor or inverter before any contactor Any quantity, whether controlled or not, that changes
or circuit breaker completing the motor armature or during system operation and affects the system.
stator circuit is closed. Typical variables on a motor control system are
convertor output voltage, armature loop current, field
Synchronous Speed current, ambient temperature etc.

The theoretical operating speed of an induction motor


on no-load (with no torque applied to the motor shaft)
at a particular supply frequency. This is given by the
formula:

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Glossary Page 7

Print Home
Glossary Alspa GD2000E
2. Program variable Voltage Source

A voltage source inverter has a voltage-stiff d.c. link


Any data value in a program that changes during
by virtue of the use of a large value of d.c. link
system operation. Some program variables will
capacitance connected across the power input to the
correspond to physical quantities (i.e. to external
inverter bridge. This is in contrast with a current
variables) whereas other data values will be used just
source inverter, which has a current-stiff d.c. link by
for internal calculation purposes (internal variables).
virtue of a large value of d.c. link inductance
Vector Control connected to the inverter bridge.

A technique used to maintain optimum spatial All Alspa GD-AC equipments manufactured at
orientation between the effective flux and the rotor Kidsgrove are of the voltage source type. Some of
current in a.c. machines to give d.c. motor equivalent those manufactured at Rugby are of the current
performance. source type.

Voltage Vector
See: Field Orientation control; Voltage Vector.

V/F Ratio A method of calculating PWM patterns that differs


from the sinusoidal method. It determines the spatial
To maintain a constant flux within the motor, the position of the voltage vector.
applied voltage is made proportional to the output
Watchdog
frequency. This avoids magnetic saturation at low
frequency and maintains torque at high frequency.
Circuit devoted to checking the health of a controller,
See also ‘Base frequency’.
used both in microprocessor-based drives and
Voltage Boost programmable controllers. To achieve a high
confidence of fail-safe operation, the final device in a
The output voltage of the drive is the increased at low watchdog is a relay that is de-energized under fault
output frequencies to compensate for the voltage drop conditions. A volt-free contact of the relay is provided
in the stator of the induction motor. Voltage Boost is for you to include in the power supply switching and
needed to maintain torque at low speeds. distribution circuits to achieve a safe shutdown
appropriate to the application. Self test procedures
and duplication of the watchdog hardware guard
against failure of a watchdog circuit.

Watchdog circuits usually depend on hardware timer


circuits that must be reset within a given time
window by the microprocessor. If the microprocessor
fails to do this, then the controller will shut down.

Glossary Page 8 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Index

INDEX

A RS232, 8-1, 8-6


RS485, 8-2
Acceleration, 7-8 Braking
Access, 9-5, 9-11, 9-16, D-5 DC injection, 2-4, 7-4, 7-12
Acoustic noise, 2-9, 9-4, 9-10, 9-16, D-4 regeneration, 7-12
Active control source, 7-48 saturation, 7-13
Active reference source, 7-48 Broadcast messages, 8-5, 8-7
Altitude
derating, 2-9
derating with, 9-2, C-38, D-4 C
operating, 9-2, C-38, D-4
Ambient temperature, 9-2, C-38, D-4 Cabling
Analog frequency reference, 7-51 segregation, 5-1
Analog input connection, 6-1 Communications
Analog inputs, 2-2, 7-25, 7-28, 7-51 GEM 80 ESP protocol, 1-4
REF1 and REF2, 6-6 MODBUS, 1-4
speed reference, 6-7 RS232 Serial port, 1-4
Analog loss, 7-18 RS485 Serial Port, 1-4
Analog output, 2-2 Serial Ports, 1-4
Analog output connections, 6-1 Component replacement, 11-2
Analog output value, 7-49 Connecting cable, 7-55
Analog outputs, 6-8, 7-36 Control
power scaling, 7-38 Analog inputs, 6-6, 7-25
Analog reference analog references, 7-29
speed control, 7-29 back-up control source, 7-25
Analog reference selection, 6-4 back-up reference source, 7-27
Atmosphere, 9-2, C-38, D-4 digital inputs, 7-25
Attribute direction control, 7-29
parameter, 7-23 direction control mode, 7-30
Attributes, 7-57 fixed speed menu, 7-34
Auto-locking Frequency multiplier, 7-27
security codes, 7-24 local, 7-27
Auto-reset PID controller, 7-25, 7-44
control loss, 7-20 preset frequency reference, 7-27
delay, 7-20 preset run/stop state, 7-25
drive over-temperature, 7-20 preset speed, 7-25
healthy time, 7-21 principal reference source, 7-26
load faults, 7-20 Raise/lower, 7-26, 7-36
motor thermal trip, 7-20 Raise/lower speed, 7-28
over-current, 7-20 reference sequencer, 7-32
reference loss, 7-20 trim reference, 7-30
reset attempts, 7-21 Control board, 4-2
Auto-resetting trips, 7-19 Control connections, 6-9, 9-9, 9-15
Auto-restart, 7-3, 11-3 Control loss
configuring, 7-21 autoreset, 7-20
supply loss timeout, 7-22 Control module, C-4
synchro-start, 7-23 Control source, 7-25
synchro-start current, 7-23 serial links, 8-4
synchro-start mode, 7-23 Control source feedback, 7-48
Autoreset, 2-3 Control source indicator, 7-48
Controls
Front Panel, 1-2, 3-1 - 3-2
B LED indicators, 1-3
Start button, 3-2
Back-up Stop button, 3-1
reference source, 7-27 Cooling, 9-4, 9-10, 9-16, C-39, D-5
Back-up control Fan, 4-3
warning, 7-26 cooling air, 2-9
Back-up control source, 7-25, 8-9 Cooling fans, C-9
Back-up reference source, 8-9 Current fed start, 7-4
Base frequency, 7-3 Current feedback, 7-46
Baud rate, 2-5 Current leakage, 2-9

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Index Page 1

Print Home
Index Alspa GD2000E
Current limit, 7-17 Error codes
Current limit response, 7-17 trip, 11-7
Current overload, 7-17 trips, 11-6
warning, 11-6
Error handling
D GEM 80 ESP, 8-16
Error messages, 8-18
DC injection GEM 80 ESP, 8-15
current, 7-12 Errors
delay, 7-12 fatal, 11-4
duration, 7-12 ESP protocol, 8-1, 8-4 - 8-6, 8-10
DC injection braking, 7-12 Exception message, 8-18
DC injection frequency, 7-12
DC Link, 4-2, C-9
DC link inductor, 9-1, 9-19, C-9 F
DC link voltage, 7-51
Deceleration, 7-8 Fan fluxing, 7-6
Default Settings Fan transformer, C-9
Return to, 3-3 Fast fluxing, 7-4
DELTA Fatal errors, 11-4
system configuration, 7-5, 10-2 Fault
Delta power modules, C-8 Indication, 2-5
Delta transistor modules, C-9 load fault detection, 7-15
Derating transient ride-through, 7-17
altitude, 2-9, 9-2, C-38, D-4 Fault code attributes, 7-19
Digital input, 2-1 Fault codes
MTRIP, 6-4 trips, 11-7
Digital input connections, 6-1 warning, 11-6
Digital inputs, 6-3, 7-25, 7-28, 7-51 Fault finding, 11-2
Direction, 6-4 Fixed speed menu, 7-34
Interlock input, 6-4 Fixed voltage boost, 7-7
MTRIP, 7-13 Frequency
raise/lower control, 6-6 d.c. injection, 7-12
RUN1 and RUN2, 6-4 output, 2-6
start button, 6-5 Frequency comparator, 7-39
Stop, 6-3 Frequency feedback, 7-46
thermostat protection, 6-5 Frequency limits, 7-5
Digital output, 2-1 Frequency multiplier, 7-27
Digital output connections, 6-1 Frequency reference, 7-28
Digital outputs, 6-7, 7-38, 7-51 PID, 7-45
control source indicator, 7-48 Front panel controls-using, 7-27
reference source indicator, 7-48 Full load current, 7-2, 7-46
Dimensions, 2-10 Fuse
Direction control, 7-29 Input Line, 5-2
Direction control mode, 7-30 Fuses, 2-6
Disposal Instructions, 9-3, C-39, D-4
Drive Records, 7-52
Energy Consumed, 7-52 G
Set Up Review, 7-52
Setup review, 7-52 GD Delta, C-4
duty type switch mode power supply, C-4
dual rated drives, 7-1 GEM 80 16, 8-19
GEM 80 ESP
error handling, 8-16
E error messages, 8-15
Message length, 8-15
Electrical connections, 1-4, 9-7, 9-12, 9-25, D-8 pages, 8-12
user inputs, 6-1 user-defined page-configuring, 8-15
Electro Magnetic Compatibility, 2-9 GEM 80 ESP protocol, 1-4
Energy consumed GEM 80 ESP User defined page, 8-13
drive records, 7-52 Gland box, 9-12
Enhanced keypad, 1-4, A-1, C-4 Ground connections, 9-22, 9-26, D-9
language, A-17 Ground leakage current, 1-2
Enhanced keypad connector, 1-4 Grounding, 9-7, 9-13
Enhanced Programming Unit, 1-2, 4-2, 8-1
Enhanced torque performance
torque limit, 7-9
Environment, 9-2, C-38, D-4

Index Page 2 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Index
H RS485 serial port, 2-5
Minimum frequency, 7-5
Hazardous waste, 9-3, D-4 MODBUS, 8-4, 8-6
Heat loss, 9-3, C-38 Error messages, 8-18
Heat output, 9-9, 9-16 RTU, 8-16
History log, 11-4 Monitoring, 7-46
History logs, 7-52 External Inputs, 7-51
configuring, 7-53 Monitoring,Serial links, 8-9
recording mode, 7-54 Motor
using serial links, 8-10 base frequency, 7-3
History record, 2-5, 3-2 base voltage, 7-2
Hoist Brake Control], 7-43 full load current, 7-2
Hours run, 7-50 Motor braking, 7-12
Motor connections, 9-13 - 9-14, 9-22, 9-27, 10-3,
D-10
I Motor cooling, 7-14
Motor protection, 7-13
Identification of components, C-37 Motor stability, 7-10
Identification of Drive Unit, 9-2, D-3 Motor thermal trip
Input fuses, 5-2 auto-reset, 7-20
Input line reactor, 5-4 Motor volts feedback, 7-46
Input power, 2-6 MTRIP, 7-13
Input/Output action on, 7-13, 7-63
Analog Inputs, 2-2 digital input, 6-4
Analog output, 2-2 Multi-motor applications, 7-8
Digital inputs, 2-1
Digital output, 2-1
Inputs N
monitoring, 7-51
Inputs/Outputs Normal fluxing, 7-6
User, 4-3
Interlock, 6-3
auto-reset, 7-20 O
Operating temperature, 2-9
J Output frequency, 7-5, 7-8, 7-27
Output line reactor, 5-4
Jog speed input, 7-42 Output power, 2-6
Output protection, 2-8
Output voltage, 2-6, 7-2
K Over-current
auto-reset, 7-20
Keypad, A-1, C-4 Over-volts
language, A-17 auto-reset, 7-20
Overheating, 7-13
overload
L I2T, 7-14
1.1x , 7-1
Language parameter 998, 7-1
enhanced keypad, A-17 Overload duration, 7-13
LED indicators, 3-2 Overload protection, 7-13
Line input fuses, 5-2
Load fault detection, 7-15 - 7-16
Load faults P
auto-reset, 7-20
Local control, 7-24 Parameter
Loop-back test, 8-18 Attribute, 7-23
Low motor voltage, 7-19 Attributes, 3-3
Entry, 1-2
selecting, 3-3
M value changing, 3-3
Parameters
Maintenance schedules, 11-1 Basic settings, 2-3, 7-1, 10-3
Manual trigger, 7-33 user-defined page, 8-13
Maximum frequency, 7-5 Percentage current, 7-50
Message length Percentage frequency, 7-50
GEM 80 ESP, 8-15 PID control, 7-44
Message protocols PID controller, 7-25
RS232 serial port, 2-5 PID differential action time, 7-45

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Index Page 3

Print Home
Index Alspa GD2000E
PID error dead band, 7-45 Remote termination panel, 1-4
PID error inversion, 7-46 Remote trip reset, 11-3
PID frequency reference, 7-45 Resetting trips, 11-3
PID integral action time, 7-45 Ride-through
PID local set point, 7-45 low motor voltage, 7-19
PID proportional band, 7-45 Ridethrough
Power connections, 1-4, 5-1 Auto-restart, 7-21
Cabling, 5-1 supply loss, 7-18
fuses, 5-2 RS232
Input isolator, 5-4 Broadcast messages, 8-7
line contactor, 5-4 CRC check, 8-7
Power factor message protocol, 8-6
motor full load, 7-10 parity select, 8-7
Power interface board, C-6 timeout, 8-6
Power supply timeout count, 8-7
User +24 V, 2-3 user defined page, 8-14
Power supply connections, 9-8, 9-13, 9-22, 9-26, RS232 port configuration, 8-5
10-1, D-10 RS232 serial link
Power supply connectons, 9-14 supply loss time-out, 7-22
power terminals RS232 serial links, 7-25
torque settings, 9-3, 9-7, 9-13, 9-22, 9-26, D-9 RS232 serial port, 1-2, 2-5
Pre-charge circuitscircuits to limit the in-rush current RS232 serial port connector, 1-4
when the power is applied to the drive., C-9 RS485, 2-5
Pre-charge relay, C-8 CRC check, 8-5
precharge acknowledge], C-43 parity select, 8-5
Precharge circuits, 4-1 timeout, 8-4 - 8-5
Preset frequency reference, 7-27 RS485 connections, 6-1, 8-2
Preset run/stop state, 7-25 RS485 serial link, 3-2
Printer, 7-55, 8-6 supply loss time-out, 7-22
Printer connector, 1-4 RS485 serial links, 7-25
Printing options, 7-56 RS485 serial port, 1-2, 1-4
Process speed, 7-49 - 7-50 RS485 serial port configuration, 8-3
Protection, 2-9 RS485 user defined page, 8-14
I2T, 2-4, 7-13
thermostat, 7-13
timed over-current, 7-49 S
Pulse width modulation, 2-2, 7-2 - 7-3, 9-4, 9-10,
9-16, C-38, D-4 Saturation braking, 7-13
PWM frequency Security
Default settings, 7-3 engineer security code, 7-24
operator security code, 7-24
passwords, 7-23
R serial communications, 8-3
Security code
Radio frequency emissions, 9-4, 9-9 - 9-10, 9-16, auto-locking, 7-24
9-23, 9-27, C-38, D-5, D-10 Security key, 7-24
Radio frequency interference, 9-4, 9-9 - 9-10, 9-16, Segregation, 9-9, 9-15, 9-23, 9-27, C-44, D-10
9-23, 9-27, C-38, D-5, D-10 Serial communications
Raise/lower control, 6-6 GEM 80 ESP, 8-4 - 8-6, 8-10
Raise/lower speed control, 7-28 GEM 80-10 N-Bus protocol, 8-19
Reactor GEM 80-16 N-Bus protocol, 8-19
input line, 5-4 MODBUS ASCII, 8-19
output line, 5-4 multi-drop connections, 8-2
Receipt of Equipment, 9-1, B-1, C-37, D-3 RS232, 2-5
Rectifier modules, C-9 RS232 port, 8-1
Reference loss RS485, 2-5
auto-reset, 7-20 RS485 connections, 8-2
Reference sequencer, 7-32 RS485 port, 8-2
manual trigger, 7-33 Serial link, 7-26, 7-36
Reference source, 7-25, 7-48 Serial links
serial links, 8-4 broadcast messages, 8-5
Reference source indicator, 7-48 control source, 8-7
Regeneration, 7-12, 7-18 reference source, 8-7
Relative humidity, 9-2, C-38, D-4 Setup review, 7-52
Remote control pointer, 7-41 Shield connections, 6-1
Remote control selection, 7-40 Skip bands, 2-3, 7-10
Remote reference pointer, 7-41 Slip compensation, 7-8
Remote reference selection, 7-26, 7-40 - 7-41 SMPS,connecting, C-42

Index Page 4 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Alspa GD2000E Index
Special tools, 9-3, 9-9, 9-16, 11-1, D-4 serial links, 8-9
Speed reference supply loss, 7-22
connections, 6-7 Torque limit, 7-9
Square root function, 7-26, 7-35 cut in frequency, 7-9
Stabilising mode, 7-9
motor speed, 7-10 speed, 7-9
Stability gain, 7-10 Torque settings
Stability Time Constant, 7-10 power terminals, 9-3, 9-7, 9-13, 9-22, 9-26, D-9
Start mode Trim reference, 7-30
current fed, 7-4 Trip
fast fluxing, 7-4 auto-reset, 11-3
immediate, 7-3 remote reset, 11-3
synchrostart, 7-3 resettable/non resettable, 11-2
Start modes, 7-3 Resetting, 11-3
Start up frequency, 7-8 system, 11-2
Stop mode, 7-4 time since last, 7-52
Stop modes, 7-3 trip fault codes, 11-2
Stop time limit, 7-4 Trip avoidance
Storage, 9-2, C-37, D-3 analog input loss, 7-18
Storage temperature, 2-9 low motor voltage, 7-19
Supply frequency, 2-6 over-temperature, 7-18
Supply loss supply loss, 7-18
timeout, 7-22 timed over-current, 7-17 - 7-18
Supply loss timeout, 7-22 Trip error codes, 11-7
Switch mode power supply, 4-2, C-4, C-8 Trip history, 11-4
Synchro-start, 7-23 Trips
scan rate, 7-23 auto-resetting, 7-19
Synchrostart, 7-3 Trips resetting, 11-3
System configuration
DELTA drives, 7-5, 10-2
System trips U
resetting, 11-3
Under-volts
autoreset, 7-20
T User Termination Panel, C-4, C-7 - C-8

Temperature
operating, 2-9 V
storage, 2-9
Temperature Feedback Ventilation, 9-4, 9-10, 9-16, C-39, D-5
control electronics, 7-47 Voltage
input bridge, 7-47 output, 2-6
output bridge, 7-47 Voltage boost
Thermistor inputs, C-8 fixed, 7-7
Thermostat, 7-13 load dependent, 7-7
Thermostat inputs, C-8
Thermostat protection, 6-4, 7-13
Time since last trip W
drive records, 7-52
Timed over-current, 7-17, 7-49 Warning
Timeout back up control, 7-26
analog loss, 7-18 error codes, 11-6
GEM 80 serial link, 8-16 warning codes, 11-2
RS232 serial link, 8-6 Weights, 2-10
RS485 serial link, 8-4

Issue 2 (9/96) GD2000E Technical Manual Index Page 5

Print Home
Index Alspa GD2000E

Index Page 6 GD2000E Technical Manual Issue 2 (9/96)

Print Home
Print Home
© 1996 CEGELECIndustrial Controls, England.

Print Home

You might also like